PDF Massey Ferguson 5425-5435-5445-5455-5460-5465 5400 Series Tractors Operator Instruction Manual

www.maskinisten.net

SHOP MANUAL

CASE/INTERNATIONAL MAGNUM SERIES MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 IDENTIFICATION Tractor model number and identification seriai number are iocated on a piate on iower ieft side of instrument panei cover. Engine seriai number is iocated on a piate on left side of timing gear iiousing. Cab seriai number is iocated on a piate just to the ieft of inching pedai. Transmission seriai number is located on a piate on right front side of speed transmission housing. On modeis so equipped, front-wheei drive seriai number is iocated on a piate on right rear side of front drive axie housing.

INDEX (By Starting Paragraph) 7110

Models 7120 7130

7140 71

AFTER COOLER AIR CLEANER SYSTEM . .

72

72

72

72

AXLE, FRONT (TWO WHEEL DRIVE) Axle Main Memter Front Support Spindles Tie Rod & Toe-In Wheel Bearings

4 5 2 3 1

4

5 2 3 1

4 5 2 3 1

4 5 2 3 1

BRAKES Adjustment Bleed System Brake Cylinders Control Valve

178 181 179 180

178 181 179 180

178 181 179 180

178 181 179 180

CAB Remove & Reinstall

228

228

228

228

COOLING SYSTEM Belt Tensioner Fan Filter & Conditioner Radiator Thermostat Water Pump

75 74 78 73 77 76

75 74 78 73 11 76

75 74 78 73 11 76

75 74 78 73 11 76

www.maskinisten.net

INDEX (CONT.) Models 7110

7120

7130

7140

55 67

55 67

55 67

55 67

52,53,54 66 56 59 57

52,53,54 66 56 59 57

: 52,53,54 66 56 59 57

52,53,54 66 56 59 57

DIFFERENTIAL (REAR) R&R and Overhaul .

171

171

171

171

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK Control Valve

175

175

175

175

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Accessory Systems Alternator Batteries Cab Fan Charging System Digital Instrument Cluster ..

Heater & Air Conditioning .

Protective Circuits Starting Motor Windshield Wiper

95 85 79 130 81 96 131 93 88 129

95 85 79 130 81 96 131 93 88 129

95 85 79 130 81 96 131 93 88 129

95 85 79 130 81 96 131 93 88 129

30 37

30 37

30 37

30 37

42 43 25 40 47 43 48 49 39 41 40

42 43 25 40 47 43 48 49 39 41 40

42 43 25 40 47 43 48 49 39 41 40

42 43 25 40 47 43 48 49 39 41 40

24 31 32 27 28 26

24 31 32 27 28 26

24 31 32 27 28 26

24 31 32 27 28 26

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM Bleed System Ether Starting Aid Fuel, Filters & Transfer Pump Fuel Solenoid Shut-Off . . . .

Injection Pump Injector Nozzle Timing

ENGINE Cam Followers Camshaft Connecting Rods & Bearings Crankshaft & Bearings Cylinder Head Cylinder Sleeves Flywheel Main Bearings Oil Pan Oil Pump Piston & Rod Removal Piston Pins & Bushings Pistons & Rings Remove & Reinstall Engine Assembly Timing Gear Cover Timing Gears Valve Adjustment Valve Guides & Springs . . .

Valves & Seats

www.maskinisten.net

INDEX (CONT.) Models 7110

7120

7130

7140

177 176

177 176

177 176

177 176

11 12 7

11 12 7

11 12 7

H 12 7

10 6 8 9

10 6 8 9

10 6 8 9

10 6 8 9

HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM Electronic Diagnostic Codes Control Circuit Tests Control Valve Hitch Adjustments Hitch Lift Assist Cylinders .

LiftHousing Operation

203 204 221 216 223 222 200

203 204 221 216 223 222 200

203 204 221 216 223 222 200

203 204 221 216 223 222 200

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Priority Valve Pto Control Valve Pump Compensator Valve ..

Pump Drive Unit Pumps

198 199 196 197 193

1% 199 196 197 193

1% 199 196 197 193

198 199 196 197 193

Remote Control Valves . . . .

224

224

224

224

182 183

182 183

182 183

182 183

134 138 133

134 138 133

134 138 133

134 138 133

150

150

150

150

161

161

161

161

FINAL DRIVES Overhaul Remove & Reinstall FRONT WHEEL DRIVE Differential Front Drive Shaft Front Support Pivot Housing & Axle shaft R&R Drive Axle Assy Tie Rod & Toe-In Wheel Hub & Planetary . . . .

PARK LOCK Linkage Adjustment Overhaul Park Lock POWER SHIFT Adjustment Control Valve Power Shift Operation Speed Transmission, Overhaul Range Transmission, Overhaul POWER STEERING SYSTEM

Huid, Filters & Bleeding . . .

13

13

13

13

Hand Pump Operational Tests Steering Cylinder System Pressure Trouble-Shooting

20 16 22,23 15 14

20 16 22,23 15 14

20 16 22,23 15 14

20 16 22,23 15 14

www.maskinisten.net

INDEX (CONT.) Models POWER TAKE-OFF Clutch Overhaul Control Valve Linkage Adjustment Overhaul Dual Shaft Overhaul Single Shdft Pressure Adjustment Rear Unit, R&R Reduction Gears

7110

7120

7130

7140

188,191 186 184 190 189 185 187 192

188,191 186 184 190 189 185 187 192

188,191 186 184 190 189 185 187 192

188,191 186 184 190 189 185 187 192

68 70 69

68 70 69

68 70

68 70 69

TURBOCHARGER Operation Overhaul Remove & Reinstall

69

DUAL DIMENSIONS This service manual provides specifications in both the U.S. Customary and Metric (SI) system of measurements. The first specification is given in the measuring system used during manufacture, while the second specification (given in parenthesis) is the converted measurement. For instance, a specification of "0.011 inch (0.279 mm)" would indicate that the equipment was manufactured using the U.S. system of measurement and the metric equivalent of 0.011 inch is 0.279 mm.

CONDENSED SERVICE DATA Models 7110 GENERAL Engine Make Engine Model Cylinders, No. of Bore Stroke Displacement Compression Ratio Main Bearings, No. of Cylinder Sleeves Forward Speeds TUNE-UP Firing Order Valve Tappet Gap, C o l d Intake Exhaust

7120

7130

_ ^ Case-International ^ 6T-830 6 4.488 in.

(114mm) 5.315 in.

(135 mm) 505 cu. in.

(8.3 L) 17.3:1 7 Wet 18 or 24 ^___

__^^__ 1-5-3-6-2-4.

0.012 i n . _ (0.305 mm) 0.024 in.__ (0.609 mm)

7140 6TA-830

16.5:1

www.maskinisten.net

CONDENSED SERVICE DATA (CONT.) Models 7110 TUNE-UP (CONT.) Injection Pump— Make Model Timing Injection Nozzles— Make Opening Pressure, New

Robert Bosch 17 mm 2968-3084 psi (20464-21263 kPa) 2722-3084 psi (18768-21263 kPa) Holset 825-875 2315-2395 2200 Negative

30 U.S. qts.

(28.6 L) 22 U.S. qts.

(21 L)

Crankcase (w/filters) Transmission & Hydraulic System

*95 U.S. gallons (359 liters) with auxiliary tank.

PS6MW TDC

CAPACITIES Cooling System

Oil Type

7140

Robert Bosch

Turbocharger— Make Engine Governed Speeds (Rpm)— Low Idle High Idle Rated Load Battery Terminal Grounded

Front Drive Axle— Differential (Axle) Housing Oil Type Planetary (Each Side)

7130

PS6A

Used

Oil Type Fuel Tank

7120

78 U.S. gal.* (295 L)*

202 U.S. qts.

(191 L) Hy-Tran Plus 78 U.S. gal.* 95 U.S. gal.

(295 L)* (359 L) Refer to paragraph 11.

Case IH 135 HEP or SAE 85W-140.

1 U.S. qt.

(0.9 L) Case IH 135 HEP or SAE 85W-140.

31 U.S. qts.

(29.3 L)

95 U.S. gal.

(359 L)

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraphs 1-4

FRONT AXLE (TWO-WHEEL DRIVE) FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS

TIE RODS AND TOE-IN

All Models

All Modeis

1. Refer to Fig. 1 for typical wheel hub and bearing assembly. The tapered inner and outer roller bearings are not interchangeable. Clean and inspect bearing cups and cones and renew as necessary.

Install dust shield (2) outer flange toward hub and with open section on the bottom. Install oil seal (3) on the spindle (1) so that metal face of seal is toward the hub. Press bearing cups (6) into hub until seated.

Pack bearing cones (5 and 8) with No. 2 lithium grease and install bearing cone (5) in hub. Install hub wear ring (4) into hub until outer flange contacts hub.

Coat lips of seal (3) with grease and install hub onto spindle. Install outer bearing cone (8), washer (9) and nut (10). Tighten nut to a torque of 15fl;.-lbs.(20 N.m) while rotating hub. Back off nut to flrst slot where cotter pin can be installed. Install cotter pin and cap (12). Lubricate the assembly through lube fitting (13).

Install wheel and tire assembly and tighten lug bolts to a torque of 140-160 ft.-lbs. (190-220 N.m).

3. Removal and disassembly ofthe tie rods is obvious after examination ofthe xmit and reference to Fig. 2. Tighten tie rod end slotted nuts to a torque of 100 ft.-lbs. (136 N.m) and install new cotter pins. Tighten clamp bolts to a torque of 40-50 ft.-lbs (55-70 N.m).

Front wheel toe-in must be 0.187-0.312 inch (4.77.9 mm). Ib adjust toe-in, remove clamp bolts from tie rod extension. Loosen jam nut, then rotate extension in or out to obtain correct toe-in. Install clamp bolts and tighten jam nut. Recheck toe-in and readjust if necessary. Both tie rods should be approximately the same length.

AXLE MAIN MEMBER All Models 4. Tb remove the axle main member (6—Fig. 3), first raise and support tractor under engine side rails with

SPINDLES All Models 2. R&R SPINDLES. Ib remove either spindle, lift and support front of tractor and remove wheel. Disconnect tie rod ball joint (9—Fig. 2) from steering arm (5). Remove cap screw (3) and washer (4). If not marked, install alignment punch marks on steering arm and spindle. Remove steering arm (5) and lower spindle assembly (11) from axle extension (7). Remove thrust bearing (10) from spindle. Inspect spindle bushings (6 and 8) in axle extension and renew as necessary.

If removed, install bushings (6 and 8) into axle extension with open end of oil grooves in bushings toward inside. Install bushings imtil recessed 0.157 inch (4 mm) below flush with top and bottom. New bushings are presized and should not require reaming if carefully installed.

Install thrust bearing (10) on spindle (11), then install spindle into axle extension. Align punch marks and install steering arm (5) on spindle. Apply Loctite 262 on threads of cap screw (3), then install cap screw and washer (4). Connect tie rod end to steering arm and tighten nut (1) to a torque of 100 ft.-lbs. (136 N.m). Secure with cotter pin (2). Install wheel and tire assembly and tighten lug bolts to a torque of 140-160 ft.-lbs. (190-220 N.m). Lubricate with Case/IH 251EP or equivalent No. 2 multipurpose lithium grease.

Fig. 1—Exploded view of front wheel hub and bearing assembly used on all two-wheel drive tractors.

1. Spindle 2. Dust shield 8. Bearing cone (outer) 3. Oil seal .

9. Washer 4. Hub wear ring 10. Nut 5. Bearing cone (inner) 11. Cotter pin 6. Bearing cups 12. Cap 7. Hub 13. Lube fitting

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 4 (Cont.) suitable split stands (CAS-10749 or equivalent). If so equipped, remove front weights and weight bracket.

Disconnect and remove tie rods, then disconnect steering cylinder from lug on axle main member and center steering arm. Tie cylinder assembly up out of the way, being careful not to damage steering cylinder hoses. Remove bolts (10) and using a hoist, remove axle extension (12), spindle and wheel from both sides.

Place a floor jack under axle main member (6).

Remove cap screw (1), flat washer (2) and spacer (3).

Remove front grease fitting and install a slide hammer to pivot shaft (4). Support weight of axle with floor jack and withdraw pivot shaft from front support (5). Catch thrust washers (7 and 8) as shaft is withdrawn. Lower axle main member to clear fi:'ont support and roll forward from tractor.

Drive out roll pin (14) from pivot pin (20). Withdraw pivot pin, then carefully remove center steering arm (19) with shim washers (15 and 16) and "O" rings (17).

Inspect bushings (18) and renew as required. Press new bushings in from top and bottom of steering arm until they are recessed 0.196 inch (5 mm) below flush.

Lubricate new "O" rings (17) with petroleum jelly arid install in recesses above and below bushings. Install

CASE/INTERNATIONAL two 0.156 inch (3.96 mm) thick shim washers below steering arm and one 0.156 inch (3.96 mm) and one 0.042 inch (1.067 mm) shim washer above steering arm. Reinstall center steering arm assembly and pivot pin. Measure clearance between upper washer (15) and axle main member. If clearance is more than 0.042 inch (1.067 mm), add shim washers (16) as required to obtain clearance of less than 0.042 inch (1.067 nmi). Secure pivot pin (20) with new roll pin (14).

Axle pivot bushings (9) can now be removed using a suitable drift punch. Drive new bushings into bore of axle main member until Vie inch (1.6 mm) below outer surface. When reassembling, coat pivot shaft (4) and bushings vdth anti-seize compound. Install one steel washer (7), one nylon washer (8) and second steel washer (7) at front and rear of axle main member. Install pivot shaft, then check axle main member end clearance. If end clearance exceeds 0.059 inch (1.5 mm), add steel washer (7) at rear side of axle.

Install spacer (3), flat washer (2) and cap screw (1).

Tighten cap screw to a torque of 65-75 ft.-lbs. (90-100 N.m).

Fig, 2—Exploded view showing axie extension, spindie and bushings used on aii two-wheei drive tractors.

1. Nut 4. Washer 7. Axle extension 10. Thrust bearing 2. Cotter pin 5. Steering arm 8. Bushing (lower) 11. Spindle 3. Cap screw 6. Bushing (upper) 9. Tie rod end 12. Hub assy.

8

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disassembly procedure. Tighten axle extension bolts (10) to a torque of 375-425 ft.-lbs. (510-575 N.m).

FRONT SUPPORT All Models 5. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the fi-ont support (5—Fig. 3), first remove hood, grille and side panels. Disconnect air intake hose. Drain radiator and disconnect front wiring harness connector.

Disconnect upper and lower radiator hoses, coolant filter hose and coolant recovery hose. Disconnect ether starting line from intake manifold. Remove hoses from clip on radiator, then remove air conditioning condenser and lay back on top of engine. Identify and disconnect oil cooler lines and remove oil cooler.

Attach a hoist with lift straps to radiator support.

Unbolt radiator support from front support and tilt radiator forward to clear fan as the assembly is removed.

If so equipped, remove front weights and weight bracket. Remove front axle assembly as in paragraph 4, but do not separate axle extensions from axle main member. Attach a hoist to front support, unbolt from side rails and slide support forward from tractor.

Reinstall by reversing the removal procedure.

Tighten side rail to front support bolts to a torque of 162-184 ft.-lbs. (220-250 N.m). Tighten the five cap screws securing radiator support to firont support to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).

Paragraphs 5-6 lever in PARK position and block rear wheels securely. If so equipped, remove front weights and weight bracket. Loosen front wheel lug nuts. Raise hood and remove side panels. Install front split stands, CAS-10749 or equivalent, to side rails. Raise front of tractor and remove fi-ont wheels. Install axle carrier CAS-10500-4 to support drive axle. Unbolt front of drive shaft shield (10) and slide shield rearward. Unbolt front drive shaft "U" joint (9) and lower front end of drive shaft. Disconnect steering cylinder hoses and plug or cap all openings to prevent entrance of dirt into system. Remove cap screw (1) and washer (2), then remove pivot shaft (3). Catch washers (5 and 6) as shaft is withdrawn. Lower axle carrier and remove axle assembly forward from tractor.

FRONT DRIVE AXLE All models are available with a Spicer front drive axle. Front drive axle can be engaged or disengaged with tractor on the go. Front drive axle is spring clutch engaged £ind hydraulically disengaged. The solenoid control valve is located on left side of rear frame housing and is identical to the rear differential lock valve. Refer to paragraph 175 for service information. Unit is equipped with a limited slip differential.

NOTE: The front drive axle clutch is located in the RANGE transmission iiousing and the ciutch output shaft is iocated in the SPEED transmission housing. Refer to these sections for R&R AND OVERHAUL procedures.

DRIVE AXLE ASSEMBLY Models So Equipped 6. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove fi-ont drive axle assembly (8—Fig. 4), place shift control

Fig. 3—Expioded view of axie main member, front support and reiated parts used on aii two-wheei drive tractors, 1. Cap screw 12. Axle extension 2. Flat washer 13. Square nut 3. Spacer 14. Roll pin 4. Pivot shaft 15. Washer, 0.156 in.

5. Front support (3.96 mm) 6. Axle main member 16. Washer, 0.042 in.

7. Washer (steel) (1.067 mm) 8. Thrust washer (nylon) 17. "O" Ring 9. Pivot bushings 18. Bushing 10. Bolt 19. Center steering arm 11. Washer 20. Pivot pin

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 7-9 Inspect bushings (7) and renew as necessary. When installing new bushings, apply a coat of Loctite antiseize to bore in axle housing. Freeze bushings in dry ice and carefully install flush to Vie inch (1.6 mm) below the face of axle housing.

Inspect thrust washers (5 and 6) for excessive wear and renew as necessary. Reinstall axle assembly to front support. Make sure that nylon thrust washer (6) is installed between steel thrust washers (5) at both front and rear sides of axle. Use as many additional steel washers as possible at rear side of axle housing to shim axle housing forward. Secure pivot shaft (3) in place with washer (2) and cap screw (1), tightened to a torque of 93-112 ft.-lbs. (126-152 N.m). Connect steering cylinder lines and reinstall front drive shaft.

Tighten drive shaft coupling bolts to a torque of 45-54 ft.-lbs. (61-73 N.m). Install fi-ont drive shaft shield.

Remove axle carrier. Install front wheels and remove split standsfif-omside rails. Tighten front wheel lug nuts to a torque of 300-370 ft.-lbs. (407-502 N.m). If so equipped, install front weight bracket and tighten cap screws to a torque of 450-540 ft.-lbs. (610-730 N.m), then install front weights.

CASE/INTERNATIONAL FRONT SUPPORT Models So Equipped 7. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove fi^ont support (4—Fig. 4), first remove hood, grille and side panels. Disconnect air intake hose. Drain radiator and disconnect front wiring harness connector. Disconnect upper and lower radiator hoses, coolant air bleed hose and coolant recovery hose. Disconnect ether starting line from intake manifold. Remove hoses from clip on radiator, then remove air conditioning condenser and lay back on top of engine. Identify and disconnect oil cooler lines and remove oil cooler.

Attach a hoist with lift straps to radiator support.

Unbolt radiator support from front support and tilt radiator forward to clear fan as the assembly is removed.

If so equipped, remove front weights and weight bracket. Remove front drive axle assembly as outlined in paragraph 6. Attach a hoist to front support, unbolt from side rails and slide front support forward from tractor.

Reinstall by reversing removal procedure. Tighten side rail to front support bolts to a torque of 162-184 ft.-lbs. (220-250 N.m). Tighten the five cap screws securing radiator support to front support to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).

TIE ROD AND TOE-iN Models So Equipped 8. Due to the closeness between tie rod and firont support, removal of tie rod and toe-in adjustment can be accomplished only after removal of front drive axle assembly as outlined in paragraph 6. Disassembly of tie rod is obvious after removal and reference to Fig. 5. Tbe-in should be adjusted to 0-0.5 inch (0-12.7 mm).

One full turn of a tie rod end (2 or 6) will change toe-in % inch (9.5 mm). Make sure bow of tie rod tube (4) is down.

Tighten slotted nuts (1) to a torque of 140 ft.-lbs.

(190 N.m). Tighten jam nuts (3 and 5) to a torque of 250-300 ft.-lbs. (340-405 N.m).

WHEEL HUB AND PLANETARY Modeis So Equipped Fig. 4^-View of front drive axie and front support removed from tractor.

1. Cap screw 6. Thrust washer (nylon) 2. Flat washer 7. Bushings 3. Pivot shaft 8. Drive axle assy.

4. Front support 9. Front drive shaft 5. Washer (steel) 10. Drive shaft shield

10

9. R&R AND OVERHAUL, Tb remove the wheel hub and planetary, support axle housing and remove front wheel and tire assembly. Rotate wheel hub until drain plug (13—Fig. 6) is at bottom.

NOTE: Front drive shaft must be disconnected before wheei hub can be rotated.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Remove drain plug and allow oil to drain. Remove the two socket head cap screws (14), then remove planetary carrier (12). Withdraw sun gear (11). Remove the three cap screws (10), retaining plate (9) and shim (8), then lift off ring gear (21). Remove wheel hub (4). Remove bearing cone (6)fii^omring gear (21).

Remove oil seal (1), inner bearing cone (2), "O" ring (7) and, if necessary, bearing cups (3 and 5) from wheel hub (4).

Remove retaining rings (20), spacers (16) and planetary gears (18) with needle rollers (17) and spacers (19). Clean and inspect all parts and renew as necessary. Needle rollers (17) are available in a set of 376 and planetary gears (18) are available in a set of four.

Install first spacer plate (16) over pin in planetary carrier (12). Use petroleum jelly to hold needle rollers in place and install two rows of needle rollers in gear (18) with spacer (19) between the two rows. Install planetary gear and needle roller assembly over pin in planetary carrier. When all four plsmetary gears and needle rollers are installed, install second spacer plate (16) and secure with retaining rings (20).

If removed, install bearing cups (3 and 5) in hub.

Heat bearing cone (6) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (120° C) and install on ring gear (21) until seated.

Paragraph 9 (Cont.) of 20 ft.-lbs. (27 N.m). Use a torque wrench and special tool CAS-1768 as shown in Fig. 7, to check rolling torque of hub. Tighten or loosen cap screws (10—Fig. 6) until rolling torque is 50-90 in.-lbs. (6-10 N.m). Then, using a depth micrometer through hole in retaining plate (9), measure distance from outer face of plate to end of pivot housing. See Fig. 8. Record this measurement. Remove retaining plate and measure thickness of the plate. Subtract this measurement from the first measurement. The difference will be the correct thickness of shim pack (8—Fig. 6) to be installed. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.001, 0.002, 0.005, 0.010, 0.020 and 0.030 inch (0.0254, 0.0508, 0.127, 0.254, 0.508 and 0.762 mm). Remove sun gear (11), ring gear (21) and hub (4). Install new oil seal (1) in hub with lip facing away from bearing (2). Reinstall hub, ring gear, correct shim pack and retaining plate. Install cap screws (10) and tighten to a torque of 65-75 ft.-lbs. (88-102 N.m). Install sun gear (11) and new "O" ring (7). Align holes for socket head screws (14) and install planetary carrier (12).

Install socket head screws (14) and tighten secure^.

Rotate hub until oil level arrow points downward.

Remove plug (13) and fill planetary unit to level plug

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gioves when handiing heated parts.

Install bearing cone (2), but do not install oil seal (1) at this time. Install Hub (2) on pivot housing and install ring gear (21) and retaining plate (9) without shims (8). Tighten cap screws (10) evenly to a torque

Fig. S—Front drive axle, tie rod and steering cylinders removed from tractor.

1. Slotted nut 2. Tie rod end (LH thread) 3. Jam nut 4. Tie rod tube

5. Jam nut 6. Tie rod end (RH thread) 7. Steering cylinders 8. Drive axle ass^.

Fig. &--Expioded view of wheei hub and pianetary unit used on front drive axie.

1. Oil seal 12. Planetary carrier 2. Bearing cone (inner) 3. Bearing cup 13. Plug 4. Hub 14. Socket head screw (2) 5. Bearing cup 15. Plug 6. Bearing cone (outer) 16. Spacer 7. "O"Ring 17. Needle rollers 8. Shim 18. Planetary gear 9. Retaining plate 19. Spacer 10. Cap screw (3) 20. Retaining ring 11. Sun gear 21. Ring gear

11

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 10 opening with Case IH 135H EP or equivalent SAE 85W-140 gear oil. Capacity is approximately 1.0 quart (0.9 L). Gear oil in planetary units should be changed every 1000 hours of operation or once each year, whichever occurs first.

Reinstall wheel and tire and remove jack stands.

Reconnect front drive shaft. Repeat procedures for opposite planetary as required.

PIVOT HOUSING AND AXLE SHAFT Modeis So Equipped 10. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove pivot housing (24—Fig. 9), first remove drain plugs from axle housing and planetary carrier and drain gear oil.

Remove wheel hub and planetary as outlined in paragraph 9. Disconnect hoses from steering cylinder and plug all openings. Remove cap screws (21 and 26— Fig. 9) and support pivot housing with a hoist. Remove king pins (22 and 25) and shims (23). Remove

CASE/INTERNATIONAL cotter pins and slotted nuts that secure steering cylinder and tie rod to arm on pivot housing. Move pivot housing rearward to provide clearance to remove stoedng cylinder and tie rod ends from pivot housing.

Remove pivot housing (24). Remove upper and lower seal rings (2), bearing cones (3), bearing cups (4) and cup plugs (5) from axle housing (1). Remove the three cap screws (9) with flat washers, then withdraw axle assembly (6 through 18). Remove snap rings (12) and disassemble the double "U" joints. Remove outer oil seal (18), inner oil seal (15) and snap ring (16) from outer yoke (17). Press axle shaft (11) from collar (6), bearing (7), retainer (8) and oil seal (10). Remove oil seal and bearing from retainer. Remove oil seal (19) and bushing (20) from pivot housing (24).

Clean and inspect all parts and renew as necessary.

Apply Loctite 515 to bearing seat in retainer (8) and press bearing in until seated. Install new oil seal (10) in retainer so that lip of seal is toward bearing.

Lubricate oil seal with grease and install retainer assembly on axle shaft until seal is against yoke. Heat collar (6) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250°

Fig. 7—Use torque wrench and speciai tooi CAS-1768 to measure hub roiiing torque.

Fig. 8—Use a depth micrometer through hole in retaining piate to determine correct shim thicicness to be used.

12

Fig. 9—Expioded view of pivot housing and axie assembiy used on front drive axie.

1. Axle housing 14. Center yoke 2. Seal ring 15. Oil seal (inner) 3. Bearing cone , 16. Snap ring 4. Bearing cup 17. Outer yoke 5. Cup plug 18. Oil seal(outer) 6. Collar .

19. Oil seal 7. Bearing 20. Bushing 8. Bearing retainer 21. Cap screw 9. Cap screw (3) 22. King pin (upper) 10. Oil seal 23. Shims 11. Axle shaft 24. Pivot housing 12. Snap ring 25. King pin (lower) 13. Bearing and cross as^.

26. Cap screw

www.maskinisten.net

Paragrapii 11

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 F (120° C) and install collar onto axle shaft until firmly against bearing (7).

WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gloves when handiing heated parts.

Install bushing (20) and oil seal (19) in pivot housing so that lip of seal is toward bushing. Install retaining ring (16), inner oil seal (15) and outer oil seal (18) in outer yoke (17) as shown in Fig. 10.

Reassemble double *TJ" joints and yokes, then install axle assembly (6 through 18—Fig. 9). Apply Loctite 515 to threads of cap screws (9), install cap screws and fiat washers and tighten to a torque of 35-45 ft.-lbs. (47-61 N.m). Apply Loctite 515 to lips of cup plugs (5), then install cup plugs and bearing cups (4) in axle housing. Lubricate bearing cones (3) with Case IH 25 IH EP or equivalent No. 2 multipurpose lithium grease and install bearing cones. Do not install seal rings (2) at this time. Install pivot housing (24) over axle housing (1). Do not install tie rod or steering cylinder. Install lower king pin (25) with 0.015 inch (0.381 mm) thick shim pack (23). Tighten cap screws (26) with washers, alternately and evenly to a torque of 80-90 ft.-lbs. (108-122 N.m). Install upper king pin (22) with 0.015 inch (0.381 mm) thick shim pack (23).

Tighten cap screws (21) with washers, alternately and evenly to a torque of 80-90 ft.-lbs. (108-122 N.m).

Using a torque wrench on one of the upper king pin cap screws (21), check the amount of torque required to move the pivot housing. The torque must be between 16 and 25 ft.-lbs. (22 and 34 N.m). If necessary, add shims to decrease torque or remove shims to increase torque. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.005 and 0.010 inch (0.127-0.254 mm). Upper and lower king pins must be shimmed evenly.

Unbolt and remove upper and lower king pins and shim packs. Move pivot housing as required to install new seal rings (2) and to connect steering cylinder and tie rod ends. Apply Loctite anti-seize to king pins, then reinstall king pins with correct shim packs.

Tighten cap screws (21 and 26) to a torque of 80-90 ft.-lbs. (108-122 N.m). Tighten slotted nuts on steering cylinder and tie rod ends to a torque of 140 ft.-lbs.

(190 N.m) and secure with new cotter pins.

Refer to paragraph 9 for balance of reassembly. Fill axle housing to level plug opening with recommended gear oil. Refer to paragraph 11 for capacity.

assemblies as in paragraph 9 and pivot housings and axles as in paragraph 10. Support the differential carrier assembly with a hoist, unbolt carrier from axle housing and remove the assembly. Place unit on a clean bench.

Tb disassemble the differential assembly, refer to Fig. 11 and remove cap screws (22), washers and locks (23). Remove cap screws (19), washers (20) and bearing caps (21) with adjusting rings (24). Separate bevel ring gear and differential case from carrier. Remove bearing cups (1 and 14). Place match marks across differential case halves (4 and 10). Remove cap screws (12) and adapters (11) and lift off case half (10).

Remove cap screws (12) and adapters (11) and lift off case half (10). Remove dished plate (6), dished disc (7), fiat plates (8) and fiat disc (9). Remove pressure ring (36) and side gear (37), then lift out cross pins (39) and differential pinions (38). Remove side gear (37), pressure ring (36), fiat plates (8), fiat disc (9), dished disc (7) and dished plate (6) from left case half (4). Remove cap screws (3) and separate bevel ring gear (5) from case half (4). Using a suitable puller, remove bearing cones (2 and 13).

Clean and inspect all parts and renew as necessary.

Bevel ring gear (5) and bevel pinion shaft (15) are available only as a matched set. When reassembling, heat bearing cones (2 and 13) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (120° C) and install on case halves (4 and 10).

WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gioves when handiing heated parts.

Assemble bevel ring gear (5) to case half (4), then install and tighten retaining cap screws (3) to a torque of 100-120 ft.-lbs. (135-162 N.m). Apply a coat of friction modifier (Case IH part number 990063R2) to all disc and plate friction surfaces. Place case half (4) assembly on a bench with bevel ring gear facing up.

Install dished plate (6) with concave side down. Install dished disc (7) with concave side down. Install one flat plate (8), one flat disc (9) and second flat Plate

OUTER SEAL

DIFFERENTIAL AND BEVEL GEARS Modeis So Equipped 11. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the front differential assembly, place transmission lever in PARK position and securely block rear wheels. Remove front drive axle assembly as outlined in paragraph 6, then remove both planetary and hub

Fig^ 10--View showing correct instaiiation of retaining ring, and inner and outer oil seals in outer yoke (17— Fig. 9).

13

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 11 (Cont.)

CASE/iNTERNATiONAL

(8). Install pressure ring (36) and side gear (37).

Assemble differential cross pins (39) and differential pinions (38), then install the cross pin and pinion assembly. Install second side gear (37) and pressure ring (36). Install one fiat plate (8), one flat disc (9) and second fiat plate (8). Install dished disc (7) with concave side up and dished plate (6) with concave side up. Align match marks and install case half (10).

Install adapters (11) and cap screws (12). Tighten cap screws to a torque of 65-70 ft.-lbs. (88-95 N.m).

Tb remove bevel pinion shaft (15), remove nut (35) and washer (34). Place differential carrier (25) in a press and push bevel pinion shaft (15) from yoke (33), oil seal (31), washer (30) and bearing cone (29) and remove from carrier. Remove dust shield (32) from yoke (33). Remove oil seal (31), washer (30) and

15

24

Fig. 11—Expioded view of front drive axie limited siip differentiai assembiy.

1. Bearing cup 21. Bearing cap 2. Bearing cone 3. Cap screw 22. Cap screw 4. Differential case (L.H.) 23. Lock 5. Bevel ring gear 24. Adjusting ring 6. Dished plate 25. Differential carrier 7. Dished disc 26. Spacer 8. Flat plate 27. Shims 9. Flat disc 28. Bearing cup 10. Differential case (R.H.) 29. Bearing cone 11. Adapter 30. Washer 31. Oil seal 12. Cap screw 32. Dust shield 13. Bearing cone 33. Yoke 14. Bearing cup 34. Washer 15. Bevel pinion shaft 35. Nut 16. Bearing cone 36. Pressure ring 17. Bearing cup 37. Side gear 18. Shims 38. Differential pinions 19. Cap screw 39. Differential cross pins 20. Washer

14

bearing cone (29). Remove shims (27) and spacer (26) from pinion shaft, then press bearing cone (16) from pinion shaft. Using a suitable puller, remove bearing cup (28), bearing cup (17) and shims (18).

Clean and inspect all parts and renew as necessary.

Bevel drive pinion (15) and bevel ring gear (5) are available only as a matched set. On end of pinion shaft, there is etched a zero (0), plus (+) or minus (-) nimiber in inches. This indicates the best running position for each gear set. The dimension is set by shims (18) behind inner bearing cup (17). Tb set the pinion depth, install bearing cup (17) without shims (18). Install outer bearing cup (28) and install inner and outer bearing cones (16 and 29). Insert special tools (handle CAS-1898-1 and threaded shaft CAS 1898-2) through the bearing cones from the front.

Install gage disc (CAS-1898-3) against inner bearing cone and install gage block CAS-898-4. Finger tighten to hold the gage assembly and bearing cones in position. Place tube CAS-1898-6 in differential carrier bearing grooves as shown in Fig. 12. Install bearing caps (21—Fig. 11) and secure with cap screws and washers (19 and 20), tightened to a torque of 180-200 ft.-lbs. (240-270 N.m). Using a feeler gage, measure distance between gage block CAS-1898-4 and tube CAS-1898-6. This measurement is the correct thickness of shim pack (18) to be installed if pinion is marked zero (0). If pinion has a plus (+) marking, subtract the amount shown fi:'om measurement. If pinion has a minus (-) marking, add the amount shown to measurement. This will give the correct shim thickness to be installed. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.005 and 0.010 inch (0.076, 0.127 and 0.254 mm). Accepted tolerance is 0.0-0.004 inch (0.0-0.1016 mm). Remove special tools, bearing cones (16 and 29) and bearing cup (17). Install calculatod shim pack (18) and bearing cup (17). Press bearing cone (16) on pinion shaft (15). Install spacer (26) on pinion shaft and install assembly in carrier (25). Install a shim pack (27) 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) thick onto pinion shaft and install bearing cone (29).

Fig. 12—View showing speciai tooi CAS-1898-6 instaiied in carrier bearing grooves when checking for pinion position shim adjustment.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Install yoke (33) without shield (32), oil seal (31) or washer (30). Install washer (34) and nut (35) and tighten nut to a torque of 250-260 ft.-lbs. (340-353 N.m). Using a torque wrench on pinion nut, check the torque required to rotate pinion shaft. The torque should be 10-50 in.-lbs. (1.9-4.8 N.m). Tb increase torque, remove shims (27). Tb decrease torque, add shims. Remove yoke and, using Loctite 515 on new oil seal (31), install washer (30) and oil seal (31). Install new dust shield (32) on yoke. Apply Loctite 515 to the washer seal area between yoke and pinion shaft and install washer aind pinion nut. Tbrque pinion nut to 250-260 ft.-lbs. (340-353 N.m).

Install bearing cups (1 and 14) over bearing cones (2 and 13) and install differential assembly in carrier (25). Install bearing caps (21), washers (20) and cap screws (19). Tighten cap screws finger tight. Install adjusting rings (24). Using special tool CAS 1898-9, tighten adjusting rings to a torque of 85-95 ft.-lbs.

(115-129 N.m) while maintaining some backlash. Use a dial indicator and measure backlash between bevel ring gear and bevel drive pinion. Backlash should be approximately 0.005 inch (0.127 mm). Loosen one adjusting ring and tighten the opposite ring to correct the backlash. Rotate adjusting rings exactly the same amount. Install adjusting ring locks (23) and secure with washers and cap screws, tightened to a torque of 15-17 ft.-lbs. (20-23 N.m). Tighten cap screws (19) to a torque of 180-200 ft.-lbs. (240-270 N.m).

At this time, pinion shaft rolling torque should be 60-80 in.-lbs. (6.8-9.0 N.m). If not, recheck assembly procedures.

Apply Loctite gasket eliminator to mounting surfaces of carrier and axle housing and reinstall differential carrier assembly. Install washers and mounting cap screws. Tighten cap screws to a torque of 110-120 ft.-lbs. (149-163 N.m).

The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disassembly procedure. Fill axle housing to level plug opening with correct gear oil. Capacity is 12.0 quarts (11.0 L). Use 11.5 quarts (10.8 L) of Case IH 135HEP or equivalent SAE 85W-140 gear oil plus 1.0 pint (0.47 L) of limited slip additive. Gear lubricant should be changed every 1000 hours of operation or once each year, whichever occurs first.

Paragraphs 12-13 drained. Slide rear yoke off the shaft, then unbolt and remove drive shaft shield rear support (4).

When reassembling, reverse the disassembly procedure. Tighten cap screws securing rear support (4) to a torque of 69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m). Tighten cross and bearing cap screws to a torque of 33-37 ft.-lbs. (45-50 N.m).

POWER STEERING SYSTEM All models are equipped with hydrostatic power steering using a Ross steering unit. The piston pump furnishes pressurized oil to the priority valve where a portion of the oil is diverted to the steering unit at a pressure of 2350-2450 psi (16,203-16,892 kPa). One doubleacting steering cylinder is used on the standard axle and two double-acting cylinders are used on the front drive axle.

FLUID, FiLTERS AND BLEEDiNG Aii Modeis 13. The transmission and hydraulic system fluid is used in the power steering system. A dip stick located at the left rear of the tractor rear housing indicates fiuid level. Use Hy-Tran Plus fiuid in all models. Refer

FRONT DRiVE SHAFT Modeis So Equipped 12. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the front drive shaft, refer to Fig. 13, then unbolt sleeves (1 and 3) and slide over shield (2). Unbolt cross and bearing assemblies (6) from front and rear yokes. Lower drive shaft and shield from tractor. Unbolt cross and bearing assemblies (6) from drive shaft (7). Cross and bearing units are available only as assemblies. If rear yoke (5) is to be removed, speed transmission must be

Fig. 13—Expioded view of front drive shaft and shield.

1. Sleeve (rear) 2. Shield 5. Rear yoke 3. Sleeve (front) 6. Cross and bearing as^.

4. Shield support (rear) 7. Drive shaft

15

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 14-15 to CONDENSED SERVICE DATA for reservoir capacity and to HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SECTION for additional hydraulic system information. A suction screen-type filter is located in right side of range transmission housing and an externally mounted pressure screw-on-type filter is located on right side of transmission. See Fig. 14. Tb clean filter screen (13), first drain transmission housing, then remove plug and drain filter base (12). Unbolt and remove cover (17) with "O" ring (16), screen locator (15) with "O" ring (14) and withdraw screen (13). Clean screen in suitable solvent and blow dry with compressed air.

When reinstalling, install screen with gasket end outward. Lubricate new "O" rings (14 and 16) with petroleum jelly and install with screen locator (15) and cover (17). Install and tighten cover cap screws.

Install drain plugs and refill transmission to dip stick "FULL" level.

The manufacturer recommends that transmission and hydraulic fluid be drained and new Hy-Tran Plus fluid be installed each 1000 hours of operation. Suction filter screen should be removed, cleaned and reinstalled each 1000 hours of operation. Filter element (5) should be changed whenever service monitor on digital instrument cluster indicates a clogged filter or at least once each 1000 hours of operation Tb change the filter element (5), unbolt and remove filter shield. Using a strap wrench, rotate filter element counterclockwise to remove. Lubricate gasket on new element with clean oil and install element

CASE/iNTERNATiONAL until gasket contacts filter head. Then, hand tighten element an additional one-third turn.

Start engine and check for leaks. Reinstall filter' shield and check transmission oil level.

Tb bleed the steering hydraulic system, operate engine at half throttle and rotate steering wheel from lock to lock several times until steering action is firm.

TROUBLE-SHOOTING All Models 14. Some of the troubles that may occur in the operation of the power steering system and their possible causes are as follows: 1. No power steering or steers slowly. a. Binding hiechanical linkage. b. Excessive load on front wheels and/or air pressure low in front tires. c. Steering cylinder piston seal faulty or cylinder damaged. d. Faulty power steering supply pump. e. Faulty hand pump. f Faulty priority flow divider valve.

2. Will not steer manual^. a. Binding mechanical linkage. b. Excessive load on front wheels and/or air pressure low in front tires. c. Pumping element in hand pump faulty. d. Faulty seal in steering cylinder or cylinder damaged.

3. Hard steering through complete cycle. a. Low pressure from supply pump. b. Internal or external leakage. c. Faulty steering cylinder. d. Binding mechanical linkage. e. Excessive load on front wheels and/or air pressure low in front tires.

4. Momentary hard or lumpy steering. a. Air in power stoering circuit.

SYSTEM OPERATiNG PRESSURE Fig. 14^-Expioded view of transmission and hydraulic niters used on aii modeis. Refer to text.

1. Filter head 2. "O"ring 10. «O"ring 3. "O"ring 11. "O" ring retainer 4. Pressure switch 12. Filter base 5. Filter element 13. Screen 6. Filter container (in housing) 14. "O**ring 7. "0^'ring 15. Screen locator 8. Gasket 16. "Oaring 9. Suction tube retainer 17. Cover

16

Aii Modeis 15. The power steering operating pressure is controlled by a relief valve located in the priority flow divider valve. The priority flow divider valve is located on inner side of remote valves on right side of tractor. Operating pressure should be 2350-2450 psi (16,203-16,892 kPa).

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraphs 16-20

Tb check the operating pressure, disconnect one steering line at front of tractor and install a tee in line with a 3000 psi (21,000 kPa) test gage. Start engine and operate until transmission and hydraulic oil is warmed to a temperature of 150° F (65.5° C). Turn steering wheel in direction to apply pressure to test gage and hold on pressure against lock. Check pressure reading on test gage. If pressure reading is incorrect, refer to Fig. 15 and loosen locknut. Turn adjusting screw in or out to obtain correct operating pressure, then tighten locknut., Remove tee fitting and test gage and reconnect steering line.

18. STEERING CYLINDER TEST. If steering wheel slip as checked in paragraph 17 exceeds the maximum one revolution per minute, proceed as follows: Disconnect and plug lines to steering cylinder(s). Make sure t h a t fluid is at operating temperature, then repeat wheel slip test as outlined in paragraph 17. If steering wheel slip is less than that recorded in previous test, overhaul or renew steering cylinders). If steering wheel slip (with steering cylinder(s) disconnected) still exceeds maximum one revolution per minute, overhaul or renew steering hgind pump.

OPERATiONAL TESTS

HYDRAULIC PUMP

Aii Modeis

Aii Modeis

The following tests are valid only when the power steering system is void of any air. If necessary, bleed system as outlined in paragraph 13 before performing tests.

19. The power source for the hydrostatic steering system is the 27 gpm (102 L/m) piston pimip. This pump also furnishes pressurized oil for the main hydraulic system. Refer to HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SECTION for information and service procedures for the pump.

16. HAND PUMP. With power steering supply pump inoperative (engine not running), attempt to stoer manually in both directions.

NOTE: Manual steering with power steering suppiy pump inoperative, wiii require high steering effort. If manual steering can be accomplished with supply pump inoperative, it can be assumed that the manual steering hand pump will operate satisfactoriiy with the supply pump operating.

17. STEERING WHEEL SLIP TEST. Steering wheel slip is the term used to describe the inability of the steering wheel to hold a given position without further steering movement. Wheel slip is generally due to either internal or external leakage, or a faulty hand pump or steering cylinder. Some steering wheel slip, with hydraulic fluid at operating temperature, is normal and permissible. A maximum of one revolution per minute is acceptable.

Tb check for steering wheel slip, proceed as follows: Operate tractor until hydraulic fiuid is warmed to a temperature of 150° F (65.5° C). Remove steering wheel cap, then turn front wheels until they are against the stop. Attach a torque wrench to steering wheel nut. Apply 72 in.-lbs. (8 N.m) of force to steering shaft in same direction as front wheels are positioned against stop, then count revolutions of steering wheel in a period of one minute. Use same procedure and check stoering wheel slip in opposite direction. Up to one revolution in one minute in either direction is acceptable and system can be considered as operating satisfactorily. If steering wheel revolutions per minute exceed the maximum, record total rpm for use in checking steering cylinder(s) or hand pump as outhned in the following paragraph.

HAND PUMP (STEERiNG UNIT) Aii Modeis 20. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. The steering hand pump mounts on front side of engine fire wall.

Tb remove the hand pump, place hood in raised position. Identify and remove the four steering tubes and the signal port tube from the hand pump. Plug or cap all openings immediately to prevent dirt from entering the system. Unbolt pump mounting bracket from fire wall and remove the assembly. The universal joint will be removed with the steering hand pump.

Tb reinstall hand pump assembly, first disconnect battery ground cable. Remove four screws securing instrument cluster to instrument panel. Raise instrument cluster and disconnect wiring harnesses. (See

Fig. 15—Bottom view of priority vaive showing reiief pressure adjusting screw.

17

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 21 Fig. 16.) Lay cluster unit aside. This will provide access to the steering shaft. Have helper ahgn steering shaft in "U" joint as steering hand pump assembly is installed in fire wall. Tighten bracket to fire wall cap screws to a torque of 20-24 ft.-lbs. (27-32 N.m).

Reconnect steering lines and signal port line. Reinstall instrument cluster and connect battery ground cable. Start engine and bleed air from steering system as outlined in paragraph 13.

CASE/iNTERNATIONAL is not equipped with vanes or springs and is a thicker set.

The spacer (28) used with two-wheel drive imits is located in the center of rotor. Spacer (28A) used with front drive axle hand pump is located in the recess in input shaft (31).

Remove adjusting screw (12) and torsion blades (13) from spool (17). Clean and inspect all parts for

21. OVERHAUL (ROSS UNIT). Tb disassemble the removed hand pump, drive out roll pin and remove "U" joint and collar (32—Fig. 17) from input shaft (31). Remove dust shield (33), then unbolt and remove pump mounting bracket. Identify and remove hydraulic fittings, inlet (3) and outlet (1) check valves and signal check valve (14). Mark check valves for aid in reassembly. Remove guide pin (7) with "O" ring (6) and check ball (5). Remove cap screws (37) and washers (38) and lift off cover (39). Remove seal ring (40), snap ring (34), back-up ring (35) and seal (36) from cover. Remove thrust washer (41) and thrust bearing (42) from input shaft (31). With input shaft in horizontal position, carefully withdraw input shaft assembly with commutator (20). Remove washer (22) from pump body (16), drive plate (18) from spool (17) and seal assembly (19) from sleeve in body (16). Hold adjusting screw (12) from turning and remove locknut (8). Push adjusting screw (12), torsion blades (13) and spool (17)fi'ombody. Remove adjusting screw and torsion blades from spool. Remove plug (9) and "O" ring (10). Remove commutator (20) and seal assembly (21). Clamp not more than one inch (25.4 mm) of input shaft (31) in protected jaws of vise and remove seven cap screws (23). Remove manifold (24), drive link (26 or 26A) with pins (25), stator-rotor set (27 or 27A) and spacer (28 or 28A).

37 NOTE: The rotor used in two-wheei drive hand pumps is equipped with vanes (29) and vane springs (30) that can fali out. Do not lose these parts.

The rotor set used on models with front drive axie

Fig. 16—Instrument cluster being removed from instrument panei for access to steering shaft and "U" joint.

18

Fig. 17—Expioded view of Ross steering hand pump used on aii tractors, items 26 through 30 are used on two-wheei drive modeis. items 26A through 28A are used on modeis with front drive axie.

1. Outlet check valve 22. Washer 2. "O"ring 23. Ferry head cap screw (7) 3. Inlet check valve 24. Manifold 4. "O''ring 25. Drive pin 5. Check ball 26. &26A. Drive link 6. "O**ring 27. &27A. Stator-rotor set 7. Guide pin 28. & 28A. Spacer 29. Rotor vane 8. Locknut 9. Plug 30. Vane spring 31. Input shaft 10. "Oaring 11. "Oaring 32. Collar 12. Adjusting screw 33. Dust shield 13, Ibrsion blade (2) 34. Snap ring 14. Signal port check valve 35. Back-up washer 15. "O'ring 36. Shaft seal 16. Body 37. Ferry head cap screw (8) 38. Washer 17. Spool 18. Drive plate 39. Cover 19. Seal assy.

40. Seal ring 20. Commutator 41. Thrust washer 21. Seal assy.

42. Thrust hearing

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 21 (Cont.)

excessive wear or other damage. If spool (17) or sleeve in body (16) are worn, renew hand pump assembly.

Commutator (20) and manifold (24) are available only as a matched set, as are the stator and rotor. Refer to Fig. 18 when checking the stator-rotor set and to Fig. 19 when checking vane springs.

When reassembling, use all new seal rings, "O** rings and oil seals and lubricate seals with white petroleum jelly.

Install "O" ring (10—Fig. 17) and pump plug (9) in body and tighten plug to a torque of 55-75 ft.-lhs.

(75-102 N.m). Install new "O'' ring (11) on adjusting screw (12) and place the two torsion blades in slot in adjusting screw. Each torsion hlade has an identification dot. Torsion blades must be installed with dots facing the outside, so dots are at opposite ends of the spool. Insert torsion blades and adjusting screw into flat end of valve spool (17) so blades are installed in the narrowest slot in valve spool. Lubricate exterior of valve spool with new Hy-Tran Plus oil and install valve spool. Tighten nut (8) on adjusting screw finger tight. Use drive plate (18) and commutator (20) as assembly guides to position valve spool. Center the commutator lugs in the slots of body. Remove commutator and drive plate. Tighten locknut (8) to a torque of 10-15 fl.-lbs. (14-20 N.m). Install new seal assembly (21) in groove of open end of commutator and install commutator into manifold (24). Place commutator and manifold on a clean surface with commutator side down. Install drive link (26 or 26A) and drive pins (25) into the commutator. Install the rotor over the drive pin and install the stator. On two-wheel

drive hand pump, install spacer (28) in rotor, then install vanes and springs in rotor slots. Convex side of spring must he towards the vane. On models with front drive axle, install spacer (28A) in end of input shaft (31). On all models, lubricate rotor set with new Hy-Tran Plus oil and place input shaft on top of rotor set. Align mounting bolt holes. Holding the commutator in place, turn the assembly over and clamp only the first one-inch (25.4 mm) of the shaft in a protected jaw vise. Install and tighten cap screws (23), using sequence shown in Fig. 20, to a torque of 2-3 fl.-lbs.

(3-4 N.m). Rotate the commutator to make sure all components are free. Then, tighten the seven cap screws in sequence to a torque of 10-14 ft.-lbs. (14-19 N»m). Lubricate and install thrust bearing (42—Fig. 17) on input shaft. Free rotating thrust race side of bearing is first on shaft. Install thrust washer (41).

This thrust washer must be selected from a washer kit. Ten washers are available in thicknesses from 0.046 inch (1.17 mm) to 0.100 inch (2.54 mm) in increments of 0.006 inch (0.15 mm). Select and install a 0.082-0.083 inch (2.08-2.11 mm) thick thrust washer. Place new seal ring (40) in groove in cover (39), then install input shaft assembly in cover. Install new seal assembly (19) in valve sleeve in pump hody. Use white petroleum jelly and stick drive plate (18) in place on valve spool (17) and washer (22) on the manifold (24). Align commutator lugs with slots in pump body and carefully slide assemblies together.

CAUTION: Do not force the parts together. Rotate input shaft back and forth to align drive piate and commutator, if necessary.

When assemblies are together, install and tighten two opposite cap screws (37) with washers (38) to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m). Using a torque wrench, check the amount of torque needed to rotate the input shaft. If the needed torque is greater than 15 in.-lhs. (1.7 N.m), remove the selected thrust washer (41) and install one that is the next size thinner. Continue this operation until needed torque is 15 in.-lbs. (1.7 N.m). Install and tighten all eight

CENTER RO IN STATi

'o

BOLT TORQUE SEOUENCE

0.007 INCH MAXIMUM CLEARANCE

Fig. 18—With rotor positioned in stator as shown, clearance must not exceed 0.007 inch (0.178 mm). Rotor from Ross hand pump used on two-wheel drive is shown. Clearance of rotor on Ross unit used on models with front drive axie is the same.

0.080 TO 0.100"

_±

Fig. I^'-On units so equipped, correct vane spring height Is 0.080-0.100 Inch (2.032-2.540 mm). Renew springs not meeting required height.

Fig. 20—Tighten manifold cap screws In the sequence shown.

19

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 22

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

cap screws (37) evenly to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs.

(26-31 N.m). Install shaft seal (36) with seal lip facing inward. Install back-up ring (35) and snap ring (34) with rounded edge inward. Fill cavity in pump cover bore with white petroleum jelly and install dust shield (33). Install check ball (5) and guide pin (7) with new "O" ring (6). Tighten guide pin (7) to a torque of 10-14 ft.-lbs. (14-19 N.m). Inspect check valves (1, 3 and 14) and make sure they are clean and operate freely. Use new "O" rings and install signal port check valve (14), outlet check valve (1), inlet check valve (3) and the other two (right and left turn) hydraulic fittings. Tighten signal port check valve to a torque of 15-25 ft.-lbs. (20-34 N.m), and the inlet and outlet check valves, and the other two fittings, to a torque of 22-27 ft.-lhs. (30-37 N.m). Install "U" joint and collar (32) and secure with the roll pin.

Reinstall hand pximp assemhly as outlined in paragraph 20. Start engine and operate at 1500 rpm.

Rotate steering wheel from lock to lock several times to hleed all air from system.

The procedure for balancing the steering hand pump is as follows: With engine operating at 1500 rpm, place front wheels in straight-ahead position.

Using a torque wrench on steering wheel nut, turn

Fig. 21—View of power steering cylinder removed from two-wheel drive tractor with standard adjustable front

axle, 1. Cap screw 2. Washer 3. Center steering arm 4. Trunnion

20

5. Cylinder assy.

6. Clamp bolt 7. Ball joint

steering wheel one turn to the left and record amount of torque needed. Center front wheels and check amount of torque needed to turn steering wheel turn to the right. Record this reading. If the readings are not within 2-3 in.-lbs. (0.22-0.33 N.m), balance the unit as follows: Loosen locknut (8—Fig. 17) and turn adjusting screw (12) counterclockwise a slight amount if torque reading was greater for the right turn. TVtm adjusting screw clockwise if torque reading was greater for left turn. Adjusting screw will require a turn of 10 degrees or less to correct the balance. Tighten locknut and recheck the torque in both directions. Balance is correct when torque readings in both directions are within 2-3 in.-lbs. (0.220.33 N.m). When balance is correct, tighten locknut to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs. (27-34 N.m).

STEERING CYLINDER(S) All Two-Wheel Drive Models 22, R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the power steering cylinder (5—Fig. 21), disconnect both steering lines. Cap or plug all openings. Loosen ball joint clamp bolt (6). Using a wrench on the flat end of piston rod, turn piston rod out of ball joint (7). Remove cylinder mounting bolts (1) and washers (2), then withdraw cylinder from center steering arm (3). Remove trunnions (4) from cylinder.

To disassemble the steering cylinder, use a spanner wrench and rotate cylinder head (3—Fig. 22) until sharp end of retaining ring (4) is visible in slot in cylinder tube (7). Raise end of retaining ring out of slot and rotate cylinder head to remove the retaining ring. Remove cylinder head assembly from cylinder tube. Remove cylinder head from opposite end of cylinder tube in the same manner. Remove "O" ring (6), back-up ring (5), wiper seal (1) and rod seal (2) from cylinder heads. Withdraw piston rod (10), then remove piston seal (9) and "O" ring (8).

Inspect cylinder tube (7) for scoring, grooves or out-of^roundness. Light scoring can be polished out by using a fine emery cloth and oil, using a rotary motion while polishing. Heavy scoring, grooving or out-of-roundness will require renewal of cylinder tube. Check rod end piston (10) for scoring, grooving and straightness and renew as necessary.

Renew all "O" rings, seals and back-up rings (available in a kit) during reassembly.

Reassemble steering cylinder as follows: Install "0" ring (8) in piston, then install piston seal (9) on top of "O" ring. Use a ring compressor and compress piston seal back to its original size. Lubricate with white petroleum jelly and install piston rod assembly into cylinder tube. Install rod seal (2) and wiper seal (1) in cylinder heads and back-up ring (5) and "O" ring (6) in wide groove of cylinder heads. "O" rings must be toward inside of cylinder. Lubricate and install

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 over piston rod and into cylinder tube. Turn cylinder heads until the small hole appears in slot of cylinder tube. Install hooked end of retaining ring (4) into hole and rotate cylinder head until retaining ring is fully inside the cylinder tube.

Th reinstall steering cylinder, reverse the removal procedure. Tighten mounting cap screws (1—Fig. 21) to a torque of 460-510 ft.-lbs. (620-690 N.m). Tighten piston rod into ball joint to a torque of 110-125 ft.-lbs.

(150-170 N.m) and tighten clamp bolt (6) to a torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (35-40 N.m). Reconnect steering lines.

Start engine and cycle steering lock to lock several times to bleed air from system.

Paragraph 23 from cylinder head (11). Withdraw piston and rod assembly from cylinder tube (1). Remove nut (2) and piston (3) from piston rod (8). Remove wear ring (4), piston seal (5) and "O" ring (6) from piston and "O" ring (7) from piston rod.

Inspect cylinder tube (1) for scoring, grooves or out-of-roundness. Light scoring can be polished out by using a fine emery cloth and oil, using a rotary motion while polishing. Heavy scoring, grooving or out-of-roundness will require renewal of cylinder tube. Check rod (8) and piston (3) for scoring, grooving and straightness and renew as necessary.

Renew all "O" rings, seals and back-up rings (available in a kit) during reassembly.

All Models With Front Drive Axle 23. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Ib remove either steering cylinder (2—Fig. 23), disconnect steering lines from steering cylinder. Plug or cap all openings immediately to prevent dirt from entering the system. Remove cotter pins and slotted nuts and separate ball joints from front drive axle assembly (1).

Remove cylinder.

To disassemble the steering cylinder, loosen clamp bolts and unscrew both ball joints from cylinder.

Using a spanner wrench, rotate cylinder head (11— Fig. 24) until sharp end of retaining ring (10) is visible in slot in cylinder tube (1). Raise end of retaining ring out of slot and rotate cylinder head to remove the retaining ring. Remove cylinder head assembly. Remove wiper seal (13), rod seal (12) and "O" ring (9)

Fig. 22—Exploded view of steering cylinder used on two-wheel drive tractors.

Wiper seal 6. "O"ring Rod seal 7. Cylinder tube Cylinder head 8. W r i n g Retaining ring 9. Piston seal ring Back-up ring 10. Rod & piston as^.

Fig. 23.—View of power steering cylinders removed from tractor equipped with front drive axle.

1. Front drive axle assy.

2. Steering cylinders

Fig. 24—Exploded view of one power steering cylinder.

Two cylinders are used on models equipped with front drive axle.

1. Cylinder tube 2. Nut 8. Rod 3. Piston 9. «O"ring 4. Wear ring 10. Retaining ring 5. Piston seal ring H. Cylinder head 6. "O"ring 12. Rod seal 7. «O"ring 13. Wiper seal

21

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 24 Reassemble steering cylinder as follows: Install rod seal (12) and wiper seal (13) in cylinder head (11) and "O" ring (9) in groove (without hole) in cylinder head.

Lubricate seals with white petroleum jelly and install rod (8), piston end first, through cylinder head. Install "O" ring (7) in groove on rod. Install wear ring (4) in wide groove of piston, install "O" ring (6) in narrow groove, then install seal ring (5) on top of "O" ring.

Install piston on rod and secure with nut (2) tightened to a torque of 55-65 ft.-lbs. (75-90 N.m). Use a ring compressor and compress seal ring (5) and wear ring (4) back to their original size. Lubricate with white petroleum jelly and install rod and piston assembly into cylinder tube. Push cylinder head into cylinder tube and turn cylinder head until small hole is aligned with slot in cylinder tube. Place hooked end of retaining ring (10) into hole and rotate cylinder head until retaining ring is fully inside the cylinder tube.

Tb reinstall the steering cylinder, first install both ball joints, but do not tighten clamp bolts at this time.

Adjust ball joints until three threads are showing at each end. Fully retract cyHnder (piston rod bottomed) and measure distance between the two ball joint lube fittings as shown in Fig. 23. Center to center of lube fittings should be 21 inches (533 mm). Adjust both ball joints evenly to obtain correct measurement.

Position ball joints so that cylinder ports will be straight up when cylinder is installed, then tighten ball joint clamp bolts to a torque of 60-70 ft.-lbs.

(80-95 N.m). Install cylinder and tighten slotted nuts on ball joints to a torque of 140 ft.-lbs. (190 N.m).

Secure with cotter pins. Reconnect steering lines.

Start engine and cycle steering lock to lock several times to bleed air from system.

Repeat operation for other steering cylinder if necessary.

ENGINE AND COMPONENTS All models are equipped with six cylinder diesel engines having a bore of 4.488 inches (114 mm), a stroke of 5.315 inches (135 mm) and a displacement of 505 cu. in. (8.3 L).

Models 7110,7120 and 7130 are equipped with a turbocharger and Model 7140 is equipped with a turbocharger and an after cooler* R&R ENGINE ASSEMBLY All Models 24. To remove engine assembly, first split tractor between engine and speed transmission as follows: Place transmission shift lever in PARK position and securely block rear wheels. Unbolt and remove front weights, if so equipped. Disconnect battery cables.

Remove drain plug and drain transmission oil. Drain coolant from engine and radiator. Remove cab floor mat and unbolt and remove access cover from cab floor. Disconnect hydraulic oil cooler upper hose at tee fitting under cab fioor and oil cooler lower hose at the bulkhead fitting under the cab. Remove side panels and raise hood. Make sure hood hinge lock is engaged and remove left hood strut. Disconnect wiring from air conditioning compressor, unbolt compressor from engine and remove condenser from radiator support.

Carefully put compressor and condenser with hoses connected in tractor cab. Unbolt hose routing clamp and tool box bracket from left side rail. Shut off fuel valve and disconnect fuel line at primer pump. Disconnect fuel return hose and throttle cable from fuel injection pump. Disconnect heater hoses from left and right sides of engine. Identify and remove steering hoses from left side of steering hand pump, then cap

22

or plug all openings. Disconnect wires from starter solenoid on engine fire wall. Unbolt and remove hydraulic filter cover from right side of cab. Disconnect and remove engine wiring harness and positive battery cable from bottom of cabfioar.Remove side panel latch from right side rail. If so equipped, remove front axle drive shaft shield and shaft, and the drive shaft shield rear support as outlined in paragraph 12. Use a jack or rear housing handler to support tractor transmission. Install splitting stand (17-526A or equivalent) under front of tractor. Place a jack stand under tractor draw bar. Remove fiywheel housing to speed transmission housing bolts and separate front half of tractor from rear half.

Install a support under front end weight bracket.

Unbolt and remove radiator recovery reservoir from left side of engine. Disconnect ether starting line from intake manifold. Disconnect and remove the aspirator tube. Disconnect, imbolt and remove exhaust muffler and air cleaner assemblies. Unbolt and remove exhaust pipe and elbow. Disconnect and remove upper and lower radiator hoses and the coolant air removal hose. Remove battery cables and wiring from starting motor. Unbolt and remove hood support and battery cable assembly from fiywheel housing. Attach a hoist and lifting sling to engine lifting brackets.

Remove engine mounting bolts from side rails, then unbolt side rails from fiywheel housing. Unbolt left side rail from front support and slide the rail away from engine. Raise engine and move engine to the rear and to the left away from right side rail.

Reinstall engine by reversing the removal procedure. Tighten side rail to front support bolts to a torque of 162-184 ft.-lbs. (220-250 N.m). When installing side rail to fiywheel housing cap screws,

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 tighten 20 mm cap screws to a torque of 313-358 ft.-lbs. (425-485 N.m) and the 22 mm cap screws to a torque of 432-483 ft.-lbs. (585-655 N.m). Tighten bolts securing engine mounts to side rails to a torque of 69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m). Install exhaust elbow on fiywheel housing and tighten mounting bolts to a torque of 59-66 ft.-lbs. (80-90 N.m). Install exhaust pipe and tighten clamp bolts to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m). Tighten air cleaner and muffler mounting bolts to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).

Clean mounting flanges of fljrwheel housing and speed transmission. Apply Molydisulfide grease on splines of transmission input shaft. Install two guide studs in the transmission housing. Apply Loctite 504 gasket eliminator to flange of transmission housing and roll tractor togethe*. Remove guide studs and install mounting bolts and lockwashers. Tighten 12 mm bolts to a torque of 69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m), tighten 16 mm bolts to a torque of 162-184 ft.-lbs.

(220-250 N.m) and tighten 22 mm bolts to a torque of 432-483 ft.-lbs. (585-655 N.m). Remove split stands.

The balance of assembly is the reverse of disassembly procedure.

CYLINDER HEAD All Models 25. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Ib remove the cylinder head, raise hood and remove side panels.

Drain cooling system and disconnect battery cables.

Disconnect air cleaner restriction sending unit wires.

Disconnect air tubes, then unbolt and remove the strata tube and air cleaner assembly. Disconnect exhaust tubes, then unbolt and remove muffler assembly. Unbolt and remove air cleaner and muffler support. Disconnect oil supply and drain tubes from turbocharger, then unbolt and remove turbocharger.

Disconnect wiring from air conditioning compressor, unbolt compressor from engine and remove condenser from radiator support. Carefully place compressor and condenser with hoses connected, in tractor cab. Remove ether starting line from intake manifold. Remove fuel leak-off line and injection lines. Cap or plug all openings. Using adapter CAS1815 and slide hammer, remove injectors. Shut off fuel valve and remove fuel filters and filter housing.

Unbolt and remove exhaust manifold. Remove breather tube and valve cover. Unbolt and remove intake manifold cover or after cooler. Disconnect and remove the coolant bypass tube. Unbolt and remove rocker arm assemblies. Remove and discard the rocker arm oil supply tube. Remove the push rods.

Remove cylinder head retaining cap screws and lift off cylinder head.

Clean cylinder head and engine block mating surfaces, removing carbon or other deposits. Check cyl-

Paragraph 25 inder head for cracks or other signs of damage. Using a straight edge and feeler gage, check cylinder head at each side and between cylinders for warping. If warping is greater than 0.004 inch (0.1016 mm), cylinder head must be machined or renewed.

NOTE: After machining, if cyiinder liead height is less than 4.557 inches (115.75 mm), renew cylinder head.

When reassembling, select the correct head gasket to be installed. Head gaskets are identified by notches in edge of gasket as shown in Fig. 25. Standard gasket has no notches, 0.008 inch (0.21 mm) oversize thickness gasket has two notches and 0.011 inch (0.27 mm) oversize thickness gasket has three notches.

Install head gasket and cylinder head. Lubricate cylinder head bolt threads with oil and install.

Tighten cylinder head bolts in three steps using the sequence shown in Fig. 26. Tighten to 37 ft.-lbs. (50 N.m) in first step, to 110 ft.-lbs. (149 N.m) in second step and to 148 ft.-lbs. (201 N.m) in third step.

Tighten rocker arm stand bolts to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m).

Using a new gasket, install intake manifold cover on Models 7110, 7120 and 7130 or after cooler on Model 7140. Apply liquid Ifeflon on the retaining cap screw threads and tighten to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m) using sequence shown in Fig. 27. Install exhaust manifold with new gaskets and tighten cap screws to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m) using sequence shown in Fig. 28.

Refer to paragraph 60 for installation information on fuel injectors and to paragraph 69 for installation of turbocharger. Adjust valve tappet gap as outlined in paragraph 27.

Notches

1

o

\9/^—N

O

o o "1

o

) Fig. 25—View showing typicai cyiinder head gasket thickness identification notches. Refer to text.

BOLT TORQUE SEQUENCE

Fig. 26—Cylinder head bolt tightening sequence for all models.

23

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 26-27 Complete the assembly by reversing the disassembly procedure. Other tightening torques are as follows: Valve cover bolts 18 ft.-lbs.

(24 N.m) Filter housing nut 24 ft.-lbs.

(32 N.m) Fuel injector bolts 18 ft.-lbs.

(24 N.m) Turbocharger mounting nuts 24 ft.-lbs.

(32 N.m)

Intake Face and seat angle Stem diameter Stem to guide clearance Seat width Valve tappet gap (cold) Valve recession from face of cylinder head

VALVES AND SEATS All Models

BQLT TORQUE SEQUENCE

Fig. 27—Intake manifold or after cooler bolt tightening sequence.

BOLT TOROUE SEOUENCE

n nffl

cm n

LLXJ

Fig. 28—Exhaust manifold bolt tightening sequence for all models.

FAH

Fig. 29—With No. 1 piston at TDC of compression stroke, adjust the vaives indicated by arrows.

24

0.035-0.056 in.

(0.89-1.42 mm)

Exhaust

26. Intake and exhaust valves seat on renewable seat inserts. Seat inserts are available in standard size and 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) oversize. Valve stem seals are used on all valves. When renewing valve seat inserts, use valve seat puller CAS-1869 and slide hammer to remove seats. DO NOT attempt to drive a chisel under insert as counterbore will be damaged.

Chill new inserts in dry ice prior to installation, then use a driver and install seats.

Check the valves against the following specifications:

TTT

30° 0.373-0.374 in.

(9.48-9.50 mm) 0.0015-0.003 in.

(0.039-0.079 mm) 0.054-0.078 in.

(1.38-1.98 mm) 0.012 in.

(0.305 mm)

Face and seat angle Stem diameter Stem to guide clearance Seat width Valve tappet gap (cold) Valve recession from face of cylinder head

45"" 0.373-0.374 in.

(9.48-9.50 mm) 0.0015-0.003 in.

(0.039-0.079 mm) 0.076-0.106 in.

(1.92-2.68 mm) 0.024 in.

0.609 mm) 0.035-0.056 in.

(0.89-1.42 mm)

27. VALVE (TAPPET) GAP ADJUSTMENT. The two-position method of tappet adjustment is recommended. DO NOT attempt to adjust valve tappet gap with engine operating. Using a fljrwheel rotating tool CAS-1690 through opening in flywheel housing, turn flywheel in normal direction of rotation while pushing inward on the timing lock pin. The timing lock pin is located in timing gear housing below the fuel injection pump. When the lock pin moves forward into hole in camshaft gear, engine will be locked with No. 1 piston at TDC of compression stroke. Adjust the six valves indicated by arrows in Fig. 29. Disengage lock pin and rotatefl3rwheelone complete revolution to position No. 6 piston at TDC of compression stroke.

Then, adjust the six valves indicated by arrows in Fig. 30. Refer to paragraph 26 for valve tappet gap. Remove flywheel rotating tool and install plug in hole.

FAN

Fig. 30—With No. 6 piston at TDC of compression stroke, adjust the vaives indicated by arrows.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 VALVE GUIDES AND SPRINGS All Models 28. The intake and exhaust valve guides are interchangeable. If valve guides are worn beyond the limit of 0.376 inch (9.559 mm), renew guides as follows: Use tool CAS-10823 or equivalent and press on bottom of guides until removed. Then, use tool CAS-10823 and press on top end of guides until top of intake guides are 0.813-0.833 inch (20.65-21.16 mm) above spring recess in head or top of exhaust guides are 0.8860.906 inch (22.50-23.01 mm) above spring recess in head. Ream installed guides to inside diameter of 0.3755 inch (9.539 nun). Stem seals are used on all valves.

Intake and exhaust valve springs are interchangeable. Renew any spring that is cracked, discolored or does not meet the following specifications: Free length 2.585 in.

(65.66 mm) Test length 2.0 in.

(50.8 mm) Test load 104-115 lbs.

(464.5-513.5 N)

ROCKER ARMS All Models 29. Refer to Fig. 31 for exploded view of rocker arm and shaft assembly used on each cylinder. To disassemble the removed unit, remove cap screws (7) and separate rocker shaft support (8) from shaft (9). Remove snap rings (1), flat washers (2) and spring washers (3), then slide rocker arms (4) from rocker shaft (9).

Measure rocker shaft (9) and if worn to a diameter of less than 0.874 inch (22.199 mm), renew shaft.

Measure inside diameter of rocker arm (4). If diameter of bore is more than 0.878 inch (22.301 mm), renew rocker arm.

Reassemble by reversing the disassembly procedure and install a new rocker arm oil supply tube.

Tighten rocker support cap screws (7) to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m). Adjust valve tappet gap as outlined in paragraph 27. Use a new gasket and install valve cover. Tighten cap screws to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).

Paragraphs 28-32 Measure outside diameter of cam follower stem. If outside diameter is less than 0.627 inch (15.926 mm), renew cam follower. Measure follower bores in block.

If inside diameter is more than 0.632 inch (16.055 mm), renew cylinder block

TIMING GEAR COVER All Models 31. Tb remove the timing gear cover, remove hood, grille and side panels. Drain cooling system. Unbolt air conditioning condenser and lay back on top of engine. Remove radiator, oil cooler and support as outlined in paragraph 73. Loosen air conditioning compressor and remove belt. Lift belt tensioner and remove fan belt. Unbolt and remove fan assembly, fan pulley and crankshaft pulley. Then, unbolt and remove timing gear cove*.

NOTE: Refer to paragraph 45 for crankshaft seal installation and timing gear cover alignment.

When reassembling, use new cover gasket and tighten cover retaining cap screws to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Tighten crankshaft pulley retaining cap screws to a torque of 148 ft.-lbs. (200 N.m) and fan bolts to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m). Tighten the five cap screws securing radiator support to front support to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).

TIMING GEARS All Models 32. The timing gear train consists of the crankshaft gear, camshaft gear and injection pump drive gear.

CAM FOLLOWERS All Models 30. The mushroom-type cam followers can be removed from below after first removing camshaft and oil pan as outlined in paragraphs 37 and 48.

Fig. 31—Expioded view of rocker arm assembly used on each cylinder.

1. Snap ring 2. Washer 6. Locknut 3. Spring washer 7. Cap screw 4. Rocker arm assy.

8. Rocker shaft support 5. Adjusting screw 9. Rocker shaft

25

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 33-35 Engine oil pump is mounted on front of engine block inside the timing gear housing and drives through an idler gear from crankshaft gear, becoming part of the gear train. Refer to the appropriate following paragraphs for timing, inspection and R&R information.

33. TIMING MARKS. When installing camshaft gear and crankshaft gear, align single punch mark on

Fig. 32—View of timing marks aiigned on crankshaft gear and camshaft gear.

X ^

CASE/INTERNATIONAL crankshaft gear with double punch marks on camshaft gear. See Fig. 32. Oil pump gear and idler, and the injection pump gear do not have timing marks.

34. CAMSHAFT GEAR. The camshaft gear is a shrink fit on the camshaft. To remove the camshaft gear, remove camshaft from engine as outlined in paragraph 37. With timing gear cover removed and before removing the camshaft, use a dial indicator and check backlash between camshaft gear and crankshaft gear. Normal backlash is 0.006-0.010 inch (0.152-0.254 mm). Maximum backlash is 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). Excessive backlash could be caused by gear wear, shaft wear or camshaft bushing wear, or by a combination of factors.

To remove camshaft gear after removing camshaft, press the gear off the shaft. Refer to paragraph 38 and check camshaft bushings and camshaft for excessive wear.

When installing camshaft gear on camshaft, heat gear approximately 45 minutes in a bearing oven at a temperature of 250° F (121° C). Install camshaft gear with timing marks to the front and timing pin hole to the rear.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves when handling heated parts.

Reinstall camshaft as outlined in paragraph 37.

Fig. 33—View of timing io6k pin iocated in timing gear housing directiy below fuel Injection pump.

35. INJECTION PUMP GEAR. To remove the injection pump drive gear, first remove the timing gear cover as outlined in paragraph 31. Using a dial indicator, check backlash between injection pump drive gear and camshaft gear. Normal backlash is 0.006-0.010 inch (0.152-0.254 mm). Maximum backlash is 0.015 inch (0.38 mm). Remove nut ^ d lockwasher from injection pump shaft. Using flywheel rotating tool CAS-1690 through hole in flywheel housing, turn fljrwheel in normal direction of rotation while pushing inward on the timing lock pin. See Fig. 33. When lock pin is engaged in hole in camshaft gear, remove the injection pump timing pin cover. Remove timing pin from injection pump. Reverse the pin and reinstall with long end inward. See Fig. 34. When slot in long end of pump timing pin engages tab in pump, injection pump is locked in time for No. 1 cylinder.

Install pump timing pin cover and tighten a small amount. Using puller CAS-1691, remove injection pump drive gear.

When installing pump drive gear, make certain the timing lock pin is engaged in hole in camshaft gear and that pump timing pin has pump locked in time.

Fig. 34—View of the injection pump timing lock pin.

When slot in long end of pin engages tab in pump, the injection pump is iocked in time for No. 1 cyiinder.

26

NOTE: Inside diameter of drive gear is tapered to fit the injection pump shaft. There is no key siot in the pump gear.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Install drive gear on pump shaft and install lockwasher and nut. Tighten nut a small amount. There is no timing mark on injection pump drive gear.

Remove pump timing pin cover and timing pin. Reverse the timing pin and install in pump short end first. Install and tighten timing pin cover to a torque of 11 ft.-lbs. (15 N.m). Pull lock pin out of camshaft gear. Remove flywheel rotating tool and install plug in flywheel housing. Then, tighten pump drive gear nut to a torque of 60 ft.-lbs. (81 N.m) on Models 7110, 7120 and 7130, or 66 ft.-lbs. (90 N.m) on Model 7140.

Refer to paragraph 31 and reinstall timing gear cover.

36. CRANKSHAFT GEAR. The crankshaft gear is a shrink fit on crankshaft. Backlash between crankshaft gear and camshaft gear should be 0.0060.010 inch (0.152-0.254 mm). Maximum allowable backlash is 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). Crankshaft must be removed from engine to renew crankshaft gear. Tb remove crankshaft, remove engine as outlined in paragraph 24. Remove camshaft as in paragraph 37 and injection pump as in paragraph 57. Unbolt and remove engine mounting plate and timing gear hous-

Paragraphs 36-37 ing (6—Fig. 37). Remove drive plate, flywheel, flywheel housing and rear seal retainer. Remove oil pan and oil inlet tube. Remove cylinder head and piston and rod units. Remove main bearing caps, then lift out crankshaft. Press crankshaft from crankshaft gear.

Inspect crankshaft gear timing pin for looseness or damage and renew as necessary. Timing pin must protrude 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) above surface of crankshaft when installed. See Fig. 36. Heat new gear in a bearing oven for at least 25 minutes at a temperature of 250° F (121° C). Install gear with timing mark to the front, until seated against bearing journal.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves when handiing heated parts.

Reassemble by reversing disassembly procedures.

CAMSHAFT AND BEARINGS All Models 37. R&R CAMSHAFT. To remove the camshaft and gear assembly, first remove the timing gear cover as outhned in paragraph 31. Remove injection pump drive gear as outlined in paragraph 35. Unbolt and remove fuel transfer pump from left side of engine block. Remove valve cover, rocker arm assemblies, oil supply tube and push rods. Make 12 wooden dowels

Fig. 35—if the balance marks on crankshaft pulley are not aligned, renew the pulley.

0.040 INCH (1.02 mm)

IS 14 Fig. 37—Exploded view of timing gear housing, cover and related parts.

Fig. 36—Crankshaft gear timing pin must protrude 0.040 Inch (1,02 mm) above surface of crankshaft.

1. Crankshaft front seal 2. Plug 3. Seal ring 4. Timing gear cover 5. Gasket 6. Timing gear housing 7. Seal ring S. Lock pin housing

9. Timing lock pin 10. "O"ring 11. Retaining ring 12. Slotted head cap screw 13. Housing gasket 14. Gasket 15. Access plate

27

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 38-40 V2 X 18 inches (12.7 x 457 mm) and cut a slot in end ofeach dowel 0.354 inch (9.0 mm) deep. Push slotted end ofeach dowel into a cam follower. Pull dowel pins upward to hold cam followers up and away from camshaft. Place a rubber band around each pair of dowel pins to hold them in upward position. Working through the holes in camshaft, unbolt and remove the camshaft thrust plate (3—Fig. 38). Withdraw camshaft and gear assembly.

Remove camshaft gear as outlined in paragraph 34 if renewal is indicated. Refer to paragraph 38 for specification data on camshaft and bushings.

When reinstalling camshaft, align timing marks as shown in Fig. 32. Install thrust plate (3—Fig. 38) and secure with cap screws (2). Then, using a dial indicator, check camshaft end play. End play is controlled by the thrust plate (3). Camshaft end play should be 0.0047-0.0134 inches (0.120-0.340 mm). If end play is more than 0.0185 inches (0.470 mm), renew thrust plate. Tighten thrust plate retaining cap screws (2) to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Complete reassembly by reversing the disassembly procedure. Adjust valve clearance as outlined in paragraph 27.

38. CAMSHAFT BEARINGS. Camshaft rides in seven camshaft bearings. Camshaft journals should have an operating clearance in bearings of 0.00180.0048 inch (0.045-0.123 mm). Maximum allowable clearance is 0.0059 inch (0.150 mm).

To renew camshaft bearings (5—Fig. 38), first remove engine as outlined in paragraph 24. Remove drive plate, flywheel and flywheel housing. Remove camshaft as in paragraph 37. Remove oil pan and oil inlet tube. Remove expansion plug from behind rear camshaft bearing. Using a suitable camshaft removal tool, pull camshaft bearings from engine.

All seven camshaft journals are the same size.

Journals should measure 2.3617-2.3627 inches

Fig, 38—View of camshaft and related parts. All seven camshaft bearings are identical.

1. Camshaft gear 4. Gear timing pin 2. Cap screw (2) 5. Camshaft bearings (7) 3. Thrust plate 6. Camshaft

28

CASE/INTERNATIONAL (59.987-60.013 mm). If any journal is worn beyond the limit of 2.3607 inches (59.962 mm), renew camshaft. Renew camshaft if any lobes are scuffed, scored or excessively worn.

Cainshaft bearings are presized and should need no final sizing if carefully installed. When installing new bearings, make certain the oil holes in bearings and crankcase are aligned. When installing expansion plug at rear camshaft bearing, apply Loctite 277 to the sealing surface of the plug.

ROD AND PISTON UNITS All Models 39. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Connecting rod and piston units are removed from above after removing cylinder head, oil pan, oil inlet tube and connecting rod caps. Before removing, place a cylinder identification mark at top front ofeach piston. If not marked, place cylinder identification number on connecting rod and cap in side opposite the camshaft.

Remove carbon or wear ring from top of cylinders, then remove the rod and piston units.

Reinstall by reversing the removal procedure. Lubricate threads and tighten nuts on connecting rod bolts in three steps. In first step, tighten to a torque of 30 ft.-lbs. (40 N.m), in second step to a torque of 60 ft.-lbs. (80 N.m) and in third step to a torque of 88 ft.-lbs.(120N.m).

PISTONS, SLEEVES AND RINGS All Models 40. Sleeves and pistons are available separately or in sets. New pistons have a diametrical clearance in new sleeves of 0.006-0.008 inch (0.153-0.207 mm), measured between sleeve and bottom of piston skirt 90 degrees from piston pin. Maximum allowable clearance is 0.013 inch (0.341 mm).

The wet-type sleeves (12—Fig. 39) should be renewed when out-of-round or taper exceeds 0.0016 inch (0.040 mm). Inside diameter of new sleeve is 4.488-4.490 inches (114.00-114.04 mm) with a maximum service limit of 4.493 inches (114.117 mm).

Using a suitable sleeve puller, remove sleeves, being careful not to contact the four block lugs. See Fig. 40.

Before installing sleeves, thoroughly clean upper and lower sleeve contact areas of the engine block.

Install new "O** ring (13—Fig. 39) in groove in sleeve (12), lubricate "O" ring and sleeve contact areas in block with clean oil. Install sleeve in block. Use a hammer and wooden block to seat the sleeve. Make sure the sleeve does not contact the four block lugs (Fig. 40). If sleeve contacts the lugs, renew cylinder block. Using a dial indicator, measure sleeve standout

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 41-42

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 (distance from top of sleeve flange to cylinder block surface). Measure at four (90 degree) intervals.

Sleeve standout should be 0.0005-0.004 inch (0.0130.109 mm). If sleeve standout is not correct, use alternate sleeves to correct the problem. If sleeve standout cannot be corrected, renew cylinder block.

The pistons (4—Fig. 39) should measure 4.48164.4822 inches (113.833-113.847 mm) at 0.472 inch (12.0 mm) above bottom of piston and at 90 degrees from piston pin holes. If worn beyond the minimum service limit of 4.479 inches (113.776 mm), renew pistons.

Piston ring specifications are as follows: Top Compression Ring: Ring type Keystone End gap 0.016-0.028 in.

(0.40-0.70 mm) Side clearance Not measurable Second Compression Ring: Ring type Rectangular taper face End gap 0.016-0.028 in.

(0.40-0.70 mm) Side clearance 0.003-0.005 in.

(0.070-0.125 mm) Oil Control Ring: Ring type Two piece End gap 0.012-0.024 in.

(0.30-0.60 mm) Side clearance .\ 0.0008-0.0026 in.

(0.020-0.065 mm) Top compression rings and second compression rings are marked "TOP" for correct installation. Oil rings can be installed either side up. Install piston rings on pistons so that ring gaps are 120 degrees apart.

PISTON PINS All Models

CONNECTING RODS AND BEARINGS All Models 42. Connecting rods are removed as outlined in paragraph 39. Standard crank pin diameter is 2.9916-2.9926 inches (75.987-76.013 mm). Desired

Fig. 39—Exploded view showing piston, connecting rod and sieeve and related parts. Piston pin bushing (6) is not avaiiabie separately, 1. Ibp compression ring 2. Second compression ring 8. Nut 3. Oil control ring 9. Connecting rod & cap 4. Piston 10. Rod bolt 5. Retaining rings 11. Piston pin 6. Pin bushing 12. Sleeve 7. Connecting rod bearing 13. "O" ring

41. The full floating-type piston pins (11—Fig. 39) are retained in piston bosses by retaining rings (5) and are available in standard size onljr. Outside diameter of new pin is 1.7715-1.7718 inches (44.99745.003 mm). If pin is worn beyond the minimum service limit of 1.7714 inches (44.993 mm), renew pin.

Pin bushing inside diameter in connecting rod should be 1.7726-1.7730 inches (45.023-45.035 mm).

If pin bushing inside diameter exceeds 1.7730 inches (45.035 mm), renew connecting rod as bushing (6) is not serviced separately.

Measure piston pin bore in piston, which should be 1.7719-1.7721 inches (45.006-45.012 mm). If wom beyond the maximum service limit of 1.7726 inches (45.025 mm), renew piston. , ,

Fig. 40—View of four block lugs at base of cylinder In crankcase.

29

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 43-45

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

bearing clearance is 0.0012-0.0046 inch (0.033-0.117 mm) with a maximum allowable clearance of 0.0056 inch (0.142 mm). Regrind or renew crankshaft if out-of-round exceeds 0.0019 inch (0.050 mm) or if taper exceeds 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm). Rod bearings (9--Fig. 39) are available in undersizes of 0.010, 0.020, 0.030 and 0.040 inch (0.25, 0.50, 0.75 and 1.0 mm) as well as standard. Connecting rod side clearance should be 0.004-0.012 inch (0.1-0.3 mm).

When reinstalling, stamped cylinder numbers on connecting rods and caps should face opposite camshaft side and arrows on top of pistons must be toward front of engine. Tighten nuts (8) on connecting rod bolts in three steps. In first step, tighten to a torque of 30 ft.-lbs. (40 N.m). In second step, tighten to a torque of 60 ft.-lbs. (80 N.m). In third step, tighten to a torque of 88 ft.-lbs. (120 N.m).

CRANKSHAFT AND MAIN BEARINGS All Models 43. The crankshaft (8—Fig. 41) is supported in seven main bearings. Crankshaft end play is controlled by the flanged upper half of No. 4 main bearing insert.

Standard main journal diameter is 3.8578-3.8588 inches (97.987-98.013 mm). Main bearing caps are numbered one through seven and must be reinstalled in correct position. Desired main bearing diametrical clearance is 0.0026-0.0053 inch (0.066-0.134 mm).

Upper and lower bearing liners are not interchangeable. Make certain the half containing the oil hole is installed in block and that oil holes properly align.

Desired crankshaft end play is 0.006-0.013 inch (0.157-0.334 mm). If, after installing new main bearing liners, end play exceeds 0.015 inch (0.381 mm), crankshaft should be renewed. Regrind or renew crankshaft if out-of-round exceeds 0.0019 inch (0.050 mm) or if taper exceeds 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm).

Crankshaft removal is outlined in paragraph 36.

Main bearing liners can be renewed after removing oil pan, oil pump inlet tube and bearing caps.

Main bearing liners are available in undersizes of 0.010,0.020,().030 and 0.040 inch (0.25,0.50,0.75 and 1.0 mm) as well as standard.

Main bearing cap screws are self-locking type and can be reused. Tighten main bearing cap screws in three stages. In the first stage, tighten to a torque of 37 ft.-lbs. (50 N.m). In second stage, tighten to a torque of 88 ft.-lbs. (119 N.m). In third stage, tighten to a torque of 129 ft.-lbs. (175 N.m).

OIL SPRAY NOZZLES All Models 44. Engines are equipped with piston cooling spray nozzles located in main bearing carriers in engine block. All engines in Models 7110 and 7120, and early Models 7130 and 7140 are equipped with six spray nozzles. Later Models 7130 and 7140 engines are equipped with 12 spray nozzles.

With crankshaft and main bearings removed, clean oil spray nozzles with a wire. The spray nozzles need not be removed unless they are damaged. When renewing spray nozzles, drive nozzles in until flange on nozzles is seated.

CRANKSHAFT SEALS All Models

10 Fig. 41—View showing crankshaft and related parts.

Center (No, 4) upper bearing half controls crankshaft end play.

1. Crankshaft gear 6. Seal retainer 2. Front oil seal 7. Gasket 3. Crankshaft pulley 8. Crankshaft 4. Main bearings 9. Gear timing pin (upper halves) 10. Main bearings 5. Rear oil seal (lower halves)

30

45. FRONT. Tb renew the front crankshaft seal (2—Fig 41), first remove timing gear cover as outlined in paragraph 31. Then, drive seal from front cover.

Thoroughly clean seal and gasket mounting surfaces of front cover and timing gear housing.

The front crankshaft seal is avaiiabie only In a kit (Part No. J908139), which indudes the two installation toois.

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 46-48

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Install two guide studs in the timing gear housing and using a new gasket, slide cover in place. Install cover retaining bolts, but do not tighten at this time.

Install seal driving tool over crankshaft and into front cover with small diameter toward the engine. This will center the cover with the crankshaft. Tighten front cover cap screws to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Remove seal driver tool. Place new seal on the seal protective tool. Apply Loctite 277 to outer diameter of seal. Slide protective sleeve tool and seal on crankshaft until seal contacts the cover. Remove protective sleeve and install seal driver tool. Drive seal inward until outside diameter of installing tool contacts front cover. This will be the correct installation depth for the seal. Remove seal driver tool. If sealing surface on crankshaft is worn or pitted, a wear ring and installing tool kit (Part No. J908277) is available for installation.

For the balance of reassembly, refer to paragraph 3L 46. REAR. To renew rear crankshaft seal (5—Fig. 41), first split tractor between engine and speed transmission housing as outlined in paragraph 24.

Drain oil, then unbolt and remove oil pan. Refer to Fig. 42 and remove drive plate (1),fl3rwheel(2), flywheel housing (3) and "O" ring (6). Unbolt and remove retainer (6—Fig. 41) with seal (5), then remove seal from retainer. Clean gasket surfaces of retainer and crankcase. Use Loctite safety solvent and clean mounting surface of seal in retainer.

plate and tighten cap screws to a torque of 69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m). Use new gasket and reinstall oil pan.

Refer to paragraph 24 and reconnect tractor.

FLYWHEEL All Models 47. To remove the flywheel (2—Fig. 42), first split tractor between engine and speed transmission housing as outlined in paragraph 24. Remove drive plate (1), then unbolt and remove flywheel.

The flywheel ring gear is a shrink fit on front of flywheel. The manufacturer cautions against the use of a torch or open flame for heating ring gear. Heat the new ring gear to 400°-450° F (204°-232° C) in oil or in an oven. Install gear on flywheel.

WARNiNG: Always wear heat protective gloves when handiing heated parts.

Install flywheel and tighten the retaining cap screws to a torque of 101 ft.-lbs. (137 N.m). Reassemble tractor by reversing disassembly procedure.

OIL PAN AND OIL INLET TUBE All Models

NOTE: The rear crankshaft seal is avaiiabie oniy in a kit (Part No. J909410), which inciudes two instailation toois.

48. Tb remove the oil pan, remove drain plug and drain engine oil. On models equipped with frontwheel drive, remove front drive shaft shield and drive

Install two guide studs in rear of crankcase. Using a new gasket, slide seal retainer in place over guide studs. Install retainer bolts, remove guide studs, but do not tighten retainer bolts at this time. Install seal driver tool into seal retainer with small diameter toward engine. This will center the retainer with the crsinkshaft. Tighten seal retainer cap screws to a torque of 7 ft.-lbs. (9 N.m). Remove seal driver tool.

Slide protective sleeve tool with new seal over crankshaft until outer diameter of seal contacts seal retainer. Remove protective sleeve and install seal driver with small diameter toward the seal. Coat outer diameter of seal with soap. Drive seal inward until outer dieimeter of installing tool contacts seal retainer. This will be the correct installation depth for the seal. Remove seal driver tool.

If sealing surface on crankshaft is wom or pitted, a wear ring and installing tool kit (Part No. J906081) is available for installation.

Use new "O" ring (6—Fig. 42) and reinstall fljnvheel housing. Tighten fl3rwheel housing bolts to a torque of 45 ft.-lbs. (60 N.m). Install flywheel and tighten bolts to a torque of 101 ft.-lbs. (137 N.m). Install drive

Fig, 42—View of flywheel housing and related parts, 1. Drive plate , 4. "O" ring 2. Flywheel 5. Flywheel rotating hole plug 3. Flywheel housing 6. "O** ring

31

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 49-50 shaft as outlined in paragraph 12. Unbolt and remove oil pan, then unbolt and remove oil inlet tube.

Clean all surfaces of foreign material. Make certain that strainer screen on inlet tube is clean. Using new gasket, install oil inlet tube. Tighten retaining screws to a torque of 7 ft.-lbs. (9 N.m). Install oil pan with new gasket and tighten cap screws to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).

CASE/INTERNATIONAL Reinstall front drive shaft and shield, if so equipped, as outlined in paragraph 12. Fill oil pan with new oil to proper level. Oil should have API service classification CD or CE. Use SAE 20W-40 oil in temperatures above 30° F (-1° C), SAE 15W-40 oil in temperatures above 10° F (-12° C) or SAE lOW-30 oil in temperatures below 90° F (32° C). Capacity with filler change is 22 quarts (21 L).

OIL PUMP All Models

Fig, 43—With timing gear front cover removed, unbolt and remove oil pump assembly.

49. To remove the oil pump, first remove timing gear cover as outlined in paragraph 31. With front cover removed, unbolt and lift out pump assembly as shown in Fig. 43. Place oil pump on a bench with gear side down. Remove rear cover, then u^ing a feeler gage, measure clearance between lobe on inner rotor and lobe on outer rotor as shown in Fig. 44. If clearance exceeds 0.0098 inch (0.25 mm), renew pump assembly. Oil pump is serviced only as a complete assembly.

When installing oil pump assembly, tighten the four mounting bolts evenly to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs.

(24 N.m) following the sequence shown in Fig. 45. DO NOT over tighten. A small clearance will exist between pump flange and cylinder block.

With oil pump installed, check backlash between pump idler gear and crankshaft gear. If backlash exceeds 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), renew pump assembly.

Refer to paragraphs 31 and 45 and reassemble tractor.

OIL FILTER AND PRESSURE REGULATOR All Models Fig. 44^-Using a feeier gage, measure clearance between lobe on Inner rotor and lobe on outer rotor.

Fig, 45—Use tightening sequence shown when Installing oil pump assembly.

32

50. All engines are equipped with a full-flow, screwon oil filter (10—Fig. 46). Manufacturer recommends changing the oil filter and engine oil every 250 hours of operation. When installing new filter cartridge, lubricate gasket on filter with clean oil. Turn filter clockwise until gasket contacts filter head. Then, hand tighten filter one-half turn.

The oil pressure regulator valve (6) is located in the filter head (4). Remove plug (9) with gasket (8), spring (7) and regulator valve (6). Free length of spring (7) should be 3.41 inches (86.61 mm) and should test 38.8-42.6 lbs. (172.6-189.3 N) when compressed to a length of 2.37 inches (60.3 mm). Inspect valve (6) and renew if scored or pitted. When reinstalling, use new gasket (8) and tighten plug (9) to a torque of 60 ft.-lbs.

(80 N.m). Oil pressure should be 43-54 psi (296-372 kPa) with engine warm and operating at 2200 rpm.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 ENGINE OIL COOLER All Models 51. The engine oil cooler (2—Fig. 46) is located in right side of engine block behind the oil filter head (4).

TD remove the oil cooler, drain cooling system and remove oil filter cartridge. Disconnect the turbocharger oil supply line. Unbolt and remove filter head

Paragraphs 51-54 (4) and gasket (3). Remove oil cooler (2) and gasket (1).

Clean all surfaces of foreign material. Cleaning procedure for the oil cooler consists of flushing the oil circuit with clean solvent and removing scale or rust from exterior of cooling plates.

Using new gaskets, reinstall by reversing the removal procedure. Tighten filter head retaining cap screws (5) to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEM Models 7110,7120 and 7130 are equipped with Robert Bosch Model PS6A injection pumps.

Model 7140 is equipped with a Robert Bosch Model PS6MW ii^ection pump. Robert Bosch multihole ii\jector nozzles are used on all models.

FUEL, FUEL FILTERS AND TRANSFER PUMP

each morning and drain any accumulated water from fuel tank.

Tb renew the filters, first clean filter head, elements and surrounding area. Shut off fuel valve at tank and remove water bleed screw from primary filter (P).

Using a clamp-type filter wrench, unscrew and remove filters.

All Models 52. FUEL. The manufacturer recommends using a good grade of No. 2 diesel fuel, with a Cetane rating of 43 or better, for normal operation. For cold weather operation, Cetane rating should be 45-55 and fuel pour point should be at least -15° F (-26° C).

53. TRANSFER PUMP. A plunger-type fuel transfer pump (7—Fig. 47) is located on left side of cylinder block.This unit pumps the fuel through the two filters and on to the diesel injection pump. The transfer pump is operated by an eccentric lobe on engine camshaft. A thumb push button actuates the pump when bleeding air from fuel system.

Ib remove the transfer pump, shut ofFfiiel at tank valve and disconnect supply line from pump. Disconnect outlet line from pump, remove cap screws (6) and withdraw pump from engine. The transfer pump is serviced only as a complete unit.

Use new gasket (8) when installing pump and tighten cap screws (6) to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).

54. FUEL FILTERS. Filters are the screw-on type (Fig. 47). Filters are available in a kit that consists of both units, and both should be renewed every 500 hours of operation or when noticeable loss of power occurs. Primary filter (P) is equipped with a water bleed screw. Each morning before operating tractor, loosen water bleed screw and drain off any water from primary filter. Retighten screw. There is also a water drain valve in the bottom of thefizeltank. Open valve

Fig. 46—Exploded view of engine oil cooler, oil filter head and relative components.

1. Gasket 7. Spring 2. Oil cooler 8. Gasket 3. Gasket 9. Regulator valve plug 4. Filter head 10. Filter cartridge 5. Cap screw (11) < 11- Filter adapter 6. Regulator valve 12. Cold oil relief valve

33

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 55-57 Lightly oil gaskets on new filters and turn filters clockwise until gaskets contact filter head (3). Then, hand tighten filters one-half to three-quarters of a turn. DO NOT over tighten. Bleed air from system as outlined in paragraph 55.

55. BLEED SYSTEM. To bleed fiiel system, make certadn there is fuel in the tank and that shut off valve

at tank is open. Loosen the air bleed screw (Fig. 48) and operate thumb push button on transfer (primer) pump until air-free fuel flows from bleed screw opening. Close the air bleed screw. Loosen the fuel return line fitting at left front side of injection pimip. On Model 7140, also loosen bleed screw on the inner front side of injection pump. Operate thumb push button on transfer pump until clear fuel with no air bubbles flows from fitting and bleed screw. Tighten return line fitting and bleed screw, if so equipped.

INJECTION PUMP All Models 56. LUBRICATION. The fiiel injection pump is lubricated with the engine oil through a port in the timing gear housing. An "O" ring is used to seal the port to the injection pump housing.

Fig. 47—Screw-on fuel fiiters are used on ali tractors.

Fiiter head (3) is secured to flange on cylinder head by adapter tube (5) and nut (4). p. Primary filter 4. Nut S. Secondary filter 5. Adapter tube 1. ^O"ring 6. Cap screw (2) 2. "O" ring 7. Transfer pump 3. Filter head 8. Gasket

taw

AIR REMOVAL SCREV*

n

Fig, 48—View showing iocation of transfer (primer) pump and air removal screw.

34

57. R&R AND TIME PUMP. Tb adjust injection pump timing, remove pump as follows: Raise hood and remove left side panel. Disconnect and remove high-pressure injection lines. Immediately cap or plug all openings to prevent entrance of foreign material into system. Shut off fuel at tank, then disconnect and remove fuel return line and pump supply line. Disconnect wire, then unbolt and remove fuel shut-off solenoid. Disconnect throttle cable at injection pump. Remove the access plug from timing gear front cover. Working through the access hole, remove pump shaft nut and lockwasher. Remove plug from left front side of flywheel housing and install flywheel rotating tool CAS-1690. Rotate flywheel in normal direction of rotation and push inward on timing lock pin. See Fig. 49. When lock pin is engaged in hole in camshaft gear, engine will be locked with No. 1 piston at TDC on compression stroke. Working through access hole in front cover, use gear puller CAS-1691 or equivalent and pull gear until it is loose on pump shaft. Check for alignment marks on pump flange and timing gear housing. If no marks are visible, install

_ 4g—Yi0w of timing lock pin iocated in timing gear housing directly below fuel injection pump.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 match m£irks for pump alignment. Unbolt and remove injection pump and remove puller from pump drive gear. Remove pump timing pin cover (1—Fig. 51) and timing pin (3) from left side of pump. Rotate pump shaft until the timing tab is visible in timing pin hole. Reverse the pin and install with long end inward. See Fig. 50. When slot in long end of timing pin engages tab in pump, injection pump is locked in time for No. 1 cylinder. Install pump timing pin cover and tighten finger tight.

Install new oil port "O" ring (5—Fig. 51) and pump flange "O" ring (6) on pump. Make certain the timing lock pin is engaged in hole in camshaft gear and that pump timing pin has pump locked in time. Install pump, aligning the match marks on pump flange and timing gear housing. Tighten pump retaining nuts to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m).

NOTE: Inside diameter of pump drive gear is tapered to fit the injection pump siiaft. There is no key slot in the pump drive gear.

Install lockwasher (8) and nut (9) on pump shaft.

Tighten nut a small amount. Remove pump timing pin cover (1) and timing pin (3). Reverse the timing pin and install in pump short end first. Use new seal washer (2) and install and tighten timing pin cover to a torque of 11 ft.-lbs. (15 N.m). Pull lock pin out of camshaft gear. Remove flywheel rotation tool and install plug in fljrwheel housing. Then, tighten pump drive gear nut to a torque of 60 ft.-lbs. (81 N.m) on Models 7110, 7120 and 7130 or 66 ft.-lbs. (90 N.m) on Model 7140. Install access plug in timing gear front cover. Install fuel shut-off solenoid and throttle cable.

Install fuel return line and fuel supply line. Install high-pressure injection lines. Turn fdel shut-off valve at tank fiilly on, then bleed fuel system as outlined in paragraph 55.

58. PUMP SPEED ADJUSTMENT. The diesel governor is an integral part of injection pump and.

Fig. 50--View of injection pump timing lock pin. When slot In long end of pin engages tab in pump. Injection pump is locked in time for No, 1 cylinder.

Paragraph 58 except for minor speed adjustments, governor service should be done at an authorized diesel service shop.

Recommended governed speeds for all models are as follows: Low idle ffigh idle (no load) Rated (loaded) speed

825-875 rpm 2315-2395 rpm 2200 rpm

To adjust governed speeds, first make certain that throttle cable is correctly adjusted to fully open and close governor control lever on pump. Turn stop screws (HS and IS—Fig. 52) to adjust high and low idle speeds.

1

2 3

Fig. 51—View of injection pump and reiative components.

1. Timing pin cover 7. Pump drive gear 2. Seal washer 8. Lockwasher 3. Timing pin 9. Nut 4. Injection pump 10. Shut-off solenoid 5. Oil port "O" ring 11. Bracket 6. Flange "O" ring

Fig. 52—Location of diesel Injection pump speed adjustments.

HS. High idle speed screw IS. LfOw idle speed screw TPC. Timing lock pin cover

35

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 59-62 NOTE: Adjustment of fuel pump beyond factory specifications wili void the warranty on tractor.

INJECTOR NOZZLES All Models All tractors Eire equipped with Robert Bosch fuel injectors shown in Figs. 53 and 54.

59. LOCATING AFAULTYNOZZLE. If rough or uneven engine operation or misfiring indicate a faulty injector, defective unit can usually be located as follows: With engine operating at speed where malfunction is most noticeable (usually slow-idle speed), loosen

Fig. 53—Exploded view of Robert Bosch diesel fuel Injector.

1. Connector seal 2. Injector body 7. Valve 3. Shim 8. Nozzle tip 4. Spring 9. Cap nut 5. Spring seat 10. Seal sleeve 6. Valve stop 11. Seal ring

OfEMNO PRESSURE CONTROL SPMNO

compression nut at high-pressure line at each injector in turn and listen for change in engine performance.

As in checking spark plugs, faulty unit is one that, when its line is loosened, least affects engine operation.

If a faulty nozzle is found and considerable time has elapsed since injectors have been serviced, it is recommended that all nozzles be removed and checked or that new or reconditioned units be installed. Refer to appropriate following paragraphs for removal and test procedures.

60. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Clean the area around the fuel injectors. On Model 7140, drain cooling system, then ixnbolt and remove after cooler. On all models, unbolt injection lines bracket. Loosen injection line tube nut at pump, then disconnect line from injector. Unbolt leak-off line from injector. Cap or plug all openings. Remove injector clamp and bolt, then using special tool CAS 1815 and slide hammer, remove injector.

Make sure injector seal ring (11—Fig. 53) is removed with injector. If not, use a suitable tool or wire to remove the seal ring from the bore. Remove seal sleeve from injector. Remove the remainder of injectors using the same procedure. Clean bores for injectors using special tool CAS-1858.

Install new seal sleeve (10) and seal ring (11), reinstall injector. Install injector clamp and bolt and tighten to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Using new connector seal (1), install leak-offline and tighten bolt to a torque of 7 ft.-lbs. (9 N.m). Install and tighten injection line. On Model 7140, install after cooler and fill cooling system. Then, on all models, start engine.

If engine fails to start, loosen injection line nuts at injectors. Turn key switch and crank engine until diesel fuel leaks at loosened connections. Tighten line nuts and start engine.

61. TESTING. Acomplete job of testing and adjusting an injector nozzle requires use of special test equipment, such as test stand part number CAS10091 shown in Fig. 55. Only clean diesel fuel or approved testing oil should be used in tester tank.

The nozzle should be tested for opening pressure, seat leakage and spray pattern. When tested, nozzle should open with a sharp popping or buzzing sound and cut off quickly at end of injection with a minimum of seat leakage and a controlled amount of back leakage. Check as outlined in the following paragraphs: WARNING: Fuei ieaves nozzie tip with sufficient force to penetrate the sicin. Keep hands away from nozzie tip when testing.

H4JECTOR VALVE

Fig. 54—Cross-sectional view of diesel fuel Injector assembly.

36

62. OPENING PRESSURE. Before conducting test, operate tester until fuel flows, then attach injec-

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 tor to tester using correct adapter. Close valve to tester gage and pump tester lever a few quick strokes to be sure that nozzle is not plugged and that all four spray holes are open.

Open valve to tester gage and operate tester until fuel flows, then observe gage reading. Opening pressure should be 2722-3084 psi (18768-21263 kPa).

NOTE: When testing ail the injectors in an engine, there must not be more than 150 psi (1034 kPa) difference between any of the injectors.

If opening pressure is not as specified, disassemble injector as outlined in paragraph 65 and vary shims (3—Fig. 53) as required. Shims are available in 30 thicknesses ranging from 0.039 inch (1.0 mm) to 0.078 inch (1.98 mm). The opening pressure is changed about 55 psi (379 kPa) for each 0.001 inch (0.0254 mm) of shim thickness that is added or removed.

NOTE: if adjusting a new injector, or a used injector with a new spring (4), opening pressure shouid be 2968-3084 psi (20464-21263 icPa).

63. SPRAY PATTERN. Close the valve to tester gage and operate tester handle at approximately 60 strokes per minute. Four finely atomized conical sprays should be emitted from injector tip. If spray is solid, streaky or irregular, disassemble and overhaul injector as outlined in paragraph 65.

64. SEAT LEAKAGE. Point injector tip downward and operate tester rapidly to be sure nozzle valve is seated. Dry injector tip, then operate tester slowly to raise gage pressure to within 100 psi (690 kPa) under the opening pressure. Maintain this pressure for five seconds and observe the injector tip. If nozzle is in good condition, there should be no fuel accumulation in the five-second period although a slight dampness is permissible. If fuel drips or a visible drop forms, renew injector or overhaul as outlined in paragraph 65.

65. OVERHAUL. Soak injector in a carbon-removing solvent and clean outside of injector thoroughly.

Clamp flats of injector body (2—Fig. 53) in an injector holder in a vise so injector tip is pointing upward. Use a box wrench to remove cap nut (9) and BE SURE that nozzle valve tip (8) does not turn with cap nut. If nozzle valve tip does turn with cap nut, dowels and/or valve stop (6) will be damaged. Return nozzle assembly to solvent if nozzle tip is stuck to cap nut.

With cap nut removed, nozzle tip (8) with valve (7), valve stop (6), spring seat (5), spring (4) and shim (3) can be removed from body (2). Note number and thickness of shims (3) removed for aid in reassembly.

Shims are available in 30 thicknesses ranging from 0.039 inch (1.0 mm) to 0.078 inch (1.98 mm).

Paragraphs 63-65 Nozzle valve (7) and tip (8) are a matched set and parts should never be intermixed. Keep parts for each injector separate and immersed in clean diesel fuel or solvent in a compartmented pan as injector is disassembled.

A brass wire brush can be used to clean exterior surfaces of nozzle valve and tip. Clean nozzle spray orifices using cleaning wires 0.0005-0.001 inch (0.0127-0.0254 mm) smaller than orifice holes. Orifice holes are 0.011 inch (0.28 mm). Each nozzle contains four spray orifices. Use compressed air to clean ducts in nozzle body and a reverse flow of air through tip end of nozzle is recommended. Clean nozzle valve seat area with a brush. If necessary to remove varnish, use solvent and a felt cleaning pad.

Make sure that nozzle valve (7) slides freely in valve tip (8). Renew any parts that are scratched, scored, eroded or show signs of any other damage.

Reassemble injector as follows: Be sure parts are wet with diesel fuel and install adjusting shims (3), spring (4) and spring seat (5) with small diameter side toward spring. Align dowel pins in valve stop (6) with dowel holes in body (2) and install valve stop. Install valve and tip assembly (7 and 8) on valve stop, apply Lubriplate to shoulder only of nozzle tip, then install cap nut (9). Clamp flats of injector body (2) in an injector holder in a vise and tighten cap nut to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m).

Recheck injector opening pressure and, if necessary, readjust opening pressure as outlined in paragraph 62.

Fig. 55—CAS'1OO91 diesel fuel injection nozzie tester.

37

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 66-69 FUEL SHUT-OFF SOLENOID All Models 66. To remove the fuel shut-off solenoid (10—Fig. 51), disconnect electrical plug, then unbolt solenoid from mounting bracket (11).

Reinstall solenoid and tighten retaining bolts securely. Connect electrical plug.

All models are equipped with an automatic shutdown system. If engine oil pressure or transmission oil pressure is too low or if transmission oil temperature or engine coolant temperature is too high, 30 seconds after alarm sounds, current will shut off to solenoid and engine will shut down. Refer to appropriate paragraphs in ELECTRICAL SYSTEM section.

C) or lower. Ether can is located in front of tractor radiator.

To test the ether spray pattern, disconnect ether spray nozzle from intake manifold. Press ether injector button on dash and observe spray pattern. A good spray pattern is cone shaped. Dribbling or no spray indicates a blocked spray nozzle or lack of ether pressure. Clean spray nozzle or install new can of ether as needed.

Ib change ether container, loosen adjusting nut until container can be removed. Install new container in the bail and tighten adjusting nut while guiding container into proper position. Rotate container to make certain it is seated properly in injector body, then firmly tighten adjusting nut.

ETHER STARTING AID All Models 67. On all diesel engines, it may be necessary to use ether as a starting aid at temperatures of 20°

NOTE: in warm temperatures, the base shouid be piaced in the storage position or an empty ether can shouid be installed in the injector ixxly.

DIESEL TURBOCHARGER A Holset turbocharger is used on all models. Refer to Fig. 56. The unit mounts on exhaust manifold and uses exhaust pressure to slightly compress the intake air.

All Models 68. OPERATION. Exhaust gas energy turns the turbine wheel at varying speeds ranging from a few thousand to 125,000 rpm, depending on engine speed and load. The compressor wheel supplies air to the intake manifold (6—Fig. 56) on Models 7110, 7120 and 7130 or to the after cooler (1) on Model 7140 at or above normal atmospheric pressure. The additional air entering combustion chamber permits an increase in amount of fuel burned, and increased power output over an engine of comparable size not so equipped.

The use of engine exhaust to power the compressor increases engine flexibility, enabling it to perform with the economy of a small engine on light loads yet permitting substantial horsepower increase at full load. Horsepower loss because of altitude or atmospheric pressure changes is also largely eliminated.

Turbine shaft bearings are floating sleeve type and unit is lubricated and cooled by a flow of engine oil under pressure.

All diesel engines operate with an excess of air under light loads. In a naturally aspirated engine.

38

most of the air is used at full load and increasing amount of fuel results in a higher smoke level with little increase in power output. Turbocharging provides a variation of air delivery and a turbocharged engine operates with an excess of air up to or beyond designed capacity of engine. When more fuel is provided, the turbocharger speed and air delivery increase, resulting in additional horsepower and heat with little change in smoke level. Smoke, therefore, cannot be used as an accurate guide to safe maximum fiiel setting for a turbocharged engine. Refer to appropriate following paragraphs for R&R and overhaul procedures.

69. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the turbocharger (11—Fig.56), first raise hood and remove side panels. Disconnect air cleaner restriction sending unit wire. Disconnect air tubes, then unbolt and remove strata tube and air cleaner assembly.

Loosen clamps on aspirator tube coupling and remove the tube. Remove pyrometer from exhaust elbow (8).

Disconnect exhaust tubes, then unbolt and remove muffler assembly. Unbolt and remove air cleaner and muffler support. Disconnect oil supply and drain tubes from turbochargo", then unbolt and remove turbocharger from exhaust manifold (13).

When reinstalling, use new gasket (14) and tighten turbocharger mounting nuts to a torque of 24 ft.-lbs.

(32 N.m). Install new gasket on oil drain line (12) and

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 70

tighten bolts to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Install oil supply tube (10) and tighten securely. Complete installation by reversing removal procedure.

Turbocharger MUST be primed after installation as follows: Disconnect plug for fuel shut-off solenoid wire. Turn key switch and crank engine for approximately 30 seconds. Reconnect solenoid wire and set speed control lever to one-third speed position. Start engine and operate at 1000 rpm for about two minutes to supply normal lubrication to the turbocharger.

Then, increase engine speed to 1800 rpm until normal oil pressure indicator assures proper oil pressure.

70. OVERHAUL. With turbocharger removed as outlined in paragraph 69, place match marks across compressor housing (1—Fig. 57) and back plate (5), across back plate and center housing (15) and across center housing and turbine housing (21) for aid in correct assembly.

CAUTION: Do not rest weight of any parts on compressor wiieei or turbine wheei blades. Weight of only the turbocharger unit is enough to damage the blades.

Remove clamp (2), then lift off compressor housing (1). Straighten tabs of lock plates (23) and remove cap screws (24) with lock plates and clamp plates (22).

Lift center housing assembly from turbine housing (21). Place turbine wheel end of center housing assembly in a holding fixture to prevent turbine shaft from turning and remove nut (3).

NOTE: Use a "T" iiandle or a double universal joint socket to remove the LEFT-HAND THREAD compressor wheei nut (3).

Remove compressor wheel (4), then remove center housing assembly from turbine shaft. Remove heat

10

Fig. 56—View of turbocharger and relative components. Items 1,2 and 3 are used on Model 7140 and Items 4, 5 and 6 are used on Models 7110, 7120 and 7130.

1. After cooler 2. Hose 9. Hose 3. Air tube 10. Oil supply line 4. Air tube elbow 11. Turbocharger 5. Hose ..

12. Oil drain tube 6. Intake manifold cover ' 13. Exhaust manifold 7. Elbow support ' 14. Gasket 8. Exhaust outlet elbow ^ 15. Clamping seal

Fig. 57'-Exploded view ofHolset turbocharger assembly used on all models.

1. Compressor housing 2. Clamp 15. Center housing 3. Nut 16. Snap rings 4. Compressor wheel 17. Bearing 5. Back plate 18. Heat shield 6. Seal ring 19. Split ring seal 7. Split ring seal 20. Turbine wheel & shaft 8. Oil slinger 21. Turbine housing 9. Oil baffle 22. Clamp plate 10. Tbrx screw (3) 23. Lock plate 11. Thrust bearing 24. Cap screw 12. Thrust collar 25. Gasket 13. Snap rings 26. Cap screw 14. Bearing 27. Lock plate

39

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 71 shield (18) and split seal ring (19) from turbine shaft.

Straighten tabs of lock plates (27), remove cap screws (26) and lock plates, then remove center housing from back plate (5).

Remove oil baffle (9) and seal ring (6) from back plate. Remove oil slinger (8) from back plate and split seal ring (7)fromoil slinga". Remove Tbrx head screws (10), then remove thrust bearing (11) and thrust collar (12). Remove outer snap rings (13 and 16) from each end of center housing and using a wire hook, pull bearings (14 and 17) from center housing. Remove inner snap rings (13 and 16) from housing.

Clean all parts in a suitable carbon-softening solvent. A stiff brush and plastic or wood scraper should he used after deposits have softened. When cleaning, use extreme caution to prevent parts from being nicked, scratched or bent.

Inspect turbine housing (21) outlet opening for warping or cracking. Check compressor housing (1) and back plate (5) for wheel friction wear. Inspect turbine shaft for grooves or scratches and turbine wheel and compressor wheel for bent or cracked blades or other damage. Check heat shield (18) and oil slinger (8) for damage and center housing (15) bearing surfaces for scoring or scratches. If any of these parts are damaged, renew turbocharger as they are not serviced separately. A kit consisting of the

following parts is available for cleaning and servicing the turbocharger: nut (3), seal ring (6), split ring seals (7 and 19), Tbrx head screws (10), thrust bearing (11), snap rings (13 and 16), bearings (14 and 17), lock plates (23 and 27), cap screws (24 and 26) and gasket (25).

Lubricate all parts with clean engine oil and reassemble by reversing the disassembly procedure.

When installing snap rings (13 and 16), make sure round edge of snap rings face the bearings. When installing nut (3), use a double universal joint socket and tighten to a torque of 120 in.-lbs. (14 N»m). Other tightening torques are as follows: center housing to back plate cap screws (26), 48 in.-lbs. (6 N.m); Ibrx head screws (10), 36 in.-lbs. (5 N.m); center housing to turbine housing cap screws (24), 96 in.-lhs. (11 N.m).

With unit reassembled, use a dial indicator and check turbine shaft horizontal end play, which should be 0.0039-0.0063 inch (0.10-0.16 mm). If shaft end play exceeds 0.0063 inch (0.16 mm), thrust collar (12) and/or thrust bearing (11) is worn excessively. End play of less than 0.0039 inch (0.10 mm), indicates incomplete cleaning (carbon not all removed) or dirty assembly. Unit must be disassembled and recleaned.

Reinstall turbocharger, then prime turbocharger as outlined in paragraph 69.

AFTER COOLER Model 7140

11

Fig. 58—View of after cooler and relative parts used on Model 7140 tractors.

1. Hose 8. Hose 2. Air tube 9. Elbow connector 3. Hose 10. Retainer 4. After cooler 11. Exhaust manifold 5. Hose 12. Gasket 6. Outlet tube 13. Manifold gasket (6) 7. Inlet tube 14. Drain valve

40

71. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. 1b remove the after cooler (4—Fig. 58), drain cooling system and remove air cleaner and muffler. Open drain valve (14) and drain after cooler. Loosen clamps on hoses (1 and 3) and remove air tube (2). Loosen hose clamps and disconnect outlet and inlet tubes (6 and 7) from after cooler. Unbolt injection line bracket and support.

Unbolt and remove after cooler (4) and gasket (12).

After cooler can be air checked under water if air pressure is controlled at 18 psi (125 kPa). If air leaks are visible, renew after cooler.

Clean mounting surfaces of after cooler and cylinder head of all foreign material. Using a new gasket (12), install after cooler. Coat threads of cap screws with Loctite liquid Teflon, then install and tighten cap screws to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Follow tightening sequence shown in Fig. 59. Complete in-

BOLT TORQUE SEQUENCE

Fig. 59—Bolt torque sequence for after cooler used on Model 7140 tractors.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraphs 72-73

stallation by reversing the removal procedure. When refilling cooling system, loosen bleed valve (14) to remove air from after cooler.

AIR CLEANER SYSTEM All Models

35 psi (242 kPa). Make sure the check valve is free and operating correctly. Move or rotate the strata tube. If you hear flap valve movement, valve is free and will operate satisfactorily. If flap valve does not move, renew the strata tube assembly.

COOLING SYSTEM

72. FILTERS. All models are equipped with a dry-type air cleaner. See Fig. 60. The secondary (safety) filter should be renewed each 1000 hours of operation. DO NOT attempt to clean the secondary element.

The large primary filter element can be cleaned by directing compressed air into inside of element. Air pressure must not exceed 35 psi (242 kPa). An element cleaning solution, part No. A40910, is available.

Renew primary element after four cleanings.

Tractor is equipped with an air filter restriction switch and warning lamp on the digital instrument cluster, which will indicate when primary element needs servicing.

An aspirated strata tube acts as an air pre-cleaner.

Air is sucked from strata tube check valve, along with any dust, then through the aspirator tube to the muffler and out with exhaust gas. Remove the strata tube and blow clean with compressed air regulated at

RADIATOR Ali Models 73. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. To remove the radiator, drain cooling system and disconnect front wiring harness. Remove hood, side panels and grille.

Disconnect air intake duct. Disconnect upper and lower radiator hoses, coolant air bleed hose and coolant recovery hose. Disconnect ether starting hne from intake manifold. Remove hoses from clip on radiator, then remove air conditioning condenser and lay back

Am CUEANER COVER

PRIMARY ELEMENT

SEOONOARYELBMEKT

EXHAUST TliBE

Fig. 60—Exploded view of air cleaner system used on all models.

Fig. 61—Exploded view of typical exhaust pipe and muffler used on all models.

1. Muffler 7. Extension pipe 2. Clamp bracket 8. Lower exhaust elbow 3. Air cleaner & 9. Shield miiffler support 10. Bracket 4. TUrbocharger elbow 11. Clamp bracket 5. Elbow support 12. Exhaust ejector tube 6. Bracket 13. Muffler outlet elbow

41

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 74-75 on top of engine. Identify and disconnect oil cooler lines and remove oil cooler. Attach a hoist with lift straps to radiator support. Unbolt radiator support from front support and tilt radiator forward to clear fan as the assembly is removed. Unbolt and remove

upper air baffle and fan shroud. Unbolt and remove radiator from support.

Reinstall by reversing the removal procedure.

Make certain that all foam rubber seals and pads are correctly installed in their original positions. Tighten the five bolts securing the radiator support to the front support to a torque of 34-38 ft.-lbs. (46-52 N.m).

Refill radiator with coolant. On Model 7140, loosen bleed valve on after cooler to remove air trapped in aft;er cooler. Coolant capacity is 30 U.S. quarts (28.6 L) on Models 7110, 7120 and 7130 and 31 U.S. quarts (29.3 L) on Model 7140.

A 15 psi (103 kPa) radiator cap is used on all models. Refer to paragraph 78 for coolant recommendations.

FAN All Models

Fig. 62—View showing fan, water pump and belt tensioner and relative components. Water pump (13) and pulley (15) are available only as an assembly.

1. Fan mounting bracket 2. Fan pulley 10. Bracket bolt (2) 3. Fan 11. Bracket 4. Spacer .

12. "O" ring 5. Bolt (4) 13. Water pump 6. Viscous fan drive 14. Bolt (3) 7. Fan belt 15. Pulley 8. Tfensioner bolt 16. Bolt (4) 9. Belt tensioner 17. Nut (6)

DEGREES

Fig. 63—View showing tension check of fan belt tensioner. Refer to text.

42

74. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Ib remove the fan (3—Fig. 62), raise hood and remove right side panel. Raise belt tensioner (9) and remove fan belt (7). Remove the four bolts (5), move fan and viscous drive (6) forward and remove spacer (4) and pulley (2). Lift fan and viscous drive from tractor. Remove six nuts (17) and washers and separate fan from viscous drive. Remove four holts (16) and remove fan bracket assembly (1) if necessary.

Reinstall fan by reversing removal procedure.

Tighten fan bracket bolts (16) to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs.

(24 N.m) and fan mounting bolts (5) to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m).

BELT TENSIONER All Models 75. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the belt tensioner (9—Fig. 62), raise hood and remove right side panel. Raise belt tensioner and remove fan belt. Remove bolt (8) and lift out belt tensions:*. Remove the two bolts (10) and remove tensioner mounting bracket (11) if necessary.

Reinstall bracket and tighten bolts (10) to a torque of 18ft.-lbs.(24 N.m). Install tensioner (9) and tighten bolt (8) to a torque of 32 ft.-lbs. (43 N.m).

Before installing fan belt, refer to Fig. 63 and check belt tensioner as follows: Using a torque wrench, raise tensioner pulley about 45 degrees from perpendicular. Then lower tensioner pulley to 35 degrees from perpendicular and check torque reading. Torque reading should he 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). If torque reading is less than 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m), renew belt tensioner.

Raise tensioner and install fan belt.

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 76-79

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 WATER PUMP All Models 76. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the water pump (13—Fig. 62), raise hood and remove right side panel. Drgiin cooling system. Raise belt tensioner (9) and remove fan belt (7). Unbolt alternator lower brace, then unbolt and remove water pump assembly. Water pump (13) and pulley (15) are serviced only as an assembly.

Clean mounting surfaces, install new "O" ring (12) and reinstall water pump assembly, lighten water pump retaining bolts to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Raise belt tensioner and reinstall fan belt.

Refill cooling system.

and clean water and add one pint (0.45 L) of conditioner part No. 331-509. This will protect the system to a temperature of-34° F (-37° C). On Model 7140, open air bleed valve on after cooler. On all models, fill radiator with coolant solution. Close bleed valve on after cooler, if so equipped. Fill coolant recovery reservoir to the FULL mark with coolant solution. Install radiator cap and coolant recovery reservoir cap.

Start engine and operate until warm. Stop engine and allow coolant to cool. Check coolant level in recovery reservoir only. Add coolant to reservoir to bring level to FULL mark. Do not remove radiator cap.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

THERMOSTATS All Models 77. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove thermostats (10—Fig. 64), first remove belt tensioner and bracket as outlined in paragraph 75. Drain cooling system and remove upper radiator hose. Disconnect wiring, then unbolt and remove alternator.

Unbolt and remove alternator bracket (6) and coolant outlet tube (1). Remove coolant filter (7). Unbolt and remove thermostat housing (5). Remove thermostats.

Before installation of thermostats (10), test both thermostats for correct opening temperatures.

Thermostats should start to open at 181^ F (83° C) and be fully open at 203° F (95° C).

Use new gaskets (9 and 2) and reinstall thermostats by reversing removal procedure. Tighten thermostat housing and coolant outlet tube bolts to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. (24 N.m). Refer to paragraph 78 for coolant filter installation.

BATTERIES All Models 79. Two 12 volt, 950 CCA, Group size 31 batteries, connected in parallel, are used on all models. Electrical system is negative ground type.

COOLANT, FILTER AND CONDITIONER All Models 78. The cooling system is equipped with a filtration system designed to prolong internal engine life and to increase cooling efficiency. Coolant filter (7—Fig. 64) should be changed every 250 hours of operation.

Tb change the filter, tum shut-off valve (3) to off position. Use a filter wrench to unscrew filter. Lubricate the gasket on new filter and tum filter on adapter (8) until gasket makes contact. Tighten the filter an additional one-half to three-quarter tum. Do not over tighten. Open shut-off valve.

The manvifacturer recommends that engine coolant be changed every 2000 hours or at least every two years. Any time cooling system is drained, refill system as follows: Use a 50:50 mixture of ethylene glycol

Fig. 64—View of thermostat, thermostat housing, cool' ant filter and relative components.

1. Coolant outlet tube 7. Coolant filter 2. Gasket 8. Filter adapter 3. Shut-off valve ; 9. Gasket 4. "O"ring 10. Thermostat (2) 5. Thermostat housing 11. Air vent check valve 6. Altemator mounting bracket 12. Hose connector

43

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 80-85 Before any electrical system service is performed, a thorough check of battery condition, condition of cable connections and condition and tightness of alternator drive belt should be made.

Batteries should be checked for total voltage and voltage drop under rated load. If battery voltage is excessively low, they should be recharged to rated level using an external battery charga*. Failure to do so can cause alternator to overheat, resulting in premature failure of altemator, regulator or both.

All relative connections should be checked for excessive resistance, using an ohmmeter.

80. BATTERY CURRENT DRAIN TEST. If after checking, servicing and installing batteries, they return to an undercharged condition when tractor is not in use, current drain should be suspected. Tb check, disconnect negative battery cables at chassis ground and connect an ammeter lead to chassis ground and the other lead to negative cable ends. Make sure all electrical systems are off. Any reading on ammeter indicates current leakage. Check for lights, radio or accessories being on, or shorted electrical wiring or components.

CHARGING SYSTEM All Models 81. TESTING. Prior to beginning test, be sure batteries are fully charged, all connections are clean and tight and altemator drive belt is in good condition and under correct tension.

CAUTION: Do not disconnect any wires from aiternator whiie engine is running as damage to alternator may result.

Alternator warning light should not come on when key switch is in OFF position. If hght fails to go out when key is in OFF position, test circuits as outlined in paragraph 82.

Normal operation of altemator warning light is to come on only when key switch is in ACC or ON position, engine NOT running. If engine is started while throttle is in low idle position, light may stay on until engine speed is increased for the first time.

Light should not come on at any time after engine is running and initial engine speed increase was sufficient to shut light off. If operation of warning light is not normal, test circuits as outlined in paragraph 82.

82. WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT TEST. If warning light fails to go out with key switch in OFF position, disconnect wire from B+ terminal on alternator. If light goes out when B+ wire is disconnected, rectifier bridge in alternator is defective and must be renewed.

44

CASE/INTERNATIONAL If light stays on after disconnecting wire firom B+ terminal on alternator, there is an electrical short between wires at some place in wiring harness. Check wire insulation for damage.

If the light fails to come on with the key switch in ACC or ON position, engine NOT running, check for a break in the circuit to the instrument cluster or an open circuit in the regulator or altemator. Check for the problem as follows: Tfest the voltage at key switch.

If voltage is not approximately 12 volts, check for continuityfi:'omB+ terminal on altemator to the key switch. If this circuit is good, check batteries. If voltage at key switch is 12 volts, connect a 12 volt test light between D+ terminal on altemator and the key switch. If the test light comes on, the circuit between the indicator and the key switch or the circuit between the D+ terminal and the indicator is open.

Check connections and wiring. If test light fails to come on, there is an open circuit in the altemator or voltage regulator.

If warning light functions normally with engine not running but fails to go OFF when engine is running at various speeds, check altemator as outlined in paragraphs 83 and 84.

83. ALTERNATOR VOLTAGE OUTPUT TEST. Check to see that all accessories are turned OFF. With engine operating at rated speed (2200 rpm), connect the positive lead ofa voltmeter to the positive stud to the battery and the negative lead to the negative jump start terminal to the battery. If voltmeter reading is in excess of 15 volts, disassemble altemator and check voltage regulator and other components.

84. ALTERNATOR AMPERAGE OUTPUT TEST. Connect an ammeter in the circuit at the B+ terminal on the alternator. See Fig. 65. Connect a battery load tester CAS-10147 or equivalent, across battery terminals. Tum light switch to ROAD position. With engine operating at rated speed (2200 rpm), adjust battery load tester for maximum current output. If reading on ammeter is between 110 and 130 amperes and alternator warning light is still ON, disassemble altemator and test the rectifier bridge.

ALTERNATOR All Models 85. Robert Bosch 110 ampere alternator is used on all models. Altemator is equipped with a solid state regulator and has no provisions for adjustment.

Rated output is 14 volts at 110 amperes.

CAUTiON: Because certain components of the aiternator can be damaged by procedures that wiil

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 86

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 not affect a D.C. generator, the foiiowing precautions MUST be observed: a. Before working on the eiectricai system, disconnect the battery cables. b. When instailing batteries, negative post of batteries must be grounded. c. When using an auxiiiary battery for starting, connect negative to negative and positive to positive. Use the auxiiiary battery connectors provided on tractor. d. When charging batteries on tractor, use the auxiliary battery connections on tractor. Do not attach directiy to battery terminais. e. Never operate tractor when battery cabies are disconnected. f. if necessary to weid on tractor, disconnect battery cabies and instrument cluster. Connect weider ground cabie as close as possibie to weid area.

86. DISASSEMBLY AND TESTING. Tb disassemble the removed altemator, use special tool CAS1375 as shown in Fig. 66 and remove pulley nut (1—Fig. 67) and washer (2). Remove pulley (3) and

BATTERY LOAD TESTER

fan (4). Remove the voltage regulator and brush holder (15) with springs (16) and brushes (17). Remove capacitor (14). Place alignment marks across front and rear housings (6 and 13) for aid in correct reassembly. Remove the four through bolts and separate front housing and rotor assembly from rear housing and stator assembly. Place alignment mark on stator in register with alignment mark on rear housing. Remove the four screws securing retainer plate (8) to front housing (6), then separate rotor assembly from front housing. Using a suitable puller, remove rear bearing (10) from rotor, then press retainer plate (8), front bearing (7) and spacer (5)firomfront of rotor (9).

Check the rotor for damage. Inspect slip rings for wear or deep grooves. Slip rings C£in be cleaned up using fine (400 grit) sandpaper. Touch one ohmmeter lead to the rotor frame and the other lead to a slip ring as shown in Fig. 68. Then, repeat the test on the other slip ring. There must be no continuity between either slip ring and rotor frame. A reading near zero will indicate a short circuit to ground. Touch ohmmeter leads to each slip ring as shown in Fig. 69. Ohmmeter reading should be 2.6-2.9 ohms. A higher reading will indicate an open circuit and a lower reading will indicate an internal short. If rotor fails to meet any test, renew rotor.

Measure the length of brushes protruding from the brush holder. Renew brushes if the measurement is 0.270 inch (7.0 mm) or less. New brushes will protrude 0.550 inch (14.0 mm). Brushes must work freely in holder.

Unbolt rectifier bridge from rear housing, then remove rectifier bridge (12) and stator (11). Pay par-

TO INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

RETAINING NUT AND WASHER NOTE: USE HEAVY GAUGE WIRE FOR ALL CONNECTIONS

AMMETER

Fig. 65—Connect ammeter and battery load tester as shown when checking amperage output of alternator.

g. 66—Use special tool CAS'1375 to remove alternator pulley nut.

45

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 87

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

ticular attention when removing insulators from B+ and D+ terminals for aid in reassembly. Unsolder stator leads from the connections on rectifier bridge.

Tb test the positive diodes in the rectifier bridge, proceed as follows: The positive diodes are the seven

4

-15 Fig. 67—Exploded view of Robert Bosch alternator used on all models.

1- Nut 10. Rear bearing 2. Washer 11. Stator 3. Pulley 12. Rectifier 4. Fan 13. Rear housing 5. Spacer 14. Capacitor 6. Front housing 15. Brush holder & 7. Front bearing voltage regulator 8. Plate 16. Brush spring (2) 9. Rotor 17. Brush (2)

diodes closest to the B+ terminal. Connect the negative lead of the ohmmeter to the B+ terminal. Connect the positive lead of the ohmmeter to one of the leads to the positive diodes and record the reading. Reverse the ohmmeter leads and check the ohmmeter reading.

There should be one high reading and one low reading. If both readings are the same, renew rectifier bridge. Check the other six positive diodes in the same manner. To test the negative diodes, proceed as follows: The negative diodes are the seven diodes on the side of the rectifier bridge opposite the B+ terminal. Connect the negative ohmmeter lead to the unpainted surface of the diode plate. Connect the positive lead of the ohmmeter to one of the leads to the negative diodes and record the reading. Reverse the ohmmeter leads and check the ohmmeter reading.

There must be a high reading and a low reading. If both readings are the same, renew rectifier bridge.

Repeat the test for the other six negative diodes.

Measure the resistance of the stator windings by connecting ohmmeter leads to stator leads. The resistance in each coil should be 0.053-0.058 ohms. If not, renew the stator. Tb check the stator for a short circuit, connect one lead of ohmmeter to the stator frame and the other lead to each of the four stator leads. If the ohmmeter moves, there is a short circuit in the stator and stator must be renewed.

Tb test the voltage regulator, use voltage regulator tester CAS-10851 shown in Fig. 70. Connect the red positive lead of tester to the D-n brush, the yellow field lead to the DF brush and the black ground lead to the D- terminal. See Fig. 71. Depress test switch to the upper position. The green light must come on. Observe the voltage reading for 20 to 30 seconds. The voltage must he in the regulated range of 13.7 to 14.5 volts. If not, renew the voltage regulator.

87. REASSEMBLY. Reassemble the alternator by reversing the disassembly procedure, keeping the following points in mind. Use rosin core solder when attaching stator leads to connections on rectifier bridge. It is recommended that bearings~(7 and 10—

SUP RINGS

Fig. 68—Using an ohmmeter, check for ground be* tween slip rings and rotor frame.

46

Fig. 69—Ohmmeter reading between slip rings should be 2.6-2.9 ohms.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Fig. 67) be renewed any time they have been removed.

Install three 0.008 inch (0.2 mm) feeler gages between rotor and stator to center the rotor, then tighten the four through bolts evenly to a torque of 3-4 fl.-lbs. (4-5 N.m). Remove the feeler gages. When installing the brush holder and voltage regulator, make certain that the spring on rectifier bridge is in contact with brush holder and voltage regulator.

Tighten pulley nut to a torque of 44-52 ft.-lbs. (60-70 N.m). .,,-

Paragraphs 88-89 holder and field frame (22) for aid in reassembly.

Remove brush holder and washer (28).

Place alignment mark across drive housing (7), center housing (17) and field frame (22). Unbolt and remove drive housing (7) and seal ring (8). Remove bolts (15) securing center housing (17) to field frame (22), then remove center housing with drive clutch (14) and armature (27) from field frame assembly.

Remove "O" ring (21) and remove pivot pin (16). Drive collar (10) on armature shaft, then remove snap ring (9) and the collar. Slide drive clutch (14), shift lever

STARTING MOTOR All Models

'

88. All models are equipped with a Nippondenso starting motor #128000-5330. Starting motor is actuated by a Nippondenso magnetic switch (solenoid).

89. DISASSEMBLY AND TESTING. Tb disassemble the starting motor, first remove terminal cover (4—Fig. 72), then unbolt and remove terminal connector (24), lead wire (3) and magnetic switch (2).

Remove end cover (34) and "O" ring (33). Remove the four brush screws, pull upward on brush springs (29) and remove brushes from brush holder (31). Remove brush springs and place match marks across brush

31

Fig. 70—Test voltage regulator using voltage regulator tester CAS-10851.

BRUSH HOLDER AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

Fig. 71—View showing location of D+ brush, DF brush and D- terminal.

32

Fig. 72—Exploded view of the Nippondenso starting motor used on all models.

1. Boot 2. Magnetic switch 3. Switch lead wire 4. Terminal cover 5. Drive housing bolt (6) 6. Needle bearing 7. Drive housing 8. Seal ring 9. Snap ring 10. Collar 11. Shift lever 12. Pad (2) 13. Bolt (2) 14. Drive clutch 15. Bolt (4) 16. Pivot pin 17. Center housing 18. Center bushing

19. Oil seal 20. Washer 21. "O"ring 22. Field frame 23. Field terminal 24. Connector 25. Field coils 26. Pole shoe (4) 27. Armature 28. Washer 29. Brush spring (4) 30. Brush (4) 31. Brush holder 32. Needle bearing 33. "O"ring 34. End frame 35. Bolt (2) 36. Nut (2)

47

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 90-92

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

(11) with pads (12), center housing (17) and washer (20) from armature (27).

Using an ohmmeter, touch one probe to the field terminal stud (23) and the other prohe to the brush lead on field coils. If there is no continuity, field winding has an open and must he repaired or renewed. Touch one ohmmeter probe to field terminal stud and the other probe to the surface of field frame.

If there is continuity, the field coils have a ground and must be repaired or renewed Tbuch one probe of the ohmmeter to a commutator segment and the other probe to the armature core. If there is continuity, armature has a ground and must he renewed. Tbuch the two ohmmeter prohes to two commutator segments. If there is no continuity, armature winding has an open circuit and must be renewed. Commutator can be cleaned up using fine (No. 400 grit) sandpaper. Measure the diameter of the TEST SWITCH

commutator. If commutator is worn to a diameter of less than 1.81 inches (46 mm), renew the armature.

Inspect needle bearings (6 and 32) for damage or roughness. Needle bearing (6) is available only in new drive housing (7). Needle bearing (32) is available only in new end housing (34). Measure inside diameter of bushing (18) and outside diameter of corresponding surface on armature. If clearance is more than 0.013 inch (0.33 mm), renew center housing.

Bushing (18) and oil seal (19) are available only in new center housing (17).

Measure length of brushes (30) and renew if worn to a length of less than 0.5 inch (13.0 mm).

Inspect drive clutch (14) to make certain that the pinion can rotate freely in direction of starter rotation and that it will lock up in opposite direction.

90. REASSEMBLY. Using Fig. 72 as a guide, reassemble starting motor by reversing disassembly procedure. Tightening torques are as follows: Drive housing bolts (5) 18-22 ft.-lbs.

(25-30 N.m) Center housing to field frame bolts (15) 11-15 ft.-lbs.

(15-20 N.m) Magnetic switch bolts (13) 6-9 ft.-lbs.

(8-12 N.m) End frame bolts (35) & nuts (36) 6-9 ft.-lbs.

(8-12 N.m) Magnetic switch nuts 18-25 ft.-lbs.

(25-34 N.m) Field terminal nut 12-16 ft.-lbs.

(17-22 N.m) Brush lead screws 2-4 ft.-lbs.

(3-5 N.m)

SWITCH

BATTERY

Fig. 73—View showing connections when testing startIng motor magnetic switch.

MULTIMETER

All Models 91. TESTING. Tb test the magnetic switch for proper operation, connect a 12 volt battery as shown in Fig. 73. Remove terminal connector (24—Fig. 72) between field terminal stud and magnetic switch.

When test switch (Fig. 73) is closed, the drive clutch and pinion must move outward. When test switch is opened, drive clutch and pinion must move inward. If operation is incorrect, disconnect battery and wires.

With terminal connector removed, connect a multimeter as shown in Fig. 74 and test for continuity. If there is no continuity, renew magnetic switch.

WIRING GROUND

All models Fig. 74—Use a multimeter as shown to check for continuity.

48

92. When a problem is suspected in wiring harness, follow an orderly, step by step check of the problem

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 circuit. Always check protective circuits (fuses and circuit breakers) first, then locate the primary point of current supply for circuit in question. Using a 12 volt test light or a voltmeter, check for adequate voltage at this point. If voltage is present at this point, continue to check for voltage at appropriate connections along harness working toward malfunctioning unit until problem area is isolated. Harness connectors (plugs), sockets and connection terminals being corroded, loose or broken are most often the cause for interruptions in power supply.

If voltage was not present at primary point of power supply, check wiring moving toward battery until the interruption of current is isolated. Repair as necessary.

NOTE: Aitiiough most circuits are coior coded, sometimes severai circuits may have the same coior. However, each circuit is identified by circuit number stamped on the wires.

PROTECTIVE CIRCUITS All Models 93. FUSES. Fuses are installed in circuits to protect wiring from damage in event of shorted wiring.

When fuse is blown (fuse strip melted), a fuse of the same size and amperage must be installed after locating and repairing the problem. Fuses and circuit breakers are accessible after removing the cover panel at the front of the side console.

94. CIRCUIT BREAKERS. Circuit breakers perform the same function as fuses. However, a circuit breaker will cut off current fiow, then cool down and reset automatically, re-establishing current flow.

Paragraphs 93-97 Usually used in lighting, cab wiring and gage circuits, it eliminates complete failure allowing limited use of systems considered necessary for safe operation.

Circtoit breakers will be in line with red wire connected to positive cable connection. Under normal operation with voltage at BAT connection of circuit breaker, voltage should pass through breaker to remaining terminal.

ACCESSORY SYSTEMS All Models Accessory systems include lights, digital instrument cluster warning systems, windshield wiper, cab ventilating, heating and air conditioning system.

95. LIGHTS. Front and rear work lights and warning lights are standard equipment. However, additional front and rear work lights are available.

Single light failure is usually a bad light bulb, poor ground or bad current connection. Multiple light failure is usually caused by a bad switch or power source wiring problems. Check fuses and circuit breakers, then check wiring as outlined in paragraph 92.

96. DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER WARNING SYSTEMS. Gage and warning systems consist of three basic components: LCD (liquid crystal diode) bar graph indicators or LED (light emitting diode) warning lights, sending units or activating switches and necessary wiring to connect all components.

97. SYSTEMS NORMAL LIGHT. The Systems Normal indicator (4—Fig. 75) is a green LED (light emitting diode). It works in conjunction with most of

Fig. 75—View showing location of some LED warning lights of Instrument cluster. Refer also to Fig. 76.

1. Air filter service 3. Coolant level 5. Transmission lube oil pressure 2. Engine oil pressure 4. Green systems normal 6. Altemator indicator

49

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 98-99 the instrument cluster LEDs and LCDs. The Systems Normal green light is usually ON. When it is ON, it indicates that the critical tractor systems are functioning properly and conditions are safe to operate the tractor.

When a critical condition exists, a red LED warning light comes on or an LCD bar graph indicator fiashes.

As soon as the critical condition warning appears, the green Systems Normal light goes OFF. TTie critical condition LEDs and LCDs are the following: a. Engine oil pressure LED b. Coolant level LED c. Transmission Iub6 oil pressure LED d. Alternator indicator LED e. Transmission oil temperature LED f. Transmission system pressure LED g. Coolant temperature LCD h. System voltage LCD i. Exhaust temperature LCD The green Systems Normal light will remain ON when the following less critical system warning appears. a. Air filter service LED b. Hydraulic filter service LED c. Fuel level LCD 98. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE LIGHT Normal operation of engine oil pressure warning light (2—Fig. 75) is to light when key switch is in ON position, engine not running and to go out when engine is running and adequate oil pressure is reached.

There are two pressure switches that monitor the engine oil pressure. One switch monitors the oil pressure at low idle speed and the other switch monitors the pressure at rated speed (2200 rpm) or above.

When engine oil pressure is lower than 6 psi (41.4 kPa) at idle speed (825-875 rpm), low rpm pressure switch closes and sends a ground signal to pin 29 on instrument cluster. This causes the following results: 1. The engine oil service monitor (LED) comes ON. 2. The alarm sounds ON and OFF. 3. The green Systems Normal light goes OFF. 4. Stop engine indicator will go ON and OFF. 5. Thirty seconds after the stop engine indicator goes ON, automatic shutdown is activated and engine will stop.

If engine oil pressure is lower than 20 psi (138 kPa) at engine speed of 2200 rpm or above, the high rpm pressure switch will close and send a ground signal to pin 24 on instrument cluster. Aground signal at pin 24 will cause the same five results as listed for the low rpm switch.

If oil pressure is low and engine speed is less than 2200 rpm, high rpm pressure switch will close sending a ground signal to pin 24. However, because engine rpm is less than 2200, ground signal to pin 24 will not cause the five previously listed results.

50

CASE/INTERNATIONAL If engine oil pressure monitor (warning light) comes ON when engine is running, check low rpm pressure switch as follows: Tum key OFF and stop engine. Disconnect yellow wire #255 from low rpm switch. Make sure wire does not touch any ground on tractor. Tum key switch ON £ind check the oil pressure warning light, which should be OFF. If light is ON, check for grounded circuit between wire #255 and pin 29. If light is OFF, wiring is good and pressure to the low rpm switch should be checked. The low rpm switch is normally closed and switch opening and closing pressures are as follows: Low rpm pressure switch opens at 10 psi 68.9 kPa) in increasing pressure and closes at 6 psi (41.4 kPa) on decreasing pressure.

Tb check pressure to the low rpm switch, remove the switch and install a 0-60 psi (0-414 kPa) test gage.

Start tractor and operate at 825-875 rpm, then check gage pressure. If there is enough engine oil pressure, 10 psi (68.9 kPa), to open the low pressure switch, renew the switch and connect wire #255. Check to make certain that oil pressure warning light is OFF at low idle speed.

After renewing low rpm switch, start engine and operate at 2200 rpm or above. If warning light is ON, disconnect yellow wire #256 from high rpm oil pressure switch. Make sure wire #256 does not touch any ground on tractor. Warning light should not be OFF If light is ON, check for grounded circuits between wire #256 and pin 24 of instrument cluster. If light is OFF, wiring is good and pressure to the high rpm pressure switch should be checked. Stop engine, remove high rpm switch and install the 0-60 psi (0-414 kPa) test gage. Start engine and operate at 2200 rpm or above and check test gage reading. High rpm pressure switch opens at 25 psi (172 kPa) on increasing pressure and closes at 20 psi (138 kPa) on decreasing pressure. If test gage reads 25 psi (172 kPa) or higher, renew high rpm pressure switch.

After renewing high rpm pressure switch, connect wire #256 £ind operate engine at 2200 rpm or above.

Check to make sure warning light is OFF. If not, renew instnmient cluster.

The tractor is equipped with an automatic shutdown system. If engine is being started in cold temperature of 32° F (0° C) or colder, automatic shutdown may occur after 30 seconds due to low engine oil pressure. Tb prevent shutdown, depress the automatic shutdown override switch located on right side of the steering console.

99. AIR FILTER LIGHT. A vacuum switch monitors the condition of the air filter system. The air restriction switch is located on the right rear of the air cleaner housing. When air filters need servicing during operation, the vacuum switch closes sending a ground signal to pin 17 on the instrument cluster.

This ground signal causes air filter warning (yellow

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraphs 100-104

LED) light (1—Fig. 75) to come ON and a three second alarm sounds. The green Systems Normal light will stay ON.

system, the red warning light will come ON and the green Systems Normal light will go OFF. Refer to paragraphs 81 and 82 for tests.

NOTE: If air filter service light comes ON during the work day, you can service the air fiiter elements after the day's work is compieted. Faiiure to service the air fiiter eiements within the next 24 hours of operation can cause tractor to graduaily iose power and possibly cause damage to engine components.

102. TRANSMISSION LUBE OIL PRESSURE. Transmission lube oil pressure is regulated at 15-35 psi (103-241 kPa) by the cold oil relief valve in the hydraulic filter base. Lube oil pressure is monitored by a pressure switch located at top reair of rear main frame. If at any time during tractor operation, transmission lube oil pressure is too low, the following will occur: The red LED warning light (5—Fig. 75) will flash ON and OFF. The alarm will sound for three seconds. The green LED Systems Normal light will go OFF. Stop the engine, then locate and correct the problem.

With engine stopped, connect ohmmeter leads to pin 21 and pin 9 at instrument cluster. Ohmmeter should show continuity. If no continuity is shown, it would indicate a defective transmission lube pressure switch or an open in the wiring. Disconnect the wiring plug at the pressure switch. Connect ohmmeter across switch leads. If continuity is now shown, switch is good and wiring is faulty. If no continuity is shown, switch is defective and must be renewed.

Check air filter elements and renew as necessary.

Start engine and observe warning light. If light stays ON with engine operating, stop engine and disconnect yellow wire #266 from the vacuum switch. Start engine and make certain the wire #266 does not touch any ground on tractor. Warning light should be OFF. If not, check yellow wire #266 from vacuum switch to pin 17 on instrument cluster for shorts or grounds.

Repair as necessary. If warning light is OFF, wire is good.

Ground the end of vacuum switch yellow wire #266 and if light comes ON, renew the vacuum switch.

100. COOLANT LEVEL LIGHT. A coolant probe monitors the coolant level. The probe is mounted through the rear wall of the radiator upper tank.

When end of probe is immersed in coolant, the coolant completes a circuit path to ground and red LED light (3—Fig. 75) will be OIF. When coolant level is down to an unsafe level and probe tip is out of coolant, there is no current path to ground. The circuit is open and the resistance becomes very high (about 30K ohms).

After a few seconds, the red coolant level warning light will come ON, a three-second alarm will sound and the green Systems Normal light (4) will go OFF. Check coolant level in radiator amd add coolant to proper level. If light stays ON, with key switch ON and coolant level correct, check for excessive moisture at connections. Dry as necessary and reconnect the connectors.

With key switch OFF, use an ohmmeter and check resistance between harness pin 22 and ground. With probe in coolant, resistance should be about lOK ohms. If resistance is very high (more than 20K ohms) or very low (less than 5K ohms), coolant probe is defective and must be renewed.

For a final test, disconnect yellow level probe circuit wire #231 and tum key switch ON. When end of wire #231 is not touching a ground, the red LED warning light must be ON. When end of wire #231 is touching ground on tractor, light should be OFF. 101, ALTERNATOR LIGHT. Normal operation of the red LED alternator warning light (6—Fig. 75) is with key switch ON and engine not running, light should be ON. With engine operating, light should be OFF. At any time during engine operation, the alternator does not supply enough power for the electrical

103. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE. If during tractor operation, the transmission oil becomes too hot, the following will occur: 1. The red LED warning light (8—Fig. 76) will come ON and stay ON. 2. The alarm will sound ON and OFF. 3. The green Systems Normal light will go OFF. 4. The stop engine indicator will go ON and OFF. 5. The automatic engine shutdown will be activated 30 seconds after the stop engine indicator goes ON, and engine will shut down.

The transmission oil temperature sender is located in the hydraulic filter head. The temperature sender is a resistor-t5^e switch activated by a probe immersed in the transmission oil. Ib check the temperature sender, connect one lead of em ohmmeter to pin 15 at the instrument cluster and other lead to ground.

Ohmmeter reading should be 50-30K ohms. If not, temperature sender is defective or yellow wire #239 is faulty.

Disconnect yellow wire #239 from temperature sender and make certsdn end of wire does not touch any ground on tractor. Depress automatic shutdown b3^ass switch and start engine. Transmission oil temperature light should now be OFF. If not, yellow wire #239 is grounded. Repair as necessary. If light goes OFF with wire removed from sender, momentarily touch end of wire to a ground. If light comes ON, stop engine and renew temperature sender switch.

104. TRANSMISSION SYSTEM PRESSURE. If at any time during tractor operation, the transmission

51

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 105-106 system pressure is not within normal operating range, the following will occur: 1. The red LED warning light (9—Fig. 76) will come ON and stay ON. 2. The alarm will sound ON and OFF. 3. The green Systems Normal light will go OFF. 4. The stop engine indicator will go ON and OFF. 5. The automatic engine shutdown will be activated 30 seconds after the stop engine indicator goes ON, and engine will shut down.

The normally closed transmission system oil pressure switch is located in upper front portion of the speed transmission control housing. With engine stopped, connect ohmmeter leads to pin 30 and pin 9 at instrument cluster. Ohmmeter should show continuity. If no continuity is shown, it would indicate a defective transmission system oil pressure switch or an open in yellow wire #265. Disconnect wiring plug at the system pressure switch. Connect ohmmeter leads to the switch leads. If continuity is now shown, switch is good and wiring is faulty. If no continuity is shown, switch is defective and must be renewed.

105. HYDRAULIC (TRANSMISSION) FILTER LIGHT. When the hydraulic filter needs service during operation of tractor, the following will occur: 1. The yellow LED warning light (10—Fig. 76) will come ON and stay ON. 2. The alarm will sound for three seconds.

3. The green Systems Normal light will stay ON. NOTE: If the hydraulic filter light is flashing ON and OFF, change the filter within four hours of operation. If the light stays ON, change the filter as soon as possible.

With new hydraulic filter installed, start engine and observe hydraulic filter warning light. If light stays ON, disconnect yellow wire #267 at hydraulic

CASE/INTERNATIONAL filter switch located in filter housing. If light now goes OFF, wire is good and the filter switch is defective and should be renewed. If light does not go OFF, check for short or ground in yellow wire #267. Repair as necessary.

106. COOLANT TEMPERATURE BAR GRAPH. The coolant temperature LCD monitor (1—Fig. 77) is a 12-segment bar graph. A thermistor is the sensor for the coolant temperature. As the coolant temperature increases, thermistor resistance decreases and the number of energized segments on bar graph increases. See Fig. 78. When coolant temperature reaches about 230'' F (110° C), the following will occur: 1. Indicator bars 1 through 11 will flash ON and OFF 2. The alarm will sound for three seconds.

3. Green SyTstems Normal light will go OFF. If coolant temperature increases to about 240° F (115° C), the following will occur: 1. All 12 bar graph segments will fiash ON and OFF. 2. The alarm will sound ON and OFF. 3. Green Systems Normal light will stay OFF. 4. The stop engine indicator will go ON and OFF. 5. The automatic shutdown will be activated 30 seconds after the stop engine indicator goes ON, and engine will shut down.

If bar graph segments 1 through 11 flash ON and OFF (indicating too high coolant temperature) and radiator coolant level is good, check thermistor and wiring as follows: Disconnect the yellow wire #235 from the thermistor and turn key switch ON. Check coolant temperature bar graph. None ofthe segments should be flashing. If any of the segments are flashing, check the yellow wire #235 fi-om pin 13 at the instrument cluster to the thermistor. If one segment on bar graph fiashes ON and OFF, thermistor wire

Ffg. 76—View showing iocation of some LED warning iights of instrument duster. Refer aiso to fig. 75.

7. Stop engine indicator

52

8. Transmission oil temperature

9. Transmission system oil pressure

10. Hydraulic filter service

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 has an open. If all the segments fiash ON and OFF, thermistor wire is grounded. Repair as necessary. If none ofthe segments are fiashing, wiring is good and thermistor should be checked. For an accurate check, this test should be done right after warning appears.

With thermistor yellow wire #235 connected and key switch in OFF position, use an ohmmeter to check the resistance between connector pin 13 and to ground.

Check the chart in Fig. 78 for the amount of resistance this test should indicate. For example, if segments 1 to 11 were fiashing, the resistance should read about 133 ohms. If resistance reading is not approximately what it should be, as indicated on the chart, renew the thermistor.

107. FUEL LEVEL BAR GRAPH. The fioat mechanism, which is a variable resistor, is the sensor for the fuel level bar graph (2—Fig. 77). Fuel level is indicated by the number of bars showing on the bar graph in relation to the ball symbols as follows: A. No indicator bars showing at the all-black ball.

Tank is empty.

B. Six indicator bars showing at the one-half black ball. Fuel tank is half full.

C. Twelve indicator bars showing at the all-white ball. Fuel tank is full.

When fuel level is low, the following will occur: 1. First bar will fiash ON and OFF. 2. Bars 2 through 12 will also fiash ON and OFF, but out of phase with first bar.

3. Alarm will sound for three seconds.

If the readings on the bar graph are not accurate, the fioat mechanism and wiring should be checked. If bar graph indicates a full tank, ground the fioat mechanism input terminal. Tum key switch ON and check bar graph reading. If it does not read empty, the wiring from input terminal to pin 12 should be checked for a loose connection or a broken wire. If it

Paragraphs 107-108 does read empty, wiring is good and fioat mechanism should be checked.

If the fuel level on bar graph indicated an empty tank, disconnect wire from fioat input terminal and make certain the wire does not touch any ground.

Tum key switch ON and check bar graph reading. It should read full. If not, wiring from input terminal to pin 12 should be checked for shorts or grounds. If it does read full, wiring is good gind fioat mechanism should be checked.

Remove the fioat mechanism from the fuel tank.

Check the assembly for damage and renew as necessary. Connect an ohmmeter between input terminal and ground terminal on main tank fioat or the input terminal and output terminal on the auxiliary tank fioat. The resistance readings should change as the fioat arm is raised as follows: Main fuel tank sender (tractors without auxiliary tank): Full tank 88.5-96.0 ohms Half-full tank 42.0-48.0 ohms Empty tank 0.0- 1.5 ohms Main fuel tank sender (tractors with auxiliary tank): i Full tank .67.0-73.0 ohms Half-full tank 20.0-26.0 ohms Empty tank 0.0-1.5 ohms Auxiliary tank sender: Full tank 21.0-25.0 ohms Empty tank 0.0- 1.5 ohms If resistance does not vary as fioat arm is moved, renew fioat mechanism. If wiring and fioat mechanism test good, renew instrument cluster.

108. SYSTEM VOLTAGE LEVEL BAR GRAPH. Voltage level is indicated by the number of energized segments on the bar graph display (3—Fig. 77).

Fig. 77-'View stiowing iocation of LCD bar graph dispiays on instrument duster.

1. Coolant temperature

2. Fuel level

3. System voltage

4. Exhaust temperature

53

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 109-111 If battery voltage level is too low, the bar graph will display one bar segment (11.7 volts) and the green Systems Normal light will go OFF. If battery voltage level is too high, the bar graph will display 12 bar segments (15.0 volts) and the following will occur: 1. All 12 bars will fiash ON and OFF 2. The alarm will sound for three seconds.

3. The green Systems Normal light will go OFF. Battery voltage level should be in the regulated range of 13.7 to 14.5 volts. Refer to paragraphs 83 and 86 to test voltage regulator.

109. EXHAUST TEMPERATURE BAR GRAPH. The sensor device that measures the exhaust temperature is a pyrometer that is screwed into the turbocharger exhaust elbow. The sensor is a voltage generating device. When the temperature increases, the pyrometer generated voltage increases. Because the terminals on the pyrometer are connected to pins 1 and 2, any change in voltage between the pins will cause different segments of exhaust temperature bar graph (4—Fig. 77) to energize.

If exhaust temperature heats to 1250° F (677° C), the pyrometer generates about 28.2 millivolts. See Fig. 79. When 28.2 millivolts is sensed between pins 1 and 2, bar segments 1 through 11 will fiash ON and OFF, a three-second alarm will sound and the green Systems Normal light will go OFF. If temperature climbs to 1350° F (732° C), about 30.5 millivolts are generated by the pyrometer and all 12 bar segments fiash ON and OFF. If exhaust temperature bar graph segments 1 to 12 are fiashing (indicating hot) and engine is cold, the pyrometer should be checked. Check the voltage between the wires at the pyrometer with engine runTHERMISTOR TEMPERATURE

TF)

APPROXIMATE THERMISTOR RESISTANCE

ENERGIZED SEGMENTS ON BAR GRAPH

110. DIGITAL DISPLAYS. The instrument cluster displays are LCD (liquid crystal diodes) that display the operator's selections and contains several message legends to indicate the selections.

After programming the cluster, the operator can depress a function button and the desired information will be shown on upper or lower digital display.

Engine rpm and standard ground speed function buttons (Fig. 80) depend upon sensors for their operation.

All other function buttons work strictly through calculations of a microprocessor chip located in the cluster box.

The function buttons are: Engine rpm, Pto rpm.

Area/hour, Total area and Ground speed are located as shown in Fig. 80. Program buttons are: Equipment width. Calibrate, Calibrate slip. Start, Stop and Reset.

Refer to the appropriate following paragraphs for information on operation, tests and programming.

111. ENGINE RPM FUNCTION. A magnetic sensor located in the hydraulic pump drive housing is used to monitor engine rpm. The sensor is positioned so that it almost touches the hydraulic pump drive gear. The sensor generates a magnetic field. As the gear rotates, the gear teeth cut through this magnetic field. The sensor puts out one pulse signal for each gear tooth that cuts through the magnetic field. As the gear rotates more quickfy, the pulse frequency increases.

TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE VOLTAGE C"F)

BAR GRAPH ENERGIZED SEGMENTS

240° F

113 ohms

12

230^ F

133 ohms

11

1350"

30. 5 millivolts

12

223°F

149 ohms

10

1250°

28.2 millivolts

11

25.8 millivolts

10

216°F

165 ohms

9

1150*"

209° F

187 ohms

8

1046°

23.3 mllllyolts

9

203°F

206 ohms

7

943°

20.9 millivolts

8 7

196°F

234 ohms

6

839°

18.4 millivolts

265 ohms

5

736"

16.0 millivoU»

6

13.6 miUivolts

5

183*'F

296 ohms

4

632°

175°F

342 ohms

3

529°

11.3 millivolts

4

668 ohms

2

425°

8.9 millivolts

3

1635 ohms

1

313°

6.4 millivolts

2

200°

3.8 millivolts

1

140*'F

Fig. 78—Chart showing thermistor temperature and resistance and energized segments on cooiant temperature bar graph. Refer to text.

54

ning. Observe the voltmeter reading and check the bar graph for number of energized segments. Compare with chart in Fig. 79. If readings are not within specifications, renew the pyrometer. If readings are within specifications, renew instrument cluster.

Fig. 79—Chart showing exhaust temperature, pyrometer voitage and energized segments on bar graph.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraphs 112-113

The two wire leads (yellow #216 and black #216) from the magnetic sensor connect to pins 7 and 10 of the cluster connector. As the pulse signals change, the varying signals are sent to the cluster. When Engine rpm button is depressed, the engine rpm will appear on the upper digital display and will continue to be displayed until another upper display button is depressed.

The Engine rpm display has an engine overspeed feature. Any time the engine speed is 2500 rpm or above, the following will occur: The Engine rpm display will override other readouts on the upper display screen, except the wheel slip bar graph. The push buttons for the upper display screen will not work.

The Systems Normal light will stay ON and the alarm will sound. The actual engine rpm will fiash ON and OFF on the upper display screen until the overspeed condition is corrected.

If the display shows zero rpm with the engine running, check for disconnected wires or defective sensor. Disconnect the wiring plug near the sensor.

Connect an ohmmeter between the two wires going to the sensor. Resistance reading should be between 2925 and 3575 ohms. If resistance reading is higher or lower, renew the magnetic sensor. If reading is between 2925 and 3575 ohms, reconnect sensor wires and check the wiring as follows: With key switch OFF, disconnect the cluster connector. Connect an ohmmeter between pins 7 and 10 at the cluster connector.

Resistance reading should be between 2925 and 3575 ohms. If not, wiring and/or connections between sensor and cluster connector are faulty. Repair as necessary.

«

B

C961ANT

112. PTO RPM FUNCTION. The pto speed is calculated from the engine rpm. Depressing the Pto rpm button will display the calculated pto speed on the upper display screen. The pto speed reading will be identified as 540 rpm or 1000 rpm to identify the type of pto. On tractors equipped with both 540 and 1000 rpm pto, push the Pto rpm button alternately to change from 540 rpm to 1000 rpm reading. On tractors equipped with 1000 rpm pto onfy, the instrument cluster will be programmed to display 1000 rpm pto only.

113. GROUND SPEED FUNCTION (MAGNETIC SENSOR). One of two sensors can be used to monitor ground speed. One is called the true ground speed sensor and the other is a transmission magnetic sensor. The true ground speed sensor is an option and is covered in paragraph 114.

The magnetic sensor is mounted in the top rear of the range transmission housing. It is positioned so that it almost touches the gear. The sensor generates a magnetic field. As the gear rotates, the gear teeth cut through the magnetic field. The sensor puts out one pulse signal for each tooth that cuts through the magnetic field. As the gear rotates more quick^, the pulse frequency increases.

The two wire leads (yellow #215 and black #215) from the magnetic sensor connect to pins 5 and 6 of the cluster connector. As the pulse signals change, the varying signals are sent to the cluster to compute the ground speed. When ground speed button is depressed, the tractor ground speed'will appear on the lower digital display screen.

If the display shows zero reading (no display) when the tractor is moving and button is depressed, check

^ :s. w

oil TEMP

smmmtm

•

RflEL lEVa

Fig. 80—Digital Instrument cluster showing the digital displays, and the function and program buttons.

55

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 114-118 for disconnected sensor wires or a defective sensor.

Disconnect the wiring plug near the sensor. Connect an ohmmeter between the two wires going to the sensor. Resistance reading should be between 2925 and 3575 ohms. If resistance reading is higher or lower, renew the magnetic sensor. If the reading is between 2925 and 3575 ohms, reconnect sensor wires and check the wiring as follows: With the key switch OFF, disconnect the cluster connector. Connect an ohmmeter between connector pins 5 and 6. Resistor reading should be between 2925 and 3575 ohms. If not, wiring and/or connections between sensor and cluster connector are faulty. Repair as necessary.

NOTE: To provide accurate ground speed, the tractor must be programmed with a ground speed calibration number. Refer to paragraph 123. To change from Engiish to Metric units, refer to paragraph 122.

114. TRUE GROUND SPEED SENSOR. The true ground speed sensor (Fig. 81) is an option. If tractor is not equipped with this radar sensor, then ground speed is monitored by the transmission magnetic sensor. The true ground speed sensor is located on right side of speed transmission housing, just rearward from the hydraulic filter. The sensor must be mounted at the correct angle. Use a carpenters level to set mounting bracket lower edge at horizontal.

NOTE: The Wheel slip button witi not function uniess the tractor is equipped with a true ground speed sensor.

TD provide accurate ground speed and wheel slip, the correct ground speed calibration number must be programmed into the digital instrument cluster. Refer to paragraph 123.

The true ground speed will be displayed on the lower display screen any time the Ground speed button is depressed. Keep the face ofthe radar sensor clean. Scrape mud off with a plastic scraper. DO NOT

CASE/INTERNATIONAL use a metal scraper. Wash face of sensor with soap and water or steam clean. DO NOT disconnect wiring harness from the sensor while cleaning.

114A. AREA/HOUR FUNCTION. Depress the Area/hour button (Fig. 80) to display the number of acres (or hectares) being done per hour. The readout will be shown on the upper display screen. The reading will be identified as Acres/hour or Hectares/hour depending on the measurement system being used.

The instrument cluster must be programmed for equipment width and ground speed input, in order to calculate the Area/hour information.

115. TOTAL AREA FUNCTION. Depress the Ibtal area button to display the total accumulation of acres (or hectares) since the last reset of total area. The reading will be shown on the upper display screen.

The reading will be identified as acres or hectares depending on the measurement system being used.

The digital instrument cluster will automatically accumulate area any time the tractor is operating and has been programmed for equipment width and ground speed. Area accumulation can be stopped or started with the Stop and Start buttons. Tb stop accumulation, push the Stop button. The area readout will fiash ON and OFF. Tb start the accumulation, push the Start button.

The Start (up arrow) and Stop (down arrow) buttons can also be used to revise or preset the total area readout. To change the readout, push and hold the Tbtal area button. Push the Start button to increase the readout or the Stop button to decrease the readout. The Total area reading can be reset to zero with the Reset push button.

116. RESET BUTTON. Tb reset the Tbtal area reading, depress the Reset button for three seconds.

Th^ Tbtal area reading will fiash ON and OFF on the upper display screen and will then reset to zero reading.

When the Reset button is released, the instrument cluster will start accumulating Tbtal area again. Tbtal area will be displayed until another upper push button is depressed.

117. START BUTTON (UP ARROW). The Start button is used to increase the numerical value of displayed numbers during various programming procedures. Instructions for using the Start button are included in the appropriate individual programming procedures. . ,

Fig. 81—View of true ground speed radar sensor. Refer t6 text.

56

•

' ,

118. STOP BUTTON (DOWN ARROW). The Stop button is used to decrease the numerical value of displayed numbers during various programming procedures. Instructions for using the Stop button are included in the appropriate individual procedures.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 119. EQUIPMENT WIDTH. Depress the Equipment width button (Fig. 80) to display the width of equipment currently programmed into the instrument cluster. The unit of measurement will be in feet or meters according to the measurement system being used.

The Area/hour and Tbtal area functions will not operate correctly until an implement width has been programmed into the instrument cluster. For the most accurate information, program the effective width of the implement (actual width less overlap).

For example, if you are using a 26-foot disk and a 1-foot overlap, the effective implement width is 25 feet.

NOTE: if metric mode has been seiected, width measurement must be in meters.

Tb program Equipment width into the digital instrument cluster, turn the key switch ON, but do not start the engine. The upper display screen will read 0 engine rpm and lower display will read .0 mph.

Depress Equipment width button to display equipment width on the lower screen. This reading can be 0.0-149.9 feet (0.0-45.0 meters). Use the Start and Stop buttons to change equipment width. Push Start button to increase or Stop button to decrease the numerical value.

The new Equipment width displayed on the lower screen will be automatically entered in the instrument cluster memory after two seconds. Tum key switch OFF. 120. CALIBRATE BUTTON. Push the Calibrate button to display the ground speed code number on the lower display screen. The Calibration button is also used for programming the instrument cluster.

Instructions for using the Calibrate button are included in the appropriate individual programming procedures.

121. CALIBRATE SLIP BUTTON. The Calibrate shp button is used to calibrate the wheel sHp bar graph shown on the upper display screen. Tractor must be equipped with a true ground speed sensor in order to calculate and display wheel slip. The instrument cluster compares the transmission magnetic sensor signal with the true ground speed sensor signal. After wheel slip has been calibrated, wheel slip will be indicated anytime the tractor is in operation.

The wheel slip bar graph contains 15 segments.

Each segment represents 2 percent slip. The range of the graph is 0 percent slip (all segments OFF) to 30 percent slip (all segments ON). When segments 5, 6, 7 and 8 ofthe wheel slip display are aligned with the word BEST on the instrument panel decal, it represents an approximate wheel slip range of 9 to 16 percent. See Fig. 82.

Paragraphs 119-122 NOTE: if wheel siip has never been calibrated, aii wheel slip segments will be ON when the true ground speed sensor is operating and the tractor is operating at speeds greater than 1 mph.

Tb calibrate the wheel slip bar graph for zero slip, start driving the tractor across the field with implement raised in a no-load condition. Drive the tractor at normal working speeds for a minimum of four seconds. Continue driving tractor across the field, then push and hold the Calibrate slip button for a minimum of three seconds. At the end of three seconds, all segments ofthe wheel slip bar graph will be OFF, indicating zero percent slip. A short audible signal will indicate that the zero slip reference has been entered in the instrument cluster memory and wheel slip calibration is complete.

122. PROGRAM ENGLISH OR METRIC UNITS. The digital instrument cluster can be programmed to display certain readouts in English or metric units of measurement. Optional readouts are Ground speed.

Equipment width. Area/hour and Tbtal area. All clusters are preset in English mode. Change to the metric mode as follows: Push and hold the Calibrate button with the key switch OFF. While holding the Calibrate button, tum key switch to accessory position to enter the program mode. The upper display screen will show the permanent tractor model code number that was programmed at the factory. The lower display screen will show MPH or KMPH. Push the Ground speed button alternately until the desired measurement mode is displayed on the lower display screen.

MPH indicates English mode and KMPH indicates metric mode.

Tb enter the selected mode into the instrument cluster memoiy, push and hold the Calibrate button until the audible alarm sounds (approximately three seconds). The display will automatically return to normal accessory mode and display engine hours on

WHEEL SUP INDICATOR

Fig. 62—When segments 5,6, 7 and 8 on the wheei siip indicator are aiigned with the word BEST on the instrument panei decai, wheei slip range is 9 to 16 percent.

57

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 123-128

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

the lower display screen. Turn key switch to OFF position.

123. GROUND SPEED CALIBRATION CODE NUMBER. A ground speed calibration code number must be programmed into the digital instrument cluster in order to calculate ground speed. Tb check the code number, tum the key switch to ACC position.

Push and hold the Calibrate button. The four-digit code number will be displayed on the lower display screen until the button is released.

There are three types of code numbers that can be used, depending on how the tractor is equipped and how much accuracy is needed. Different types of code numbers are as follows: 1. Standard program calibration code number that can be used only on tractor equipped with true ground speed sensor.

2. Dynamic calibration code number (most accurate) that is recommended for tractors with or without true ground speed sensor.

3. Static calibration code nimiber that can be used for tractors with or without true ground speed sensor.

124. Tb enter the Standard code number 6027 into the digital instrument cluster, tum key switch to ACC position. Push Calibrate and Ground speed buttons at the same time for three seconds to enter the ground speed calibration mode. The calibrate readout will fiash ON and OFF on lower display screen. At the end of three seconds, readout will stop fiashing and a short audible signal will indicate that the ground speed calibration mode has been entered. Use the Start button to increase or the Stop button to decrease the calibration code number to 6027. The code number will automatically be entered into the instrument cluster memory after two seconds. Turn key switch to OFF position.

STATtC CALIBRATION CODE NUMBERS STATIC LOADED RADIUS Inch

mm

STATIC CALIBRATION CODE NUMBER

28-1/2

724

7462

29

737

7334

29-1/2

749

7210

30

762

7090

30-1/2

775

6973

31

787

6861

31-1/2

800

6752

32

813

6646

32-1/2

825

6544

33

838

6445

33-1/2

851

6349

34

864

6255

34-1/2

876

6165

MEASURING STATIC LOADED RADIUS

126. Tb determine the dynamic calibration code number, measure a straight line course 400 feet (122 m) long. See Fig. 84. For best accuracy, choose a course surface of low grass crop or uniformly tilled ground. The next best surface, in order, is gravel, blacktop or concrete.

Start the tractor, then push and hold the Calibrate and Ground speed buttons at the same time for three seconds to enter the ground speed calibration mode.

The calibration readout will fiash ON and OFF on the lower display screen. At the end of three seconds, the readout will stop fiashing and a short audible signal will indicate that the ground speed calibration mode has been entered.

Start driving the tractor toward the measured course with the implement out ofthe ground to create a no-slip condition. As you pass the start mark, momentarily push, then release the Start button. The display will reset to zero and begin to accumulate. As you pass the finish mark, momentarily push, then release the Stop button. The display will now show the dynamic calibration code number.

The code number displayed on the lower screen will be automatically entered in the instrument cluster memory after two seconds. Push the Ground speed button to exit the program mode and retum to operation mode.

127. ENGINE HOUR INDICATOR. The instrument cluster will record engine hours of operation any time the key switch is ON and engine is running.

Tb display, total engine hours, tum key switch to accessory position. The upper display screen will read ACC and the lower display screen will show the total engine hours of operation.

128. GEAR READOUT. A gear readout display will be shown on the lower display screen when transmis-

MEASURE FROM CENTER OF AXLE (1) TO BOTTOM OF THE TIRE (2).

Fig. 83—Chart showing method of seiecting static caiibration code numt>er.

58

125. Tb determine the static calibration code number, measure distance between center of rear axle (1—Fig. 83) to bottom of rear tire (2). Use this measurement and select the static calibration code number fi:-om the chart (Fig. 83).

The procedure for entering the static calibration code number is the same as the standard code number as outlined in paragraph 124.

START 400 FEET FINISH Fig. 84—To determine the dynamic caiibration code number, tractor must be driven aiong a 400-foot (122 m) straight'iine course. Refer to text.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 sion control lever is used to select a forward or reverse speed. The gear readout is based on engine rpm and ground speed inputs. Four indicators are used to identify the gear, forward, creep and reverse selections.

129. WINDSHIELD WIPER. Normal operation of the windshield wiper is with key switch ON, wiper should operate when wiper switch is moved to LO and HI positions. Move wiper switch to OFF position and wiper should retum automatically to PARK position.

If wiper motor does not operate in one or all positions, check cab relay, circuit breaker and fuse. Use a voltmeter and check for voltage at wiper switch terminal for red wire #830. If voltage reading is 12 volts, move wiper switch control to LO position and check for voltage at switch terminal for orange wire #833.

Then, move switch control to HI position and check for voltage at switch terminal for orange wire #832.

If no voltage is found at red wire #830 terminal, check wiring, ignition switch and fuses. If voltage reaches red wire #830 terminal, but does not reach orange wire #833 or orange wire #832 terminals as switch is operated, renew wiper switch. If voltage is present at each terminal and switch is in proper position, test for voltage in wires as close to wiper motor as possible.

If voltage is present at wiring, but motor does not run, renew motor. If no voltage is present, check wiring between switch and motor.

130. CAB FAN MOTOR. Cab fan (blower) motor is used for cab ventilation, heater or air conditioning system fan as models are equipped.

If motor fails to operate with key switch ON and blower switch turned to low, high or purge position, use a voltmeter and check for voltage at terminal for red wire #820 at blower switch. If no voltage is present, check wiring, ignition switch and circuit breaker. Repair as necessary. If voltage is present at red wire #820 terminal, check for voltage at orange wires #822, #823 and #824 terminals at fan switch as blower switch is turned to low, high and purge. If voltage is not present at all locations with blower switch turned to proper position, renew blower switch.

If voltage is present at all terminals, unplug resistor board connector. With key switch ON and blower switch turned to purge position, use a 12 volt test light and check for current at the orange wire #824 of connector. Tarn switch to high position and check for

Paragraphs 129-132 current at the orange wire #823 of connector. Tum switch to low position and check for current at the orange wire #822 of connector. If there is no current present at any ofthe three tests, check for faulty wires between blower switch and resistor board connector.

Repair as necessary.

If current is present at all the connector terminals, reconnect the resistor board. If blower will operate in purge position but not in high or low positions, renew resistor board. If blower does not operate in any position, make sure motor ground is good and renew blower motor as required.

131. HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONING. Heater and air conditioner blower motor is the same blower as the cab ventilating blower. Refer to paragraph 130 for test procedures. However, the air conditioning system compressor clutch, high and low pressure switches and temperature control switch may be checked as individual units.

Before attempting to diagnose electrical problems in air conditioning system, make sure compressor belt is tight, that condenser and evaporator cores are clean to ensure maximum air fiow and that system is filled with correct amount of refrigerant.

132. COMPRESSOR CLUTCH CIRCUIT TEST. With engine running, set temperature control switch to coldest position and turn blower switch to low or high position. Clutch should engage as blower switch is turned ON. If clutch does not engage, use a voltmeter to check for voltage at compressor clutch. If voltage is present, renew compressor clutch.

If no voltage is present at clutch, disconnect the wires at high-pressure switch and install a jumper wire to bypass the switch. If compressor clutch engages, check system pressure or renew high-pressure switch as necessary. If clutch still fails to engage, disconnect wires from low-pressure switch located in cab roof and install jumper wire to b3rpass the switch.

If clutch engages, check system pressure and refrigerant level or renew low-pressure switch as necessary.

If clutch still fails to engage, use a 12 volt test light and check for current at temperature control switch.

If light fails to come on at either terminal and blower motor is working, check the red wire #800 from blower switch to the temperature control switch. Repair as necessary.

POWER SHIFT TRANSMISSION All tractors are equipped with a full power shift transmission. The full power shift design permits shifting the transmission anj^ime without using the inching (clutch) pedal. This includes changing speed

selections when tractor is moving or stationary, or when changing direction of travel.

A hydraulic actuated multiple disc, wet-tj^e master clutch controlled by the inching pedal is used on

59

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 133 all models. The clutch assembly is mounted on the range input shaft and is located between the speed and range transmission housings.

Tractors may be equipped with a standard 18-speed forward/2-speed reverse transmission or an 18-speed forward/4-speed reverse transmission. These transmissions may be optionally equipped with a creeper drive. The creeper drive provides an additional six low-forward speeds and one or two low-reverse speeds for a total of 24 speeds forward and 3 or 6 reverse speeds. Refer to Figs. 85 and 86 for shift patterns.

OPERATION All Models

When selecting speeds with tractor stationary, tractor motion can be started with or without using the inching pedal as follows: WITHOUT INCHING PEDAL, move transmission control lever from neutral position to desired speed selection. Tractor will immediately start moving in the selected speed.

WITH INCHING PEDAL, push inching pedal down and move transmission control lever to the desired speed selection. The tractor will start moving in the selected speed when inching pedal is released.

The inching pedal can be used to move the tractor when operating in confined areas, for connecting implements to the tractor and for stopping the tractor without down shifting to neutral position.

CAUTION: Do not ride the inching pedai when transmission Is under ioad. Reiease inching pedai completely within five seconds for improved ciutch service life.

133. The transmission control lever is used to select the desired forward speed, reverse speed, neutral position or park lock position. The transmission can be shifted to any forward speed, reverse speed or neutral when tractor is moving or stationary. When changing direction of travel, always slow the tractor speed before moving the control lever to the desired direction of travel.

When selecting speeds with tractor moving, move control lever through the speed range to the desired speed selection. For smooth speed changes, move control lever one speed at a time. When shifting from forward to reverse or reverse to forward, hesitate in neutral for approximately one second to allow master clutch pressure to drop. Tb prevent excessive deceleration of tractor, always down shift one speed at a time.

Always place transmission control lever in park position before leaving the tractor. Tractor must be completely stopped before shifting to park position.

When disengaging the park lock, always move control lever fully into neutral slot before trying to select 3rd or 4th reverse speed.

Engage the creeper drive as follows: Place transmission control lever in neutral or park position.

Move the creeper solenoid switch lever (SL—Fig. 87) to the right (ON position). The switch lever will block out transmission shift quadrant for forward speeds 13 through 18. With creeper clutch engaged, move transmission control lever to regular speed position 1 or 2 for creeper speed 1, regular speed 3 or 4 for

Fig. 85—Power shift transmission shift patterns for tractors equipped with 18 forward/2 reverse or 24 forward/3 reverse (with creeper) transmissions.

Fig. 86—Power shift transmission shift patterns for tractors equipped with 18 forward/4 reverse or 24 forward/6 reverse (with creeper) transmissions.

60

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 134-135

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 creeper speed 2 and so on up to regular speed 11 or 12 for creeper speed 6. See Fig. 88.

CONTROL LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT Ail Models 134. INCHING PEDAL. Tb adjust the inching pedal linkage, refer to Fig. 89, loosen the locknut and back off pedal stop bolt so it is clear of pedal in released position. Loosen the locknut on the lower end ofthe inching spool control cable. Loosen the two bolts at the fiange so that sleeve will tum. Tum sleeve counterclockwise until tension is removed from control cable. Push and hold the inching pedal tight against the fire wall. Tum the sleeve clockwise until you feel resistance, then tighten the fiange mounting bolts. Tighten the locknut against the sleeve. Turn the pedal stop bolt inward until it contacts the pedal, then tum it inward an additional three or four full turns and tighten locknut against the bracket. Check the cable travel from fully engaged to fully disengaged.

The correct travel is Vs inch (20 mm). Measure the cable travel at upper end of cable under engine hood on the fire wall. If adjustment is not satisfactory, disconnect linkage from valve £ind check valve spool disengaged position. End of valve spool must be 1% inch (41 mm) from face of valve in disengaged position. Readjust control cable sleeve, if necessary.

135. FORWARD REVERSE SPOOL. To adjust the forward-reverse spool linkage, refer to Fig. 90 and loosen locknut at top of sleeve on the forward-reverse spool. Loosen the two bolts for the sleeve fiange so the sleeve will turn. Place the transmission control lever in PARK position. Turn the sleeve clockwise or counterclockwise as required to center the control lever in the park slot ofthe shift quadrant. Tighten the fiange bolts and tighten the locknut at the top ofthe sleeve.

Start the engine and operate at low idle speed. Hold the inching pedal down in disengaged position. Move the control lever about half way into the forward speed slot. The lever must be in the center ofthe slot, not touching either side. Move the lever to the second speed reverse position. The lever must be in the center ofthe slot, not touching either side. Readjust linkage if necessary. If adjustment is still unsatisfactory, stop the engine and disconnect linkage from forward-reverse valve spool. The spool is spring loaded to remain in neutral position. Measure the distance from end of valve spool to valve face. Measurement should be 1 Vs inch (29 mm).

RETURN SPRING

MASTER CLUTCH PEDAL

FLAT WASHER

87—Creeper soienoid controi switch lever (SL) is iocated in transmission quadrant as shown.

Regular Forward Speed Creeper Forward Speed Regular Reverse Speed Creeper Reverse Speed

1-2

3-4

5-6

7-8

9-10

11-12

1

2

3

4

5

6

1-2

3-4

1

2

Fig, 88—Chart showing regular speed positions that match creeper speed positions.

89—Exploded view of Inching pedai linkage. Refer to text for adjustment procedure.

61

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 136-139 136. TRANSMISSION SHIFT LINKAGE. Tb adjust the transmission shift linkage, refer to Fig. 91 and proceed as follows: Disconnect the ball joint from the transmission shift lever. Move transmission shift lever on the valve, to the highest position, then move it downward to the first detent position. Move transmission control lever to the first speed forward position on shift quadrant. Control lever must be centered on the line for first speed forward. Adjust the linkage so that the stud on ball joint is aligned with the hole in transmission shift lever. Connect the ball joint to the shift lever.

Start the engine and operate at low idle speed with inching pedal fully depressed. Check for each of the detent positions in all 18 speeds forward, all reverse speeds and neutral position. The control lever must have clearance at end of slot when in 18th speed position. Readjust if necessary.

137. PARK LOCK LINKAGE. Tb adjust the park lock linkage, refer to Fig. 92 and proceed as follows: NOTE: Make sure transmission controi iinkage is properiy adjusted as outlined in paragraph 136 before adjusting park iock iinkage.

Block tractor rear tires securely. Place transmission control lever in PARK position. Check position of the bellcrank. Bellcrank must be tight against the cover. Remove the lower clevis from the bellcrank and

r OUTER LOCK NUT _

LOWER INNEn — JAM Ntrr

FLANOE ' ^

\

\

BOLT TRANSMISSION CONTROL l£VE It BELL CRANK

Fig. 90—Expioded view of forward-reverse vaive iinicage. Refer to text for adjustment procedure.

62

adjust length of control cable so that bellcrank is tight against the cover.

When transmission control lever is moved from forward to reverse, the control lever should not touch either lip of the park lock control lever. If necessary, loosen bulkhead nuts and move park lock cable to help alignment. Then, tighten the nuts when adjustment is complete.

TRANSMISSION CONTROL VALVE All Models 138. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Although some components which make up the control valve can be removed without removing the control valve assembly, the following paragraphs will outline the removal, disassembly, reassembly and reinstallation of the complete valve assembly.

Tb remove the transmission valve assembly, first remove battery covers, then disconnect battery cables and remove batteries. Unbolt and remove step assembly from tractor. Remove drain plug and drain fiuid from speed transmission. Disconnect neutral start switch, transmission system pressure switch and if so equipped, the creeper drive solenoid wires. Disconnect and remove control cables from inching spool (master clutch) and forward-reverse spool. Disconnect hydraulic tubes from control valve assembly.

Remove the link rod from the speed shift lever. Remove the two MIO bolts (X—Fig. 93) and install two MIO dowels that are approximately 9 inches (229 mm) long. Then, remove the 12 shaded bolts shown in Fig. 93. Use M6 bolts and a lift bracket on the inching spool and forward-reverse spool housings.

Unbolt and remove the cover plate, refer to Fig. 94 and move control lever to rotate the cam assembly until access holes in cam align with the three valve mounting bolts. Remove the three Allen head bolts.

Using a hoist, remove valve assembly from tractor.

139. Tb remove the valve mounting plate, refer to Fig. 95 and remove the bolt from the front and the tube retainer from behind the mounting plate. If so equipped, remove the tube nut for the creeper clutch feed tube at back side of plate. Remove the four other retaining bolts and lift off mounting plate. Remove the four oil feed tubes from plate to transmission.

Remove the plate mounting gasket.

Tb reinstall the mounting plate, first install new "O" rings on the three range clutch feed tubes. Using a new gasket, install the mounting plate. Install the four plate retaining bolts and hand tighten. Install the three range clutch oil feed tubes in valve mounting plate bores. Install the tube retainer (Fig. 95) and secure with bolt. Install new "O" rings on the four speed clutch oil feed tubes and coat "O" rings with petroleum jelly. Install the two 5.3 inch (134.0 mm)

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 140

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 tubes in the top two bores. Install the 5.8 inch (148.0 mm) tube in the third bore and the 7.0 inch (178.9 mm) tube in the bottom bore. Push tubes inward until they are fully seated. Tighten the four plate retaining bolts and the tube retainer bolt to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m). Connect creeper clutch feed tube, if so equipped.

Drive out retaining pin and remove control lever.

Remove selector control gear and shaft assembly.

Refer to Fig. 97 and remove plug with "O" ring, spring and shuttle spool. Remove detent assemblies from inside. Unbolt and remove cover and gasket, then remove the outer relief spring and ball. Remove control shaft oil seal and bearing.

140. Tb remove the control housing, refer to Fig. 96 and remove the transmission pressure switch. Remove the range (upper) accumulator and the speed (lower) accumulator. Remove both detent plugs and detent springs. Remove the last control housing retaining bolt (just above control lever shaft). Use a pry bar at the upper right and lower left corners to pry control housing loose from valve bo<fy, then lift off control housing and gasket.

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Internal parts of shuttle spool are not serviced separately. Outer relief spring should have a free length of 1.25 inches (31.75 mm) and should test 7.25-8.0 lbs. (32.24-35.64 N) when compressed to a length of 0.6 inch (15.19 mm).

Shuttle spool spring free length should be 2.90 inches (73.67 mm) and should test 20.0 lbs. (89.96 N) when compressed to a length of 0.98 inch (25.0 mm). Detent springs should have a free length of 2.21 inches (56.15

TRANSMISSION CONTROL LEVER

nnnnn

TRANSMISSION / CONTROL LEVER / IN FIRST SPEED FORWARD POSITION

o

TRANSMISSION

Fig, 91—Expioded view of transmission shift iiniiage. Refer to text for adjustment procedure.

63

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 141-142 mm) and should test 4.6 lbs. (20.46 N) when compressed to a length of 1.26 inches (32.0 mm).

Using new gasket, oil seal, beeiring and "O" ring, reassemble control housing, but do not install detent springs and plugs. Tighten the seven control housing

bolts to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m). Tighten shuttle spool plug to a torque of 60-70 ft.-lbs. (81-95 N.m). Lay control housing aside for later installation.

141. Refer to Fig. 96 and remove the cam control shaft spacer, then remove the cam assembly and cam shaft. Remove the pin stop and reverse stop pin.

Remove bearing and spacer from the three cam spool pins.

142. Remove the three forward-reverse spool housing bolts and strap. See Fig. 98. Tap the housing lightly to loosen, then remove housing and gasket.

Remove range blocker pin from bottom of spool housing, oil seal, plug and "O" ring from top and safety start switch with "O" ring from side of housing. Remove detent spring and seal insert with "O" ring, then withdraw forward-reverse spool with stop washer.

Slide stop washer from spool. Remove range blocker plunger from valve body.

Remove two Allen head bolts and one hex head bolt, then remove clutch spool housing and gasket. Remove plug, "O" ring and oil seal from spool housing.

Withdraw master clutch spool assembfy. Master

COTTER PW

BELLCflANK UNK

Fig. 92—Exploded view of park lock linkage. Refer to text for adjustment procedure.

Fig. 94—With cover piate removed, move controi iever to rotate cam assembiy untii access hoies in cam aiign with the three vaive mounting boits.

iO Fig. 93—Remove the two MiO bolts (X) and instail two dowei rods, then remove the 12 shaded boits shown.

84

Fig. 95—Unboit and remove tube retainer as shown.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 clutch spool is available only as an assembly. Using a magnet, remove clutch override spool and spring.

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Clutch override spring should have a free length of 2.14 inches (54.36 mm) and should test 16.2 lbs. (72.06 N) when compressed to a length of 1.08 inches (27.51 mm). Forward-reverse detent spring should have a free length of 2.22 inches (56.50 mm) and should test 25.3-26.6 lbs. (112.6-118.6 N) when compressed to a length of 0.67 inch (17.0 mm).

Identify and lay all parts aside in a clean area for later assembly.

143. Refer to Fig. 99, turn valve body over and remove the six lower cover retaining bolts. Remove cover and gasket. Remove inner and outer springs, inner and outer shims and modulating guide. Using a magnet, remove piston spring and clutch control piston. Remove the flow sensor spool and spring and the piston dump spool and spring.

Paragraph 143 Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage. Piston dump spring should have a free length of 2.66 inches (67.6 mm) and should test 26.0 lbs. (115.6 N) when compressed to a length of 0.98 inch (25.0 mm). Flow sensor spring should have a free length of 2.21 inches (56.04 mm) and should test 50.0 lbs. (222.4 N) when compressed to a length of 0.93 inch (23.5 mm). Control piston spring should have a free length of 2.75 inches (69.74 mm) and should test 17.5-19.3 lbs. (77.79-85.79 N) when compressed to a length of 0.98 inch (25.0 mm). Inner modulating spring should have a free length of 2.91 inches (74.03 mm) and should test 65.0-69.0 lbs. (289.0-307.0 N) when compressed to a length of 1.54 inches (39.0 mm).

Outer modulating spring should have a free length of 3.03 inches (77.08 mm) and should test 93.0-99.0 lbs.

(413.7-440.3 N) when compressed to a length of 1.54 inches (39.0 mm).

Identify and lay all parts aside in a clean area for later assembly.

TTW4SMISSI0N PRESSURE SWITCH

CAM ASSEMBLY

SPEED ACCUMULATOB

96—Removal and disassembly of transmission control housing and relative components.

65

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 144-146

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

144. On models equipped with creeper drive, the creeper valve body assembly (Fig. 100) is used in place ofthe lower cover in Fig. 99. Ib disassemble the creeper valve, remove the two screws from retaining ring (Fig. 100) and remove retaining ring and solenoid valve. Remove the plug with "O" ring, spring and spool.

Inspect spool and bore for scoring. The valve spring should have a free length of 2.56 inches (65.0 mm) and should test 56.0 lbs. (249.0 N) when compressed to a length of 1.34 inches (34.0 mm).

Use all new "O" rings when reassembling. Lubricate spool with new Hy-Tran Plus fluid and install in valve body. Install spring and plug with "O" rings.

Install "O" rings on solenoid valve and install solenoid and retainer ring. Secure retainer ring with screws.

145. Refer to Fig. 101 and remove the 1-3-5, oddeven and L-M-H spools as follows: See Figs. 102 and 103 and insert the short end of a small Allen wrench or other suitable tool through end of spool and into hole in cam pin. Use a screwdriver to push Allen wrench inward to disengage the lock pin from the cam pin. Pull cam pin upward and release pressure on Allen wrench. Pull cam pin from 1-3-5 spool. Remove the 1-3-5 spool from the valve, then remove lock pin and lock spring from spool.

Insert the short end ofthe Allen wrench in the cam pin lock hole of the odd-even spool. Use the L-M-H spool to push inward on Allen wrench and disengage lock pin. Pull upward on cam pin and release pressure

on Allen wrench. Remove cam pin, then remove oddeven spool. Remove lock pin and spring from spool.

Install the odd-even spool, without lock pin and spring, back into the bore. Install the cam pin back into the odd-even spool. Insert the short end of Allen wrench in the cam pin lock hole of the L-M-H spool.

Use the odd-even spool to push inward on Allen wrench and disengage the lock pin. Pull upward on the cam pin and release pressure on the Allen wrench.

Remove the cam pin from the L-M-H spool. Remove cam pin from the odd-even spool. Remove Allen wrench, then remove the spools. Remove lock pin and lock spring from L-M-H spool.

Inspect spools and bores for scoring or other damage. Lock pin springs should have a free length of 1.25 inches (31.75 mm) and should test 2.59 lbs. (11.52 N) when compressed to a length of 0.61 inch (15.44 mm).

Remove relief valve cup plug (Fig. 101), spring and check ball. Relief spring should have a free length of 1.25 inches (31.75 mm) and should test 7.25-8.01 lbs.

(32.24-35.64 N) when compressed to a length of 0.6 inch (15.19 mm).

Use a suitable bearing puller to remove the control shaft bearing from valve body, if necessary.

146. TD remove the reducing spool (Fig. 104), first remove the five Allen head retaining bolts (Fig. 105) and remove valve plate and gasket (Fig. 104). Use a screwdriver to move spring and washer away fi:'om retainer ring, then use needlenose pliers to remove

PLUG BOLT

PLUG

0-RiNG

SEAL

Fig. 97—Shuttie spooi and detent assemblies removed from controi housing.

66

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 147-148

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 retainer ring. Remove reducing spool from port in bottom of valve body. Remove spring and washer.

Inspect reducing spool and bore for scoring or other damage. Spring should have a free length of 2.48 inches (62.89 mm) and should test 5.15-5.73 lbs.

(22.9-25.5 N) when compressed to a length of 0.81 inch (20.5 mm).

147. Tb remove the check valves (Fig. 106), first note the direction of installation. See Fig. 107. If valve is installed as in left view, thread a MIO x 1.25 x 20 nmi long bolt into base of the valve. Cool the valve by spraying with liquid freon. While protecting the plate surface, use a roll bar under bolt head to pry out check valve.

WARNING: Always wear safety goggles and protective gloves when working with liquid freon.

If valve is installed as in right view, remove the valve cage, spring and check plate. Thread a MIO x 1.25 X 20 mm long bolt into center of check valve base.

Cool valve base by spra3dng with liquid freon. Protect plate surface and use a roll bar under bolt head to pry out check valve base.

When installing check valves in left view, use a seal driver or in right view, use a piece of V2 inch (12.7 mm) thin wall conduit. Drive valve inward until base is seated in the bore.

148. When reassembling, use new "O" rings, seals and gaskets and reverse the disassembly procedures.

ALLEN BOLT -BOLT

STRAP

CLUTCH OVERRIDESPOOL

SPRING-

GASKET

VALVE BODY

Fig. 96—Master clutch and forward-reverse spool assemblies removed from transmission valve body.

67

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 148 (Cont.)

Lubricate all internal parts with clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Before installing the gear selector cam, refer to Fig. 108 and move the 1-3-5, odd-even and L-M-H cam pins to fully down position. Install the gear selector cam so that reverse blocker tab is at 7 o'clock position as shown in Fig. 109. Use a screwdriver to move the L-M-H spool cam pin upward until the cam is fully engaged. The cam must rotate approximately 360 degrees from stop to stop. Install the shaft spacer and control selector gear assembly. Align timing marks on the cam gear and the control selector gear as shown in Fig. 110.

Push the two cam detents back into their bores and install the control housing assembly. Install detent springs and plugs. Tighten plugs to a torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m). Install speed (lower) accumulator and tighten to a torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m).

Install the range (upper) accumulator and tighten to a torque of 60-70 ft.-lbs. (81-95 N.m).

Using a hoist, reinstall control valve assembly.

Move control lever to rotate cam until holes in cam align with the three valve mounting bolt holes. Refer to Fig. I l l and install bolts. Tighten the two M8 bolts to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m) and the M6 bolt to a torque of 8-10 ft.-lbs. (10.5-12 N.m). Refer to Fig. 112 and install bolts in locations shown. Tighten M8 bolts to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m) and MIO bolts to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m).

Reconnect hydraulic tubes and refill transmission with Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Adjust control linkage as outlined in paragraphs 134 through 137. Connect the neutral start switch, transmission system pressure switch and if so equipped, the creeper drive solenoid wires.

CLUTCH CONTROL PISTON

OUTER SPRING

LOWER COVER

BOLT

Fig. 99—Lower cover, clutch control piston, flow sensor spool, piston dump spool and relative components removed from control valve body.

68

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 149

PRESSURE TESTS

ter clutch supply tube. Cap fitting on control valve and place a drain pan under open end of tube. Place transmission shift lever in PARK position, then disconnect park lock cable clevis from park lock, using a CAS-10753 seven gage bar, connect gages to the seven ports shov^n in Fig. 113.

All Models 149. To check the transmission valve and clutch pressures, first refer to Fig. 113 and disconnect mas-

Fig. 100—Exploded view of creeper drive vaive assembly.

LOCK PIN LOCK SPRING

Connect a flowmeter (CAS-10283 or equivalent) to a remote valve circuit. With engine operating at 1000 rpm, close load valve to partially restrict oil flow.

Warm the transmission oil to a temperature of 150° F (65.5° C) and remove flowmeter.

With engine operating at 1100 rpm, use the transmission clutch pressure check chart (Fig. 114) to record the pressure gage readings required for each speed selection. If regulated pressure is below 260280 psi (1793-1931 kPa) refer to paragraph 185 and adjust regulated pressure at pto control valve.

With regulated pressure correct, engine operating at 1100 rpm and inching pedal up, start in first speed and record pressure readings. Proceed to each forward speed up through eighteenth speed. Then, all reverse speeds. If so equipped, check pressures in six forward creeper speeds and reverse creeper speeds.

If master clutch pressure is not within specifications, adjust as follows: If equipped vdth a creeper drive, disconnect solenoid wire and creeper clutch tube, then unbolt and remove creeper valve. See Figs.

CAM PIN SPOOL

CUP PLUG

LOCK PIN

Fig. 102—View showing method of securing cam pin in spool. Loci< pin engages hoie in cam pin.

Fig. 101—View of 1-3-5, L-M-H and odd-even spoois removed from transmission controi vaive body.

Fig. 103—Engage short end of small Allen wrench In hole in cam pin to disengage ioci( pin on 1-3-5 spooL Odd-even and L-M-H are simiiar.

69

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 150

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

99 and 100. If not equipped with creeper drive, unbolt and remove lower cover. Remove clutch control piston, piston spring, inner and outer springs, shims and guide. Remove flow sensor spool and spring, and piston dump spool and spring. Count the inner and outer shims on the shim guide. An approximate 5 psi (34 kPa) pressure change will result by adding or subtracting one inner and one outer shim. Add or subtract shims as required to bring pressure within specifications. Always change shims in pairs (one inner and one outer). Using a new gasket, reinstall clutch control piston, piston spring, guide, inner and outer shims, inner and outer springs, flow sensor spool and spring, and the piston dump spool and spring. Install cover and tighten bolts to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m).

If all clutch pressure readings are within specifications, the test is completed. If low pressure is indicated in an odd-even, L-M-H or 1-3-5-R clutch, depress the inching pedal and retest. By depressing the inching pedal, you are checking only the 1-3-5-R clutch. Arise in pressure indicates a leaking odd-even or L-M-H clutch. By shifting from sixth through twelfth speed, low and high range can be isolated. The odd-even clutches can be capped off to isolate them from the system.

When pressure recording is completed, compare each actual reading with the specified pressure. Place an 'X" in the box with low pressure. Using this information, match 'X" marks to the clutch packs with low pressure to determine the failed clutch pack or packs.

Check all clutch combinations to determine the faulty clutch or clutches by process of elimination.

Residual pressure should be 3 psi (21 kPa) maximum.

If residual pressure is too high in transmission control valve, speed and range clutch life will be shortened. High residual pressure can be caused by leaking seal rings, improper spool timing or restricted drain or lube passages. Maximum lube pressure is controlled by the cold oil relief valve in the hydraulic filter base. Minimum lube pressure is controlled by the size of the orifices in the lube distribution system.

Low lube pressures can be caused by leaks in the system.

When pressure checks have been completed, reconnect park lock cable clevis, remove gages and complete balance of tractor reassembly.

Drive the tractor, shifting through all speeds to check operation of the transmission valve.

SPEED TRANSMISSION The speed transmission contains the countershaft and gears and if so equipped, the creeper drive clutch; the input shaft and gears and the odd-even clutches; and the output shaft and gears and the 1-3-5-R clutches.

All Models 150. R&R AND OVERHAUL. To remove the speed transmission assembly for service, proceed as follows: Place transmission shift lever in PARK position and block rear wheels securely. Remove front end

VALVE "BODY

Fig, 104^-Valve body plate and reducing spool removed from valve body.

70

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 150 (Cont.)

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 weights, if so equipped. Remove drain plug and drain transmission fluid. Close heater valves at engine and disconnect heater hoses.

On left side of tractor, disconnect the lower oil cooler hose from bulk head fitting. Remove cab floor mat, then unbolt and remove access cover from floor.

Unbolt the bulk head fi^om cab support brackets.

Disconnect upper oil cooler hose at tee fitting under cab. Disconnect the pto drain tube at the pto valve.

Remove the lube manifold supply tube and the transmission lube tube from tractor. Remove front upper

Fig. 106—Before instailing cam assembly, move 1-3-5, odd-even and L-M-H cam pins to their fuiiy down position.

Fig. 105—Remove the five Men head bolts to remove the valve body piate.

Fig. 109—Install the gear selector cam so the reverse blocker tab Is at 7 o 'clock position.

VALVE BODY

Fig. 110—View showing timing marks on cam gear and controi seiector gear.

Fig. 106—View showing iocation of check valves in valve plate and valve body.

Fig. 107—Views showing the different directions of check vaive Instailation. Refer to text for removal and instailation procedures,

^;

71

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 150 (Cont.) cab retaining nuts. Raise hood £ind make certain hood hinge lock is engaged. Remove left hood strut. Disconnect Avirefi^omair conditioning compressor. Remove compressor mounting bolts and drive belt. Remove condenser pivot bolt and wing screws fi:'om radiator support. Carefully lay condenser and compressor with hoses attached, in the tractor cab. Remove hose routing clamp from left side rail. Unbolt tool box from

I Fig. 111—Move controi lever to rotate cam assembiy until access holes in cam aiign with the three valve mounting bolt holes.

CASE/INTERNATIONAL left side rail. Remove fuel return line and throttle cable from injection pump. Identify and disconnect steering hoses fi^om hand pump. Disconnect wires from starter solenoid on the firewall. Disconnect battery cables and remove batteries. Remove battery box and cab steps. Clamp off the fuel hose between the main tank and the auxiliary fuel tank. Disconnect the hose from the auxiliary tank. Close the fuel tank shut-ofT valve and disconnect fuel line and wiring harness from auxiliary tank. Place a floor jack under auxiliary tank support. Unbolt and remove auxiliary tank and support. Remove shift linkage from lever on control valve and disconnect inching pedal and forward-reverse cables from top of control valve. Disconnect electrical connector at harness under left cab door.

On right side of tractor, remove lower cab trim, transmission filter cover and cover supports from tractor. Disconnect wiring, then unbolt and remove true ground speed sensor. Disconnect engine wiring harness and positive lead from bottom of cab floor.

Remove oil cooler return line from hydraulic oil filter base and tee fitting under cabfloor.Unbolt hydraulic filter base from support bracket. Disconnect brake

Fig. 112—View showing location of the various size and iength of control valve and cover retaining bolts.

A. M8x 1.25 X 25 mm E. MlOx 1.5 X 55 mm C. MlOx L5x 175 mm E MlOx 1.5 X 50 mm B. M8x 1,25 X 120 mm D. M8x 1.25 X 140 mm

72

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 151

valve return hose from brake valve. Loosen mounting bolts and remove transmission filter screen housing cover, filter screen locator plug and the suction screen. Unbolt and remove filter screen housing, filter screen container, gasket and "O" ring from the transmission housing. Working through the filter screen opening, disconnect the three internal range transmission clutch supply tubes at the 90 degree elbows. Remove drawbar pivot pin and drawbar. Install a splitting stand (17-526A or equivalent) on tracks under the tractor. Bolt adapter plates to the side rails. Use a jack on the splitting stand to support the speed transmission housing. Install a cab support (17-528-2) under each front rail of the cab. Adjust supports to raise cab to clear the mounting studs.

Rotate square plate on each stud to lower studs out of cab frame. Attach a rear housing handler (17-527) under rear frame of tractor. Remove bolts securing the speed transmission to the range transmission and install two guide studs. Move front half of tractor from rear half. Cab will remain with rear section.

151. With speed transmission separated from range transmission, proceed as follows: If so equipped, remove front drive shaft and shield as TRANSMISSION VALVE REGULATED PRESSURE SUPPLY

outlined in paragraph 12. Unbolt and remove the drive guard from front of transmission housing. Install a lifting bracket to rear of speed transmission housing. Fasten a chain to lifting bracket and cab mounts, then attach chain to a hoist. Raise hoist until there is tension on lift chain. Refer to Fig. 115 and remove the odd clutch supply tube, even clutch supply tube, master clutch supply tube and if so equipped, the creeper clutch supply tube. Remove the transmission shift link from the control valve lever. Disconnect the neutral start switch wires, transmission system pressure switch wire and the creeper drive clutch solenoid wire, if so equipped. Disconnect the oil cooler return tube from the hydraulic tee fitting. Unbolt and separate speed transmission from flywheel housing.

Attach right side of speed transmission to an engine stand. Remove left cab mount.

Refer to paragraphs 138 and 139 and remove transmission control valve, valve mounting plate and the four oil distributor tubes. Remove the lube manifold and the three oil distributor tubes. Remove oil pressure tube from countershaft rear bearing cage. Remove snap ring from rear of front drive £ixle drive shaft, then remove the drive shaft from front of speed transmission housing. Refer to Fig. 121 or 122 and ODD/EVEN MANIFOLD

MASTER CLUTCH SUPPLY

LUBE MANIFOLD

ODD 3A LUBE

1. Regulated Pressure Port 2. Master Clutch Pressure Port 3. Odd/Even Pressure Port 4. 1.3,5,R Pressure Port 5. Low, Med, High Pressure Port 6. Residual Pressure Port 7. Lube Pressure Port

NOTE: Number 3 port is also used for creeper dutch pressure wheri engaged if equipped. Ports 3A arrd 3B are for isolating the odd/even clutch pressures.

Fig. 113—View showing location of gage instailation for pressure tests of transmission control valves and clutches.

73

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 151 (Cont.)

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

o Fig. 114~~Transmission clutch pressure check chart used in transmission pressure tests.

74

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 152

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 remove damper driven shaft (1) and coupling (2).

Remove the creeper clutch supply tube (70), if so equipped. Unbolt and remove fii'ont bearing support (5). With front of speed transmission housing facing upw£ird, raise input shaft (IS—Fig. 116) about 1^/4 inches (45 mm) then remove countershaft assembly (CS). Remove input shaft assembly (IS) and then output shaft assembly (OS).

152. If so equipped, refer to Fig. 117 and disassemble countershaft and creeper drive clutch as follows: Remove the two seal rings (32) from rear end of shaft (30). Using a press, remove front bearing cone (2) and creeper driven gear (6) with thrust washers (3) and thrust bearing (4). Remove needle bearing (5), thrust washers (7) and thrust bearing (8). Remove snap ring (13), backing plate (14), eight friction discs (15), seven separator discs (16), reaction plate (17) and three Belleville washers (18). Using compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a press, compress the Belleville washers (11) and remove snap ring (10).

Remove the thirteen Belleville washers and snap ring (12). Use a press to remove carrier assembly (24), spacer (25) and 2nd-4th-6th driven gear (26). Remove gear key (31) and snap rings (27 and 34). Turn shaft over and use a press to remove rear bearing cone (40) and lst-2nd drive gear (39). Remove gear key (31), thrust washer (38) and snap ring (37). Press lst-3rd5th driven gear (35) and 3rd-4th drive gear (36) off rear end of countershaft (30). Bump front (open) end of clutch carrier (24) on a wood block to remove piston (19). Remove teflon ring (21) and "O" ring (20) from piston and teflon ring (22) and "O" ring (23) from clutch carrier.

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. If end plug (28), dowel pin (33), slotted spring pin (29) and coiled spring pin have been removed, install as shown in Fig. 118. If removed, install center gear key (31—Fig. 117). Install snap ring (34). Heat lst-3rd-5th driven gear (35) to a temperature of 350° F (117° C) in a

CREEPER CLUTCH SUPPLY

Fig, 115—Remove the supply tubes shown from transmission control valve.

bearing oven and install over rear of shaft until seated against snap ring.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves when handling heated parts.

Heat the 3rd-4th drive gear (36) to a temperature of 350° F (177° C) and install against lst-3rd-5th driven gear. Install snap ring (37). Flat side of snap rings (34 and 37) should face away from the gears.

Install thrust washer (38) and gear k ^ . Heat lst-2nd drive gear (39) to a temperature of 350° F (177° C) and install against the thrust washer. Heat rear bearing cone (40) to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install against the gear. Install snap ring (27) so that flat side will face away from gear (26) and so that snap ring opening will be 180 degrees away from key groove. Install gear key (31) for gear (26). Heat 2nd4th-6th driven gear (26) to a temperature of 350° F (177° C) and install against snap ring. Install spacer (25). Install "O" rings (23 and 20) in grooves of carrier (24) and piston (19). Soak teflon rings (21 and 22) in hot water to expand the rings, then install over the "O" rings. Allow teflon rings to cool and contract.

Apply petroleum jelly to the rings and install piston, flat side first, into the clutch carrier. Install the carrier on the shaft so the oil hole in the shaft is aligned with the hole in the carrier. Install snap ring (12).

Install the 13 piston return Belleville washers (11) as follows: Refer to Fig. 119 and install first washer concave side down, second washer concave side up, third washer concave side down and so on until all 13 washers are installed. Install a centering sleeve CAS1903-4 over the shaft. Install snap ring (10—Fig. 117) over the centering ring. Align the opening in snap ring with slotted spring pin (29) in the shaft. Install the washer compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the

CS Fig, 116—Front view of speed transmission showing iocation of shafts.

CS. Countershaft

IS. Input shaft

OS. Output shaft

75

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 152 (Cont.)

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

10 11

Fig. 117—Exploded view of countershaft and creeper clutch assembly and related parts.

1. Bearing cup 2. Front bearing cone 3. Thrust washers 4. Thrust hearing 5. Needle hearing 6. Creeper driven gear 7. Thrust washers 8. Thrust bearing 9. Seal ring 10. Snap ring 11. Belleville washers (13)

76

12. Snap ring 13. Snap ring 14. Backing plate 15. Friction discs (8) 16. Separator discs (7) 17. Reaction plate 18. Belleville washers (3) 19. Piston 20. "O"ring 21. Teflon ring

22. Teflon ring 23. "O"ring 24. Clutch carrier 25. Spacer 26. 2nd-4th-6th driven gear 27. Snap ring 28. Plug 29. Slotted spring pin 30. Countershaft

31. Gear keys 32. Seal rings (2) 33. Dowel pin 34. Snap ring 35. lst-3rd-5th driven gear 36. 3rd-4th drive gear 37. Snap ring 38. Thrust washer 39. lst-2nd drive gear

40. Rear bearing cone 41. Bearing cup 42. Shims 43. Rear hearing cage 44. Bolt (6) 45. Union 46. "0" rings 47. Connector 48. "O"ring 49. Pressure tube

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraphs 153-154

shaft and centering sleeve and on top ofthe snap ring.

Install compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 over the shaft. Use a press to press the sleeves down until snap ring is positioned in its groove. Install the three Belleville washers (18) with concave sides facing up.

Install reaction plate (17), flat side up. Soak all fidction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid, then starting with a friction disc (15) and alternating with separator discs (16), install the 8 friction discs and 7 separator discs. Install hacking plate (14), flat side down and install snap ring (13). Install two thrust washers (7) with thrust bearing (8) between washers. Install needle bearing (5) and install new seal ring (9) on creeper driven gear (6). Install creeper driven gear so that splines of gear engages all of the friction discs.

Top of needle bearing (5) will be even with top of gear hub when all discs are engaged on gear splines.

Install thrust washers (3) with thrust bearing between the washers. Heat front bearing cone (2) to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install against thrust washer. Install new seal rings (32). Lay countershaft with creeper drive clutch assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

154. Disassembly and reassembly of the speed transmission input shaft for tractors with or without creeper drive are similar. Any differences v^ll be noted. Damper driven shaft (1—Fig. 121 or 122), coupling (2) and front bearing support (5) were removed in paragraph 151.

Ib disassemble the input shaft, first remove the five seal rings (60). Then, using a suitable puller, remove rear bearing cone (58). Remove spacers (52) and retaining rings (53). Remove thrust washers (50) and thrust bearing (51). Remove lst-3rd-5th drive gear (48) and needle bearing (49). Remove thrust washers (46) and thrust bearing (47). Remove snap ring (45), backing plate (44), seven friction discs (42), six sepa-

Fig. 119—View showing correct stacicing of Beiieviiie washers.

153. On models without creeper drive, refer to Fig. 120 and disassemble and reassemble countershaft assembly. Use a press to remove bearing cones and gears. Heat bearing cones to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and gears to a temperature of 350° F (177° C) before installing on countershaft. Lay countershaft assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

SLOTTED SPRING PIN (1) PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD

COILED SPRING PIN (1)PRESS FLUSH WiTH HAFT

18

3.00 mm (0.118 iNCH)

Fig. 120—Expioded view of countershaft and reiative parts used on tractors without creeper drive.

DOWEL PIN - PRESS IN FLUSH AS SHOWN

PLUG - PRESS IN PLACE AS SHOWN

Fig. 118Sectionai view showing correct instaiiation ofpiug, doweipin, siotted spring pin and coiled spring pin in creeper drive countershaft.

1. Bolt (6) 2. Bearing cage 3. Shim 4. Bearing cup 5. Rear bearing cone 6. lst-2nd drive gear 7. Thrust washer 8. Snap ring 9. 3rd-4th drive gear

10. Gear keys 11. Countershaft 12. lst-3rd-5th driven gear 13. Snap ring 14. Snap ring 15. 2nd-4th-6th driven gear 16. Snap ring 17. Front bearing cone 18. Bearing cup

77

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 154 (Cont.)

61 64 Fig. 121—Expioded view of speed transmission input shaft and the odd and even clutches used on tractors not equipped with creeper speed.

78

1. Damper driven shaft 2. Coupling 3. Oil seal 4. Bolt (11) 5. Front bearing support 6. Bearing cup 7. Front bearing cone 8. Thrust washers 9. Thrust bearing 10. Needle bearing 11. Spacer 12. Needle bearing 13. 2nd-4th-6th drive gear 14. Thrust washers 15. Thrust hearing 16. Seal ring 17. Snap ring 18. Bacldng plate 19. Friction discs (9) 20. Separator discs (8) 21. Reaction plate 22. Snap ring 23. Belleville washers (3) 24. Belleville washers (13) 25. Snap ring 26. Piston 27. "O"ring 28. Teflon ring 29. Teflon ring 30. "O"ring 31. Clutch carrier 32. "O"ring 33. Teflon ring 34. Teflon ring 35. "O^'ring 36. Piston 37. Snap ring 38. Belleville washers (13) 39. Belleville washers (3) 40. Snap ring 41. Reaction plate 42. Friction discs (7) 43. Separator discs (6) 44. Backing plate 45. Snap ring 46. Thrust washers 47. Thrust hearing 48. lst-3rd-5th drive gear 49. Needle bearing 50. Thrust washers 51. Thrust bearing 52. Spacers 53. Retaining rings 54. Coiled spring pin (5) 55. Slotted spring pin (2) 56. Input shaft 57. Dowel pin (4) 58. Rear hearing cone 59. Bearing cup 60. Seal rings (5) 61. Shim 62. "O" rings (6) 63. Oil distributor tubes (3) 64. Rear bearing cage 65. Bolt (4)

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 154 (Cont.)

rator discs (43) and reaction plate (41). Remove the three Belleville washers (39).

Use a puller £uid remove front bearing cone (7). If so equipped, use a puller to remove creeper drive gear (67—Fig. 122) and snap ring (66). On all models, remove thrust washers (8) and thrust bearing (9).

Remove 2nd-4th-6th drive gear (13) and needle bearings (10 and 12) with spacer (11). Remove thrust washers (14) and thrust bearing (15). Remove snap ring (17), backing plate (18), nine friction discs (19), eight separator discs (20) and reaction plate (21).

Remove the three Belleville washers (23). Using compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a press, compress the Belleville washers (24) and remove snap ring (22). Remove the thirteen Belleville

washers and snap ring (25). Remove snap rings (40 and 37) and thirteen Belleville washers (38) from opposite side of carrier (31) in same manner. Press carrier off front end of input shaft (56). Bump clutch carrier (31) against a wood block to remove pistons (26 and 36). Remove teflon rings (28, 29, 33 and 34) and "O" rings (27, 30, 32 and 35) from pistons and carrier.

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other deimage. If dowel pins (57), slotted spring pins (55) or coiled spring pins (54) have been removed, install as shown in Fig. 123. Install new "O" rings (27, 30, 32 and 35—Fig. 121 or 122) in grooves in carrier and pistons. Soak teflon rings (28, 29, 33 and 34) in hot water to expand them. Install

"54

Fig. 122—Expioded view of speed transmission input shaft and odd and even dutches used on tractors with creeper drive. Refer to Fig. 121 for iegend except for the foiiowing: 66. Retaining ring 67. Creeper drive gear 68. "O"ring

69. Elbow fitting 70. Creeper clutch supply tube

71. Seal ring 72. Seal ring

79

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 155-156 teflon rings over the "O" rings. Allow rings to cool and contract. Apply petroleum jelly to the rings and install pistons, flat side first, into carrier. Install snap ring (37) in its groove on input shaft (56). Then, aligning etch mark on face of carrier (31) and etch mark on front end of input shaft, press carrier on shaft until seated against snap ring. Turn unit over and install snap ring (25) against carrier. Install the 13 piston return Belleville washers (24) as follows: Refer to Fig. 119 and install first washer concave side down, second washer concave side up, third washer concave side down and so on until all 13 washers are installed. Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft. Install snap ring (22—Fig. 121 or 122) over the centering sleeve. Align opening in snap ring with slotted spring pin in the shaft. Install the washer compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the shaft and centering sleeve and on top of the snap ring. Install compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 over the shaft. Use a press to press the sleeves down until snap ring is positioned in its groove. Install Belleville washers (38) and snap ring (40) in opposite side of clutch carrier in same manner. Install the three Belleville washers (23) with concave side facing up. Install reaction plate (21), flat side up. Soak all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid, then starting with a friction disc (19) and alternating with separator discs (20), install the nine friction discs and eight separator discs. Install backing plate (18), flat side down and install snap ring (17). Install the three Belleville washers, clutch pack and snap ring (39 through 45) in the same manner. Rear clutch pack uses seven friction discs and six separator discs. Install thrust washers (14) and thrust bearing (15) between the washers. Install needle bearing (12), spacer (11) and second needle bearing (10). Install new seal ring (16) on 2nd-4th-6th drive gear (13). Install 2nd-4th-6th drive gear so that splines of gear engages all of the friction discs (19). Install thrust washers (8) with

SLOTTED SPRING PIN (2) PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD

COILED SPRING PIN (5) PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD

\

DOWEL PIN (4)-PRESS IN FLUSH AS SHOWN

Fig. 123—Sectionai view showing correct installation of dowei pins, slotted spring pins and coiled spring pins in speed transmission Input shaft.

80

thrust bearing (9) between the washers. On models so equipped, install snap ring (66—Fig. 122) and install creeper drive gear (67), long hub first on the shaft. Press gear into position. On all models, heat front bearing cone (7—Fig. 121 or 122) to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves when handling heated parts.

Install thrust washers (46) with thrust bearing between the washers. Install needle bearing (49) and install a new seal ring on lst-3rd-5th drive gear (48).

Install the lst-3rd-5th drive gear so that splines of gear engages all of the friction discs (42). Install thrust washers (50) with thrust bearing (51) between the washers. Install first spacer (52), two retaining rings (53) and second spacer (52). Heat rear bearing cone (58) to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft. Install the five new seal rings (60).

Lay input shaft assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

155. Ib disassemble the speed transmission output shaft front clutches (reverse and 5th clutches), refer to Fig. 124 and proceed as follows: Remove the four seal rings (46) from front of output shaft (51). Using a suitable puller, remove reverse driven gear (6) with thrust washers (3) thrust bearing (4) and front bearing cone (2). Remove needle bearing (5), thrust washers (7) and thrust bearing (8). Remove snap ring (10), backing plate (11), seven friction discs (12), six separator discs (13), reaction plate (14) and three Belleville washers (16). Using compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a press, compress Belleville washers (17) and remove snap ring (15).

Remove the eleven piston return Belleville washers and snap ring (18). Use a screwdriver to remove snap ring (38) out of its groove in rear of clutch carrier (24).

Then, using a suitable puller as shown in Fig. 125, remove front clutch carrier assembly (24—Fig. 124).

Remove the three Belleville washers (32), backing plate (34), seven friction discs (35), six separator discs (36), reaction plate (37) and snap ring (38). Using a compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a press, compress Belleville washers (31) and remove snap ring (33). Remove the thirteen piston return Belleville washers and snap ring (30). Remove the thrust washers (40) and thrust bearing (41). Remove 5th-6th driven gear (42), needle bearing (43), thrust bearing (44) and spacer (45). Bump open ends of clutch carrier (24) on a wood block to remove pistons (19 and 29). Remove teflon rings (21, 22, 26 and 27) and "O" rings (20, 23, 25 and 28) from pistons and carrier.

156. Tb disassemble the speed transmission output shaft rear clutches (1st speed and 3rd speed), refer to

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Fig. 126 and proceed as follows: With front clutches removed as in paragraph 155, remove the 3rd-4th driven gear (45) with seal ring (42). Remove needle bearing (46), thrust washers (43) and thrust bearing (44). Remove snap ring (41), backing plate (40), eight fi:iction discs (39), seven separator discs (38), reaction plate (37) and three Belleville washers (35). Using compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a

Paragraph 156 (Cont.) press, compress Belleville washers (34) and remove snap ring (36). Remove the thirteen Belleville washers and snap ring (33). Turn shaft over and use a puller to remove rear bearing cone (5). Remove thrust washers (6) and thrust bearing (7). Remove lst-2nd driven gear (9) with seal ring (12), needle bearing (8), thrust washers (10) and thrust bearing (11). Remove snap ring (13), backing plate (14), ten friction discs

42

Fig. 124—Expioded view of speed transmission output shaft and front dutches (reverse and 5th speed). Refer also to Fig, 126 for exploded view of rear clutches.

1. Bearing cup 2. Front bearing cone 13. Separator discs (6) 22. Tfeflonring 32. Belleville washers 42. 5th-6th driven gear 3. Thrust washers 14. Reaction plate 23. "O"ring (3) 43. Needle bearing 4. Thrust bearing 15. Snap ring 24. Front clutch carrier 33. Snap ring 44. Thrust bearing 5. Needle bearing 16. Belleville washers 25. "O"ring 34. Reaction plate 45. Spacer 6. Reverse driven gear (3) 26. Ifefionring 35. Friction discs (7) 46. Seal rings (4) 7. Thrust washers 17. Belleville washers 27. Tbflon ring 36. Separator discs (6) 47. Dowel pin (1) 8. Thrust bearing (11) 28. "Oaring 37. Backing plate 48. Dowel pins (3) 9. Seal ring 18. Snap ring 29. Piston 38. Snap ring 49. Coiled spring pins (5) 10. Snap ring 19. Piston 30. Snap ring 39. Seal ring 50. Slotted spring pins 11. Backing plate 20. "O"ring 31. Belleville washers 40. Thrust washers (4) 12. Friction discs (7) 21. Teflon ring (13) 41. Thrust bearing 51. Output shaft

81

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 157-158 (16), nine separator discs (15), reaction plate (17) and three Belleville washers (19). Using compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 or equivalent and a press, compress piston return Belleville washers (20) and remove snap ring (18). Remove the thirteen Belleville washers and snap ring (21). Press rear clutch carrier (27) off rear end of output shaft (51). Bump open ends of clutch carrier on a wood block to remove pistons (22 and 32). Remove teflon rings (24, 25, 29 and 30) and "O" rings (23, 26, 28 and 31) from pistons and carrier.

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. If dowel pins, slotted spring pins or coiled spring pins were removed from output shaft, reinstall as shown in Fig. 127.

157. To reassemble the output shaft rear clutches, refer to Fig. 126 and install new "O" rings (23, 26, 28 and 31) in grooves in pistons (22 and 32) and rear clutch carrier (27). Soak teflon rings (24, 25, 29 and 30) in hot water to expand the rings, then install them over the "O" rings. Lubricate the rings with petroleum jelly and install piston assemblies, flat side first, in carrier. Install snap ring (33) in the third snap ring groove from rear end of output shaft (51). Position the snap ring so the slotted spring pin is between ends of snap ring. Align the etch mark on front face of rear clutch carrier with the etch mark on rear end of output shaft and install carrier from rear of shaft, against the installed snap ring. Install snap ring (21) against rear side of carrier. Install the 13 piston return Belleville washers (20) as follows: Refer to Fig. 119 and install first washer concave side down, second washer concave side up, third washer concave side down and so on until all 13 washers are installed.

Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft.

Install snap ring (18—Fig. 126) over the centering sleeve. Align opening in snap ring with slotted spring pin in the shaft. Install the washer compression

Fig. 125—View showing front clutch carrier being removed from speed transmission output shaft.

82

CASE/INTERNATIONAL sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the shaft and centering sleeve and on top of the snap ring. Install compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 over the shaft. Use a press to press the sleeve down until snap ring is positioned in its groove. Install the three Belleville washers (19) concave side up and the reaction plate (17) flat side up.

Soak all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid.

Starting with a friction disc (16) and alternating with separator discs (15), install the ten friction discs and nine separator discs. Install backing plate (14) flat side down and install snap ring (13). Install thrust washers (10) vdth thrust bearing (11) between washers and install needle bearing (8). Using new seal ring (12) on lst-2nd driven gear (9), install gear so that splines of gear engages all of the friction discs (16).

Install thrust washers (6) with thrust bearing (7) between washers. Heat rear bearing cone (5) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install bearing.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves when handling heated parts.

Using the special tools, install front 13 piston return Belleville washers (34) and snap ring (36) in same manner as rear set. Install three Belleville washers (35) concave side up and reaction plate (37) flat side up. Soak all friction discs (39) in clean HyTran Plus fluid. Starting with a friction disc (39) and alternating with separator discs (38), install the eight friction discs and seven separator discs. Install backing plate (40) flat side down and install snap ring (41).

Install thrust washers (43) with thrust bearing (44) between washers and install needle bearing (46).

Using new seal ring (42) on 3rd-4th driven gear (45), install gear so that splines of gear engages all of the friction discs (39).

158. With rear clutches installed on output shaft as outlined in paragraph 157, refer to Fig. 124 and assemble front clutches (reverse and 5th speed). Install new "O" rings (20, 23, 25 and 28) in grooves in pistons (19 and 29) and front clutch carrier (24). Soak teflon rings (21,22, 26 and 27) in hot water to expand the rings. Install the rings over the "O" rings and allow to cool and contract. Lubricate the rings v^th petroleum jelly and install pistons flat side first in the clutch carrier. Install spacer (45), thrust bearing (44) and needle bearing (43) over front end of shaft. Using a new seal ring (39) on 5th-6th driven gear (42), install the gear over the needle bearing (43). Install thrust washers (40) with thrust bearing (41) between washers. Install snap ring (33) in groove next to thrust washer (40) so that gap in snap ring is centered over slotted spring pin in shaft. Install the 13 piston return Belleville washers (31) as follows: Install first washer concave side up, second washer concave side down, third washer concave side up and so on until

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 all 13 washers are installed. Install snap ring (30) over shaft so snap ring lays on top of last Belleville washer (31). Install the washer compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the Belleville washers. Install compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 over the previously installed sleeve. Use a press and apply down pressure on sleeves until snap ring (30) is positioned in its groove. Place snap ring (38) over shaft and lay it on gear (42). Install backing plate (37) flat side up. Soak all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Starting with a friction disc (35) and alternating with separa-

Paragraph 158 (Cont.) tor discs (36), install the seven friction discs and six separator discs over splines of gear (42). Install reaction plate (34) flat side down and install the three Belleville washers (32) concave side down. Align the etch mark on front face of front clutch carrier (24) with the etch mark on front end of output shaft (51) and install the carrier. Aligning the etch marks will align the oil holes in shaft and carrier. Use a screwdriver to install snap ring (38) in its groove inside the carrier. Install snap ring (18) over the shaft. Using washer compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 and compres-

51

10

Fig, 126—Exploded view of speed transmission output shaft rear dutches (1st speed and 5th speed). Refer to Fig. 124 for exploded view of front dutches.

1. Bolt (4) 12. Seal ring 2. Bearing case 13. Snap ring 31. "O"ring 21. Snap ring 3. Shim 14. Backing plate 22. Piston 32. Piston 39. Friction discs (7) 4. Bearing cup 15. Separator discs (9) 23. "O"ring 33. Snap ring 40. Backing plate 5. Rear bearing cone 16. Friction discs (10) 24. Teflon ring 34. Belleville washers 41 Snap ring 6. Thrust washers 17. Reaction plate 25. Teflon ring (13) 42. Seal ring 7. Thrust bearing 18. Snap ring 26. "O"Hng 35. Belleville washers 43 Thrust washers 8. Needle bearing 19. Belleville washers 27. Rear clutch carrier (3) 44. Thrust bearing 9. lst-2nd driven gear (3) 28. "(F ring 36. Snap ring 45. 3rd-4th driven gear 10. Thrust washers 20. Belleville washers 29. Teflon ring 37. Reaction plate 46. Needle bearing 11. Thrust bearing (13) 30. Ti»non ring 38. Separator discs (8) 51. Output shaft

83

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 159 sion sleeve CAS-1903-3 and a press, apply down pressure on sleeves until snap ring is installed in its groove. Install the 11 piston return Belleville washers (17) as follows: Install first washer concave side down, second washer concave side up, third washer concave side down and so on until all 11 washers are installed.

Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft.

Install snap ring (15) over the centering sleeve. Align opening in snap ring with slotted spring pin in the shaft. Install the washer compression sleeve CAS1903-5 over the shaft and centering sleeve and on top COILED SPRING PIN (5) PRESS FLUSH .WITH SHAFT OD

of the snap ring. Install compression sleeve CAS1903-3 over the shaft. Use a press and apply down pressure on sleeves until snap ring (15) is positioned in its groove. Install the three Belleville washers (16) concave sides up and reaction plate (14) flat side up.

Soak all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid.

Starting with a friction disc (12) and alternating with separator discs (13), install the seven friction discs and six separator discs. Install backing plate (11) flat side down and install snap ring (10). Install thrust washers (7) with thrust bearing (8) between washers and install needle bearing (5). Using new seal ring (9) on reverse driven gear (6), install gear so that splines of gear engages all of the friction discs (12). Install thrust washers (3) with thrust bearing (4) between washers. Heat front bearing cone (2) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.

^ = WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves when handling heated parts.

DOWEL PIN (4) - PRESS IN FLUSH AS SHOWN

SLOTTED SPRING PIN (4) PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD

Fig. 127—Sectionai view showing correct Instailation of dowei pins, coiied spring pins and slotted spring pins in output shaft.

Install the four seal rings (46) in grooves in output shaft.

159. To air check the clutches on input shaft, output shaft and countershaft, apply compressed air with an air gun to the various oil ports in shafts. If a clutch fails to move under air pressure, it would indicate

3R0 SPEED HYDRAULIC CLUTCH PACK - (8) FRICTIOI^ DISCS,{7) SEPARATOR DISCS AND (13) BELLEVILLE RETURN SPRINGS..

1ST SPEED HYDRAULIC CLUTCH PACK - (10) FRICTION DISCS.fQ) SEPARATOR DISCS AND (13) BELLEVILLE RETURN SPRINGS.

REVERSE SPEED HYDRAULIC CLUTCH PACK - (7) FRICTION DISCS,(6) SEPARATOR DISCS AND (11) BELLEVILLE RETURN SPRINGS. 5TH SPEED HYDRAULIC CLUTCH PACK - (7) FRICTION DISCS.(6) SEPARATOR DISCS AND (13) BELLEVILLE RETURN SPRINGS. SPEED TRANSMISSION OUTPUT SHAFT

FRONT BEARING CONE REAR BEARING CONE

(5TH-6TH) SPEED DRIVEN GEAR (1ST-2ND) SPEED DRIVEN GEAR (3RD-4TH) SPEED DRIVEN GEAR

Fig, 126Sectional

84

REVERSE SPEED DRIVEN GEAR

FRONT CLUTCH PLATE CARRIER

view ofassembied speed transmission output shaft and 1st, 3rd, 5th and reverse dutches.

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 160

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 leaking seals on that clutch piston. Disassemble and reseal as required.

160, Before installing the speed transmission shafts, renew bearing cups (15,16 and 20—Fig. 129) infi:'ontbearing support (19 or 20). Do not install new oil seal (18) at this time. Unbolt and remove rear bearing cages (2, 6 and 10), keeping shim packs (3, 7 and 11) with their respective cage. Renew bearing cups (4,8 and 12) as required. Inspect needle bearing (13) for fi'ont drive axle drive shaft and renew if necessary.

Reinstall bearing cages (2, 6 and 10) with original shim packs (3, 7 and 11), but do not tighten bolts (1, 5 and 9) at this time. Install the output shaft assembly in transmission bousing. Lubricate seal rings on

rear of input shaft and inside of bearing cage (6), then install input shaft assembly if equipped with creeper drive, lubricate seal rings on rear of countershaft, then on all models, install countershaft assembly.

NOTE: Raise the input shaft approximately IV4 inches (45 mm), install countershaft so gears are engaged, then lower both shafts into position.

Apply Loctite 515 gasket eliminator to flange of fi:-ont bearing support (19 or 20). Install support and tighten bolts (17) to a torque of 69-78 ft.-lbs. (94-106 N.m). Lubricate lips of new oil seal (18) and carefully install seal over end of input shaft with lips of seal facing inward. Drive seal in until flush with top of bore in bearing support.

14

Fig. 129—Speed transmission with front bearing support and rear bearing cages removed.

1. Bolt (4) 2. Bearing cage (output shaft) 3. Shim 4. Bearing cup 5. Bolt (4)

6. Bearing cage (input shaft) 7. Shim 8. Bearing cup 9. Bolt (6)

10. Bearing cage (countershaft) 11. Shim 12. Bearing cup 13. Needle hearing

14. Speed transmission 15. Bearing cup 16. Bearing cup 17. Bolt (11) 18. Oil seal

19. Front hearing support (w/creeper) 20. Bearing cup 21. Front bearing support (w/o creeper)

85

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 160 (Cont.)

Turn speed transmission so rear end is facing upward. Remove bearing cages (2, 6 and 10) and shims (3,7 and 11). Install bearing cages without shims and install two opposite bolts in each bearing cage.

Tighten the two opposite bolts in each cage alternately to a torque of 4.0 ft.-lbs. (5.6 N.m). Rotate shaft while tightening bolts. Using a feeler gage, measure clearance next to each of the two bolts. Average the two measurements and add the following dimension to determine shim pack thickness for each shaft.

Input shaft without creeper drive 0.009 in.

(0.229 mm) Input shaft with creeper drive 0.008 in.

(0.203 mm) Countershaft without creeper drive 0.014 in.

(0.356 mm) Countershaft with creeper drive 0.008 in.

(0.203 mm) Output shaft 0.014 in.

(0.356 mm) Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.004, 0.005,0.012 and 0.030 inch (0.08,0.10,0.12,0.30 and 0.76 mm). Remove cages, select correct shim packs and reinstall cages with shims. Tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 40-45 ft.-lbs. (54-61 N.m). Check end play of shafts with a dial indicator, use a pry bar to raise and lower the shaft. End play of shafts must be within the range of 0.0012-0.005 inch (0.03-0.13 mm). If not, add or remove shims to obtain the correct end play.

Install the creeper clutch supply tube at front and oil pressure tube at rear of speed transmission if equipped with creeper drive. On models so equipped, check the front drive axle drive shaft bearings (Fig. 130) as follows: Remove oil seal (13), then remove

U Fig. 130—Exploded view of front drive axle drive shaft removed from speed transmission.

1. Shaft 2. "O"ring 8. Bearing cup 3. Cage 9. Front bearing cone 4. Spacer 10. Shim 5. Rear bearing cone 11. Spacer 6. Bearing cup 12. Snap ring 7. Retaining ring 13. Oil seal

86

CASE/INTERNATIONAL snap ring (12), spacer (11) and shims (10). Press shaft (1) out through rear of cage (3). Remove bearing cone (9) from front of cage. Use a puller to remove bearing cup (8), then remove retaining ring (7). Drive bearing cup (6), be£iring cone (5) and spacer (4) out front of cage.

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage and renew as necessary. Reassemble as follows: Install spacer (4) over front end of shaft. Heat bearing (5) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install bearing cone on shaft.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves when handling heated parts.

Install shaft through front of cage. Press bearing cup (6) in position on bearing cone (5). Install retaining ring (7), then press shaft forward to seat bearing cup against retaining ring. Press bearing cup (8) in against retaining ring. Press the front bearing cone (9) into the cup until a rolling torque of 13.0-19.5 in.-lbs. (1.5-2.2 N.m) is reached. Install snap ring (12), flat side toward inside. Measure the distance from front face of bearing cone to front face of snap ring.

This measurement minus 0.008 inch (0.2 mm) will be the correct overall measurement of spacer (11), snap ring (12) and shim pack (10) to be installed. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.010, 0.012 and 0.016 inch (0.25,0.30 and 0.41 mm). Install new oil seal (13) with lips toward inside of cage. Front face of seal must be flush with front face of cage. Install the shaft and cage assembly into the speed transmission housing.

Install snap ring on rear of shaft.

Install input shaft coupling and damper driven shaft, long splined end flrst. Using new "O" rings on the three oil distributor tubes, lubricate "O" rings with petroleum jelly and install in input shaft rear bearing cage. Apply Loctite 515 gasket eliminator on mounting flange of lube manifold. Install lube manifold and tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 40-45 ft.-lbs. (54-61 N.m).

Apply a light coat of molydisulfide grease on splines of damper driven shaft. Attach a hoist to transmission housing and remove from engine stand. Reinstall speed transmission to flywheel housing. Tighten bolts to the following torques: 12 mm diameter (grade 10.9) 99-111 ft.-lbs.

(134-151 N.m) 16 mm diameter (grade 8.8) 173-192 ft.-lbs.

(235-260 N.m) 16 mm diameter (grade 10.9) 247-277 ft.-lbs.

(335-375 N.m) 20 mm diameter (grade 10.9) 479-538 ft.-lbs.

(650-730 N.m) 22 mm diameter (grade 10.9) 653-734 ft.-lbs.

(885-995 N.m) Refer to paragraph 150 and reassemble tractor by reversing the disassembly procedures. Reinstall con-

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 trol valve assembly as outlined in paragraph 148. Use a new gasket between speed and range transmission housings. Use guide studs to align the transmission housings. Tighten M16 x 55 mm bolts to a torque of 173-192 ft.-lbs. (235-260 N.m) and M20 x 60 mm bolts to a torque of 420-476 ft.-lbs. (570-645 N.m).

When attaching front of cab, rotate square plates on cab mounting studs until plates bottom on studs.

Tighten inside nut on lower part of studs to a torque of 35-45 ft.-lbs. (47-61 N.m). Tighten jam nut to inside nut to a torque of 136-153 ft.-lbs. (184-207 N.m).

Lower cab onto cab mounts. Install upper nuts and washers on the studs. Tighten upper nuts to a torque of 140-180 ft.-lbs. (190-244 N.m).

Remove split stands and rear housing handler. \N^th tractor reassembled, fill transmission to correct level with Hy-Tran Plus fluid. System capacity is 202 U.S. quarts (191 L). Bleed fuel system as in paragraph 55 and adjust linkage to transmission as outlined in paragraphs 134, 135, 136 and 137. Check transmission pressures as in paragraph 149.

RANGE TRANSMISSION The range transmission contains the input shaft with high and medium range clutches, countershaft with low range clutch and if so equipped, front drive axle shaft and clutch. The master clutch is also located at front end of input shaft.

All Models 161. R&R AND OVERHAUL. To remove the range transmission assembly for service, proceed as follows: Place transmission shift lever in PARK position and block rear wheels securely. Remove front end weights, if so equipped. Remove drain plug £uid drain transmission fluid. Remove battery cover and disconnect battery cables. Remove cab floor mat, then unbolt and remove access panel from cabfloor.Remove speed transmission lube supply tube and lube manifold supply tube. Disconnect shift control valve tube, brake tube and drain tube from pto valve. If so equipped, disconnect creeper lube tube from top of range transmission. Disconnect oil cooler tube and steering supply tube from bulkhead fittings. Disconnect left and right brake supply tubes from bulkhead fittings.

On left side of tractor, remove batteries, then unbolt and remove battery box and cab steps as an assembly.

Clamp off fuel hose between main tank and auxiliary fuel tank. Drain auxiliary tank, place a floor jack under tank, then unbolt and remove auxiliary tank and support. On right side of tractor, unbolt and remove lower cab trim, transmission filter cover and cover supports. Disconnect true ground speed wiring

Paragraph 161 harness, then unbolt and remove the sensor from transmission housing. Loosen bolts and remove transmission filter screen cover, locator plug and filter screen. Unbolt and remove filter screen housing, container, gasket and "O" ring. Working through the filter screen opening, disconnect the three internal range transmission clutch supply tubes at the 90 degree elbows. Disconnect wiring from oil filter pressure switch and oil temperature sending unit. Remove hose from gear pump to hydraulic filter base.

Disconnect oil cooler return tube from hydraulic filter base. Remove hose from remote valves to filter base and reservoir return tube to filter base. Disconnect inlet tube from hydraulic pump. Unbolt and remove hydraulic filter and pump inlet tube. Disconnect and remove steering signal tube from bulkhead and connector under hydraulic pump. Disconnect wiring from engine rpm sensor on gear pump. Disconnect the park brake cable, variable flow and control cables from remote control valves. Disconnect the pto control valve cable. Disconnect cab ground strap from hydraulic pump and wiring harness from cab floor.

Remove nuts from rear cab mounting studs. Remove drawbar pivot pin and drawbar.

Install splitting stands (17-526A or equivalent) under tractor and bolt adapter plates to the frame side rails. Use a jack and wood block to support speed transmission housing. Raise hood and lock in raised position. Install cab supports and raise rear of cab to clear cab mount studs. Place rear housing handler under rear housing and bolt to drawbar support.

Unbolt range transmission housing from speed transmission housing and install guide studs. Separate front half of tractor from rear half. Cab will stay with front half.

NOTE: The master clutch can be removed at this time if desired.

Remove the pximp signal tubes, pump drive lube tube, pto valve inlet tube, gear pump to oil cooler tube, left and right brake tubes to rear housings and differential lock supply tube. Remove the pto valve with regulated supply lines to transmission control valve, hitch control valve and front drive axle solenoid valve.

Attach a lifting strap and hoist to pump assembly, unbolt Eind remove the pumps and drive assembly.

Remove valve tubes, then remove remote valves and the steering priority valve. Unbolt and remove park lock assembly. Remove lube tubes as required, then unbolt and remove lube manifold. Disconnect wires from transmission speed sensor, differential lock solenoid valve and front drive axle solenoid valve. Disconnect tubes, then unbolt and remove hitch valve.

On left side of housing, unbolt and remove access cover, bracket and solenoid valve.

Working through park lock opening, move snap ring and spacer forward on bevel drive pinion shaft.

87

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 162 Attach a lift chain at both rear sides and to front of range transmission housing. Attach chains to a hoist and support the transmission. Unbolt range transmission from rear frame and move constant mesh gear forward on bevel pinion shaft as housings are separated. With range transmission removed, remove constant mesh gear through park lock cover opening.

Attach right side of range transmission housing to an engine stand. Remove the transmission speed sensor from the housing.

162. Ib remove the master clutch, first remove lubrication tube from inside the range transmission input shaft. Remove the Allen screw and clutch retainer from front end of shaft. Refer to Fig. 131 and remove master clutch as shown.

Ib disassemble the master clutch, refer to Fig. 132 and remove snap ring (1). Remove reaction plate (2), nine friction discs (3) and nine separator discs (4).

Move snap ring (7) out of groove in clutch carrier, then remove clutch hub (5). Remove retaining ring (10) from clutch carrier. Remove retaining ring (11) from inside clutch hub (5), then remove thrust washers (8) and thrust bearing (9). Remove snap ring (7) and seal ring (6) from inside the clutch hub. Use a bridge plate and press to compress springs (15) and remove snap ring (12) from its groove. Release the press and remove the snap ring. Remove spring plate (13) with guide pins (14), then remove springs (15). Remove clutch piston (16). Remove teflon seal rings (18 and 20) and "O" rings (17 and 19) from clutch carrier.

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage and renew parts as required. Guide pins (14) are only available with spring plate (13). Springs (15) should have a free length of 1.41 inches (35.28 mm) and should test 25 lbs. (111.25 N) when compressed to a length of 0.91 inch (23.12 mm).

CASE/INTERNATIONAL aid in installation. Install teflon seal rings over "O" rings. Lubricate seal rings with petroleum jelly and install piston (16), tang side out. Apply petroleum jelly to clutch springs (15) and install springs over guide pins on spring plate (13). Install plate and spring assembly into carrier and against the piston.

Put snap ring (12) on top end of the carrier, flat side up. Use a bridge plate and press to compress springs (15). Install snap ring (12) into groove in carrier.

Install new seal ring (6) inside clutch hub. Place snap ring (7) inside clutch hub. Install thrust washers (8) with thrust bearing (9) between washers and install retaining ring (11) on clutch hub. Install retaining ring (10) on clutch carrier and install clutch hub into clutch carrier. Working through hole in clutch hub, install snap ring (7) into groove on clutch carrier. Soak all friction discs in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Install a separator disc (4), then a friction disc (3) and alternating the discs, install all discs. Install reaction plate (2) flat side down and install snap ring (1). Lay

Ib reassemble the master clutch, install new "O" rings (17 and 19) in grooves in carrier (21). Soak teflon seal rings (18 and 20) in hot water to expand them for

Fig. 131—View showing removal of master dutch from front of range transmission.

88

Fig. 132—Exploded view of master dutch used on all models.

1. Snap ring 2. Reaction plate 12. Snap ring 3. Friction discs (9) 13. Spring plate 4. Separator discs (9) 14. Guide pins (16) 5. Clutch hub 15. Springs (16) 6. Seal ring 16. Piston 7. Snap ring 17. "O*'ring 8. Thrust washers 18. Ifeflon ring 9. Thrust bearing 19. "O**ring 10. Retaining ring 20. Teflon ring 11. Retaining ring 21. Clutch carrier

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 master clutch assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

163. Tb remove the range transmission shafts, refer to Fig. 133 and proceed as follows: Turn transmission housing so that front end is pointing upward. Remove snap ring from front end of input shaft and remove seal ring (7) from bearing cage (5). Remove retaining bolts (6) and remove input shaft bearing cage (5) with bearing cup (4) and shims (3). Remove bolts (15), then remove countershaft bearing cage (16) with bearing cup (17) and shim (18). Pump drive gear (10) and bearing (13) will also be removed with bearing cage (16). Keep shims (3 and 18) with their bearing cages.

Unbolt and remove front bearing support (1). Using a lift strap and hoist, remove countershaft assembly first, then the input shaft assembly. Remove the bevel pinion constant mesh gear from the housing.

If so equipped, remove front drive axle drive clutch and shaft assembly as follows: Remove inlet fitting and inlet tube for the clutch shaft bearing cage (34— Fig. 134). Unbolt and remove clutch shield from rear cover (19), then unbolt and remove front and rear upper gear shields for gear (24). Unbolt bearing cage (34) from range transmission housing and withdraw front drive axle drive shaft and clutch assembly.

164. TD disassemble the front drive axle drive shaft and clutch assembly, refer to Fig. 134 and remove "O" ring (35) from bearing cage (34). Remove snap ring (39) and back-up ring (38). Unbolt front gear shield (22) and remove snap ring (20) from its groove. Move gear (24) forward on shaft (26) and unbolt rear gear shield (33). Using a suitable puller, remove bearing cage (34) and rear bearing cone (37). Remove rear gear shield (33) and two seal rings (40). Use a puller to remove center bearing cone (30) and backup ring (29). Remove gear retaining snap ring (28). Turn shaft assembly over and remove clutch carrier (1). Remove retaining ring (3), then remove hub (8) with clutch assembly. Remove clutch shield rear cover (19) and gear retaining snap ring (20). Remove front gear shield (22) and driven gear (24). Remove two seal rings (25) from shaft. Place compression sleeve CAS1903-3 over piston spring retainer (16). Use a press and apply down pressure on sleeve to compress Belleville washer (14). Working through slot in compression sleeve, remove retaining ring (18) from its groove in hub (8). Remove compression sleeve and snap ring. Remove shims (17), spring retainer (16) with steel "O" ring (15), Belleville washer (14) and piston (13). Turn unit over and remove snap ring (4), backing plate (5), eight friction discs (6) and seven separator discs (7).

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage and renew as required. If screw (27)

Paragraphs 163-164 was removed to clean ports in shaft (26), apply Loctite 262 to threads of screw and tighten screw to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs. (30-35 N.m). If needle bearing (2) is being renewed in carrier (1), press new bearing in from inside of carrier to a depth of 0.256 inch (6.5 mm) below flush with face of bore.

Th reassemble the shaft and clutch assembly, install new "O" rings (9 and 12) in grooves in hub (8).

Soak teflon seal rings (10 and 11) in hot water to expand them, then install them over "O" rings. Soak all friction discs (6) in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid.

Starting with a friction disc and alternating with separator discs (7), install all eight friction discs and separator disc. Install backing plate (5) and snap ring (4). Lubricate teflon rings (10 and 11) with petroleum jelly, then install piston (13) on the hub. Install snap ring (28) and driven gear (24) over front of shaft so that long side of gear hub is to front. Install gear shield (22) and snap ring (20). Install the hub, clutch plates and piston assembly in carrier so piston is facing up. Do not install belleville washer (14) at this time. Install piston spring retainer (16) with steel "O" ring (15) on piston with steel "O" ring down. Install retaining ring (18). Place assembly in a press with clutch carrier down. Use a cross block and spacers on spring retainer and apply down pressure of 2090-

Flg. 133—Exploded view of front bearing support and bearing cages removed from range transmission.

1. Front bearing support 2. Bolt (6) 11. Seal ring 3. Shims 12. Snap ring 4. Bearing cup 13. Ball bearing 5. Input shaft bearing cage 14. Snap ring 6. Bolt (3) 15. Bolt (4) 7. Cage seal ring 16. Countershaft bearing cage 8. Clutch tube (medium) 17. Bearing cup 9. Clutch tube (high) 18. Shim 10. Pump drive gear 19. Clutch tube (low)

89

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 164 (Cont.)

2610 lbs. (9300-11600 N) on cross block to compress the clutch pack. Measure the distance from top of spring retainer to top of retaining ring (18). This (^stance minus 0.065 inch (1.65 mm) is the total thickness of retaining ring (18) and shim pack (17) to be installed. Remove cross block, retaining ring (18) and piston spring retainer (16). Install clutch plate aligning tool CAS-1908 through clutch hub from piston side until seated. Install Belleville washer (14)

CASE/INTERNATIONAL with concave side toward piston. Install spring retainer (16) steel "O" ring side down. Install selected shim pack (17) and position retaining ring (18) on top of clutch hub. Use cross block and press to compress clutch plates and install retaining ring in groove in hub. Remove aligning tool. Install the two seal rings (25) on the shaft and lubricate the rings with petroleum jelly. Remove carrier (1) from hub assembly, carefully install hub assembly, piston side first, on the

Fig. 134^-Exploded view of front drive axle drive clutch and shaft assembly used on models so equipped.

1. Clutch csurrier 25. Seal rings 33. Rear gear shield 2. Needle bearing 18. Retaining ring 10. Ifeflon ring 26. Shaft 34. Bearing cage 3. Retaining ring 19. Clutch shield 11. Ifeflon ring 27. Allen head screw 35. "O"ring rear cover 4. Snap ring 12. "Oaring 28. Snap ring 36. Bearing cup 20. Snap ring 5. Backing plate 13. Piston 29. Back-up ring 37. Rear bearing cone 6. Friction discs (8) 21. Nut (2) 14. Belleville washer 30. Center bearing cone 38. Back-up ring 22. Front gear shield 7. Separator discs (7) 15. Steel «0" ring 31. Bearing cup 39. Snap ring 23. Screw (5) 8. Clutch hub 16. Spring retainer 32. Bolt (5) 40. Seal rings 24. Driven gear 9. "Oaring 17. Shim

90

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 shaft and secure with retaining ring (3). Install clutch carrier over clutch plates. Install back-up ring (29) over rear end of shaft. Heat center bearing cone (30) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.

WARNiNG: Aiways wear heat protective gloves when handiing heated parts.

Paragraph 165 (38). Remove the 13 piston return Belleville washers (39). Use a puller and remove rear bearing cone (52).

Remove snap ring (51) and high range clutch carrier (50). Remove snap ring (44) and seal ring (53). Bump carriers (4 and 50) on a wood block to remove pistons (7 and 47). Remove teflon rings (5 and 9) and "O" rings (6 and 8) from piston (7) and ceurier (4) and teflon rings (46 and 48) and "O" rings (45 and 49) from piston (47) and carrier (50).

Install new bearing cups (31 and 36) in bearing cage (34) as required. Install rear gear shield (33) on bearing cage. Install the five bolts and tighten to a torque of 27-32 ft.-lbs. (37-43 N.m). Install new seal rings (40) on rear end of shaft. Install bearing cage assembly on shaft, then bolt gear shields together.

Place shaft assembly in a press and position rear bearing cone (37) on end of shaft. Press bearing cone on shaft while rotating bearing cage until a rolling torque of 1.55-2.35 ft.-lbs. (2.1-3.19 N.m) is obtained.

Measure distance from back face of rear bearing cone (37) to outside face of snap ring groove. This distance minus 0.0067 inch (0.169 mm) will be total thickness of snap ring and back-up ring to be installed. Back-up rings are available in thicknesses of 0.123, 0.126, 0.130, 0.133, 0.137 and 0.141 inch (3.12, 3.21, 3.30, 3.39,3.48 and 3.57 mm). Install selected back-up ring (38) and snap ring (39). Install new "O" ring (35) on bearing cage. Lay shaft and clutch assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

165. Ib (Hsassemble the range input shaft and high range and low range clutches, refer to Fig. 135 and proceed as follows: Remove the four seal rings (1).

Using a puller, remove low range drive gear (3) and front bearing cone (2). Use a screwdriver to move snap ring (15) out of its groove in carrier (4). Use a suitable puller to remove medium clutch carrier (4) with piston assembly from shaft. Remove the three Belleville washers (10), reaction plate (11), ten friction discs (12), nine separator discs (13), backing plate (14) and the snap ring (15). Use compression sleeve CAS-19033 and a press to compress Belleville washers (17) and remove snap ring (16) from its groove in shaft. Remove sleeve and snap ring. Remove the 13 Belleville washers (17), snap rings (18 and 19), thrust washers (20) and thrust bearing (21). Remove medium range drive gear (23) with seal ring (22), needle bearing (24), thrust bearing (25) and spacer (26). Remove high range drive gear (27) with seal ring (28) and needle bearing (29). Remove snap ring (30) from groove in high range clutch carrier (50). Remove backing plate (31), ten friction discs (32), nine separator discs (33), reaction plate (34), three Belleville washers (35), thrust washers (36) and thrust bearing (37). Use compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 and a press to compress Belleville washers (39) and remove snap ring

Fig. 135~-Expioded view of range transmission Input shaft with high range and medium range dutch assemblies.

1. Seal rings (4) 2. Front bearing cone 28. Seal ring 3. Low range drive gear 29. Needle bearing 4. Clutch carrier ^ 30. Snap ring 5. Tfeflonring 31. Backing plate 6. "O"ring 32. Friction discs (10) 7. Piston 33. Separator discs (9) 8. "O"ring 34, Reaction plate 9. Tfeflonring 35. Belleville washers (3) 10. Belleville washers (3) 36, Thrust washers 11. Reaction plate 37. Thrust bearing 12. Friction discs (10) 38. Snap ring 13. Separator discs (9) 39. Belleville washers (13) 14. Backing plate 40. Dowel pins (3) 15. Snap ring 41, Input shaft 16. Snap ring 42. Coiled spring pin (5) 17. Belleville washers (13) 43. Slotted spring pin (1) 18. Snap ring 44. Snap ring 19. Snap ring 45, «0" ring 20. Thrust washers 40. Ifeflonring 21. Thrust bearing 47^ Piston 22. Seal ring 43. ifeflon ring 23. Medium range drive gear 49. "O" ring 24. Needle bearing 50* Clutch carrier 25. Thrust bearing 51. Snap ring 26. Spacer 52. Rear bearing cone 27. High range drive gear 53. Seal ring

91

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 165 (Cont.)

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage £ind renew as required. If dowel pins (40), coiled spring pins (42) or slotted spring pin (43) have been removed to clean oil ports in input shaft (41), refer to Fig. 136 and reinstall as shown.

Ib reassemble range input shaft and clutches, refer to Fig. 135 and proceed as follows: Install new "O" rings (6, 8,45 and 49) in grooves in pistons (7 and 47) and carriers (4 and 50). Soak teflon rings (5,9,46 and 48) in hot water to expand them, then install them over the "O" rings. Allow teflon rings to cool and contract, lubricate them with petroleum jelly and DOWEL PIN (3) - PRESS IN FLUSH

SLOTTED SPRING PIN PRESS FLUSH WITH SHAFT OD

Fig, 136—Sectional view showing correct installation of dowel pins, coiied spring pins and siotted spring pin in range input shaft

Fig. 137—View showing correct stacking of Belleviiie washers for high range dutch.

install pistons flat side first into carriers. Install snap ring (44) over rear end of shaft (41) and into the second groove in splines. Install high range clutch carrier (50) against snap ring (44) so that oil hole in carrier is aligned with hole in shaft. Install snap ring (51). Heat rear bearing cone (52) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.

WARNiNG: Aiways wear heat protective gioves when handiing heated parts.

Install first piston return Belleville washer concave side down, second washer concave side up, third washer concave side down and so on until all 13 Belleville washers are installed as shown in Fig. 137.

Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft.

Install snap ring (38—Fig. 135) over the centering ring so that opening in snap ring is aligned with slotted spring pin in the shaft. Install compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the centering sleeve and on top of snap ring. Install compression sleeve CAS1903-3 and using a press, apply down pressure on sleeves until snap ring is positioned in groove. Remove the sleeves. Install thrust washers (36) with thrust bearing (37) between the washers. Install the three Belleville washers (35) concave side up and reaction plate (34) flat side up. Soak all finction discs (32) in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Starting with fi:iction disc and alternating with separator plates (33), install all ten friction discs and nine separator discs.

Install backing plate (31) flat side down, then install snap ring (30). Install needle bearing (29) and using a new seal ring (28), install high range drive gear (27) so that splines of gear engage all friction discs (32).

Install spacer (26), thrust bearing (25), needle bearing (24) and medium range drive gear (23) with new seal ring (22). Install thrust washers (20) with thrust bearing (21) between the washers, then install snap rings (18 and 19). Install first piston return Belleville

REAR BEARING CONE

FRONT BEARING CONE HIGH RANGE CLUTCH PLATE CARRIER

MEDtUM RANGE CLUTCH PLATE CARRIER

Fig, 136—Sectional view of assembied range transmission input shaft and high range and low range clutches.

92

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 washer (17) concave side up, second washer concave side down, third washer concave side up and os on until all 13 Belleville washers are installed. Install centering sleeve CAS-1903-4 over the shaft. Install snap ring (16) over the centering ring and install compression sleeve CAS-1903-5 over the centering sleeve and on top of snap ring. Install compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 and using a press, apply down pressure on sleeves until snap ring is positioned in groove in shaft. Remove sleeves. Place snap ring (15) over shaft and lay it on gear (23). Install backing plate (14) flat side up. Soak all finction discs in clean HyTran Plus fluid. Starting with a fidction disc (12) and alternating with separator discs (13), install all 10 fi:iction discs and nine separator discs. Install reaction plate (11) flat side down and install the three Belleville washers (10) concave side down. Install medium range clutch carrier (4) so that oil hole in carrier is aligned with oil hole in shaft. Working through slots in carrier (4), use a screwdriver to install snap ring (15) in groove inside the carrier.

Install low range drive gear (3). Heat front bearing cone (2) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.

Paragraph 166 remove piston. Remove teflon rings (8 and 10) and "O" rings (7 and 9) from piston (11) and carrier (6). Install new "O" rings (7 and 9) in grooves in piston and carrier. Soak teflon rings (8 and 10) in hot water to expand them, then install them over the "O" rings.

Lubricate rings with petroleum jelly, then install piston.

When reassembling, drive new roller bearing (23) in rear end of countershaft until bearing is 0.810 inch (20.64 mm) below flush with top of bore. Install first piston return Belleville washer (20) concave side up, second washer concave side down, third washer concave side up and so on until all 13 Belleville washers are installed. Install thrust washers (18) with thrust bearing (19) between the washers. Install snap ring (17) against thrust washers. Use compression sleeve

WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gioves

when handiing heated parts.

Install four new seal rings (1) on front of shaft and new seal ring (53) on rear of shaft. Lay input shaft assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

166. To disassemble the countershaft and low range clutch, refer to Fig. 139 and proceed as follows: Using a suitable puller, remove constant mesh gear (35) and rear bearing cone (36). Remove spacer (34), high range driven gear (33) and medium range driven gear (32) with seal ring (31). Remove snap ring (30), backing plate (29), 15 fiiction discs (27), 14 separator discs (28), reaction plate (26) and three Belleville washers (25). Remove snap ring (24). Turn unit over and press the shaft assembly out through low range driven gear and carrier (6), removing front bearing cone (1), spacer (2), thrust washers (3) and thrust bearing (4). Remove seal rings (5) from gear (6).

Remove needle bearing (12), spacer (13), needle bearing (14), thrust washers (15) and thrust bearing (16).

Use compression sleeve CAS-1903-3 and a press to compress Belleville washers (20) and remove snap ring (17) from its groove in shaft. Remove sleeve and snap ring. Remove thrust washers (18), thrust bearing (19) and the 13 Belleville washers (20). Use an inside puller to remove roller bearing (23) from rear of countershaft.

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage and renew as required. If coiled spring pins (22) were removed, press new pins in uritil flush with top of bores. Bump carrier (6) on a wood block to

Fig. 139—Exploded view of range transmission countershaft and iow range clutch assembly.

1. Front bearing cone 2. Spacer 3. Thrust washers 4. Thrust bearing 5. Seal rings 6. Low range driven gear & clutch carrier 7. "O"ring 8. Tfeflonring 9. "O" ring 10. Teflon ring 11. Piston 12. Needle bearing 1^. Spacer 14. Needle bearing 15. Thrust washers 16. Thrust bearing 17. Snap ring 18. Thrust washers

19. Thrust bearing 20. Belleville washers (13) 21. Countershaft 22. Coiled spring pin (3) 23. Roller bearing 24. Snap ring 25. Belleville washers (3) 26. Reaction plate 27. Friction discs (15) 28. Separator discs (14) 29. Backing plate 30. Snap ring 31. Seal ring 32. Medium range driven gear 33. High range driven gear 34. Spacer 35. Constant mesh gear 36. Rear bearing cone

93

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 167-169 and press to compress Belleville washers, then install snap ring in its groove in shaft. Install thrust washers (15) with thrust bearing (16) between washers. Install needle bearing (14) spacer (13) and needle bearing (12). Install two new seal rings (5) on hub of low range driven gear (6), then install gear and carrier on shaft. Install thrust washers (3) with thrust bearing (4) between washers. Install spacer (2). Heat front bearing cone (1) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install bearing.

WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gioves when handiing heated parts.

Turn shaft over and install snap ring (24) in its groove. Install the three Belleville washers (25) concave side up and reaction ring (26) flat side up. Soak all firiction discs (27) in clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid.

Starting with a friction disc and alternating with separator discs (28), install all 15 firiction discs and 14 separator discs. Install backing plate (29) flat side down, then install snap ring (30) in groove in clutch carrier. Using new seal ring (31) on medium range driven gear (32), install gear so that splines on gear engage all friction discs (27). Install high range driven gear (33), spacer (34) and constant mesh gear (35). Heat rear bearing cone (36) to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on shaft.

WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gioves when handiing heated parts.

Lay countershaft assembly aside in a clean area for later installation.

167. Before reassembling the range transmission, renew rear bearing cups in transmission housing and front bearing cups in bearing cages as required. If desired, check hydraulic pump drive gear bearing as follows: Working through slots in front side of gear (10—Fig. 133), use snap ring pliers and remove snap ring (12) out of its groove in bearing cage (16). Remove hydraulic pump drive gear from bearing cage. Remove snap ring (14) from gear and drive bearing (13) from gear. Tb reinstall gear and bearing, place new seal ring (11) inside gear and lay snap ring (12) inside the gear and over the hub, flat side down. Install bearing (13) and secure with snap ring (14). Install on countershaft bearing cage and working through slot in gear, install snap ring (12) in its groove in bearing cage.

168. To install the front drive axle drive shaft and clutch assembly, lubricate seal ring (35—Fig. 134) on bearing cage (34). Install the shaft and clutch assembly into the range housing. Align oil hole bearing cage with hole in housing. Apply Locktite 262 to threads of retaining bolts and tighten bolts to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m). Install clutch shield over clutch assembly and bolt to rear clutch cover (19). Use new "O" rings on bolts and bolt clutch shield bracket to housing. Place bevel pinion constant mesh gear, long hub forward, in range housing. Use new "O" rings and install oil inlet tube through range housing and into front drive axle drive shaft bearing cage (34).

169. To install the range input shaft and clutches, lubricate seal ring (53—Fig. 135) with petroleum jelly and install the assembly. Tilt the input shaft to the side so the countershaft can be installed.

MEDIUM RANGE DRIVEN GEAR

REAR BEARING CONE

RANGE TRANSMISSION COUNTERSHAFT

LOW RANGE DRIVEN GEAR AND CLUTCH PLATE CARRIER

Fig. 140—Sectional view of assembled countershaft and low range clutch.

94

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Install the countershaft assembly in range housing. Lubricate seal rings (5—Fig. 139) on low range driven gear (6). Install bearing front support (1—Fig. 133) and secure with the six bolts (2) tightened to a torque of 66-79 ft.-lbs. (90-107 N.m).

The end play for the countershaft is 0.0005-0.004 inch (0.013-0.100 mm) and end play for the input shaft is 0.001-0.005 inch (0.03-0.13 mm). Tb set the end play, install the bearing cage (16—Fig. 133) and pump gear assembly without shims (18). Install bolts (15) loosely. Tighten two opposite bolts alternate^, in three steps until tightened to a torque of 6.6 ft.-lbs.

(9.0 N.m). Rotate shaft while tightening. Measure the gap between bearing cage (16) and front support (1) next to the tightened bolts. Take an average of the two readings and add 0.011 inch ().279 mm). This will be the correct shim pack thickness to be installed.

Apply petroleum jelly to the four seal rings (1—Fig. 135) on front of input shaft, then install bearing cage (5—Fig. 133) without shims (3). Install bolts (6) loosely. Tighten two opposite bolts alternately, in three steps, to a torque 4.0 ft.-lbs. (5.6 N.m). Rotate shaft while tightening. Measure the gap between bearing cage (5) and front support (1) next to the tightened bolts. Take an average of the two readings and add 0.009 inch (0.241 mm). This will be the LUBRICATION MANIFOLD BOLT

GASKET

O-RING

PRESSURE TUBE

O-RING

Paragraph 170 correct shim pack thickness to be installed. Shims (3 and 18) are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.004, 0.005,0.012 and 0.030 inch (0.08,0.10,0.13, 0.30 and 0.76 mm).

Remove bearing cages and install selected shim packs. Tighten bolts to a torque of 40-45 ft.-lbs. (54-61 N.m). Install new seal ring (7) on bearing cage (5).

Connect all oil tubes.

Tb install the master clutch on front end of input shaft, install the clutch positioning snap ring in groove on input shaft. Place clutch assembly on shaft and tap in place using a soft hammer. Install clutch retainer flat side to front and secure with the Allen screw tightened to a torque of 19-23 ft.-lbs. (26-31 N.m). Install lubrication tube in end of range input shaft.

Tb install the lubrication manifold (Fig. 141), install new "O** rings on pressure tubes. Lubricate "O" rings and install tubes in lube manifold. Use new gasket and install manifold assembly. Lower ends of tubes must go into holes in range input shaft bearing cage. Tighten manifold retaining bolts to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m).

170. When reinstalling the range transmission, attach lifting chains and hoist, then remove from engine stand. As transmission housing is guided to rear frame, install constant mesh gear, spacer and snap ring over the bevel drive pinion shaft. When housings are together, install and tighten bolts to a torque of 173-192 ft.-lbs. (235-260 N.m). Move constant mesh gear and spacerfiiUyrearward and install snap ring in its groove. Use Loctite 515 gasket eliminator when installing park lock and hydraulic pump assemblies on right side and access cover on left side.

Tighten bolts to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs. (52-61 N.m).

The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disassembly procedure.

O-RING

PRESSURE TUBE O-RING

INPUT SHAFT FRONT BEARING CAGE

Fig, 141—View showing iubrication manifold, pressure tubes and range input shaft bearing cage.

Fig, 142—View showing constant mesh gear, spacer and snap ring instailed on bevel drive pinion shaft.

95

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 171

MAIN DRIVE BEVEL GEARS AND DIFFERENTIAL DIFFERENTIAL All Models 171. R&R AND OVERHAUL. To remove the differential assembly, disconnect battery cables and drain rear frame and axle housings. Drain, disconnect and remove main fuel tank and mounting platform. Remove rear frame cover as outlined in paragraph 222. Attach rear housing handler 17-527 to support rear frame. Remove rear axle housings with planetaries as outlined in paragraph 176. Remove brake cylinders as in paragraph 179. Remove the pto drive gear lube line from rear frame. Remove the differential lock supply line, then unbolt and remove the pto drive gear assembly. Remove the pto drive shaft and couplers. Remove pinion shaft lube line. Attach a differential lifting tool CAS-1952 or equivalent on the differential and connect to a hoist.

Raise hoist to support the differential. Unbolt and remove bearing retainers (3 and 38—Fig. 143) and shims (7). Tag shims as to their location. Remove lock slip ring (33) from retainer (38). Remove ring gear and differential assembly and lay on bench. Remove the 12 bolts (8) and lift off ring gear. Turn assembly over and remove cover (9). Remove thrust washer (11), four separator plates (12) and three friction plates (13). Remove the differential lock side gear (17) and six dowel pins (10) from case (28). Turn case piston side down and using compressed air in supply port, remove piston (15). Remove "O" rings (14 and 16) from piston and case. Remove the two bolts (29) securing short shafts (23) in case (28). Thread an M8 bolt into short shafts £ind pull short shafts (23) from case. On Model 7110, remove thrust washers (18) and pinion gears (20) for short shafts (23). Remove long shaft (25) and long spacer (24), then remove thrust washers and pinion gears for long shaft (25). On Models 7120, 7130 and 7140, remove thrust washers (18), thrust rings (19), pinion gears (20), needle rollers (21) and short spacers (22) for short shafts (23).

Remove long shaft (25) and long spacer (24), then remove thrust washers, thrust rings, pinion gears and needle rollers for long shaft (25). On all models, remove side gear (26) and thrust washer (27) from case (28). Remove bearing cups (6 and 31) from differential case and cover. Remove oil seals (1 and 40), seal rings (4 and 36) and bearing cones (5 and 32) from bearing retainers (3 and 38). Remove seal rings (30) from case. Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage and renew as necessary.

NOTE: If carrier bearings (5 and 32) or differential case (28) or cover (9) have been renewed, bearing

96

preioad must be adjusted. Reassembie as foiiows, but do not instaii seai rings (4 and 36), iocic siip ring (33) or bevei ring gear.

Heat bearing cones (5 and 32) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on bearing retainers (3 and 38).

WARNiNG: Aiways wear heat protective gioves when handiing heated parts.

Install oil seals (1 and 40) into retainers (3 and 38) so rubber lips face outside. Install seals until they are 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) below flush with top of bore.

Install new bearing cups (6 and 31) in cover (9) and case (28). Install thrust washer (27) and side gear (26) in differential case (28). On Model 7110, lubricate thrust washers (18) and inside of pinion gears (20) with petroleum jelly and install in case. Insert long shaft (25) through case, pinion gears and long spacer (24). Install short shafts (23) through case and gears so small end of shafts are inserted into hole in long spacer and shaft. Secure short shafts in case with bolts (29). On Models 7120, 7130 and 7140, apply petroleum jelly to the four thrust washers (18). Install the two washers for the long shaft (25). Apply petroleum jelly to inside the four pinion gears (20) and install 28 needle rollers (21) inside each gear. Install thrust rings (19) on top of needle rollers. Install two pinion gear assemblies for the long shaft in the case against the thrust washers. Place long spacer (24) between the gears. Insert long shaft through the case, gears and spacer. Install the other two thrust washers into the case, then install the two pinion gear assemblies. Install the short spacers (22) and two short shafts so that small ends of shafts are inserted into hole in long spacer and shaft. Secure short shafts with bolts (29). On all models, lubricate new "O" rings (14 and 16) and install in grooves on piston (15) and inside of case (28). Install piston flat side up in case and install the six dowel pins (10) in the case. Install differential lock side gear (17). Install one separator plate (12) so that notches engage dowel pins, then one friction plate (13) so it will mesh with lock side gear.

Alternate plates until three friction plates and four separator plates are installed. Use grease to stick thrush washer (11) in position on cover (9) and install cover on differential case. Use bolts and nuts to secure cover to case. Do not install ring gear at this time.

Install differential assembly into rear frame. Install two aligning dowel pins (2 or 39) in each side of rear frame. Install left bearing retainer (3) without shims (7) and install three retainer bolts equally spaced around retainer. Tighten bolts to a torque of 85 ft.-lbs.

(115 N.m). Install right bearing carrier (38) without

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 171 (Cont.)

shims. Install and tighten three retaining bolts (41) evenly in steps of 25 in.-lbs. (2.82 N.m) until 100 in.-lbs. (11.3 N.m) is reached. Rotate differential while tightening. Install a rolling torque adapter CAS-1902-2 into differential assembly and loosen right carrier bolts evenly until finger tight. Now re-

torque the bolts evenly and equally until a rolling torque of 45 in.-lbs. (5.08 N.m) is reached. Using a depth micrometer, measure the distance from right bearing retainer face to the rear frame through the three jackscrew holes. Average the three measurements and record the dimension. Support differential

28 /

33 37

38 Fig. 143—Exploded view of differentlai assembly, insets show different types of pinions and shafts used.

1. Oil seal 2. Dowel pin (5) 8. Bolt (12) 15. Piston 22. Short spacer 29. Bolt (2) 36. Seal ring 3. Left bearing 9. Cover 16. "Oaring 23. Short shaft 30. Seal rings 37. Dowel pin (3) retainer 17. Side lock gear 10. Dowel pin (6) 24. Long spacer 31. Bearing cup 38. Right bearing 4. Seal ring 18. Thrust washer 11. Thrust washer 25. Long shaft 32. Bearing cone retainer 5. Bearing cone 12. Separator plate 19. Thrust ring 26. Side gear 33.

Lock slip ring 39.

Dowel pin (5) 6. Bearing cup 13. Friction plate 20. Pinion gears 27. Thrust washer 34. Pressure tube 40. Oil seal 7. Shims 14. "O** ring 21. Needle rollers 28. Differential case 35. "Oaring 41. Bolt (6)

97

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 172 and remove both bearing retainers (3 and 38). Measure the thickness of the right bearing retainer as shown in Fig. 144. Subtract this dimension from the recorded dimension. The difference will be the total shim pack thickness to be installed. Split total shim pack evenly and install half with each bearing carrier.

Tighten carrier bolts to a torque of 85 ft.-lbs. (115 N.m) while rotating differential. Check differential rolling torque which should be 40-70 in.-lbs. (4.5-7.9 N.m) for new bearings or 20-35 in.-lbs. (2.26-3.95 N.m) for used bearings. Desired setting is in the upper half of ranges. Tb increase rolling torque, remove shim thickness of 0.002 inch (0.05 mm). Tb decrease rolling torque add to shim thickness.

With bearing preload set, remove differential and keep shim packs with their respective bearing carriers. Unbolt cover (9--Fig. 143) from case (28), then install ring gear on right side of case. Install the twelve bolts (8) securing ring gear, case and cover together and tighten to a torque of 230 ft.-lbs. (310 N.m). Install new seal rings (30) on the case, making sure ends of rings are locked together. Install new seal

rings (4 and 36) on carriers (3 and 38, making sure ends are locked together. Install differential lock slip ring (33) on right retainer (38). Lube hole in retainer must be near the differential lock tube hole in the lock slip ring. Install both bearing carriers with the determined shim packs, aligning lube passages in rear frame with slots in shims and bearing retainers.

Using a dial indicator against a tooth on ring gear, check ring gear to bevel drive pinion backlash which should be 0.007-0.011 inch (0.179-0.279 mm). Tb change backlash, move shims from one side of differential to the other. Moving a 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) shim from one side to the other will change backlash approximately 0.006 inch (0.169 mm).

Using new "O" rings, install the pinion shaft lube tube and differential lock supply tube. Install pto drive shaft and bolt the pto drive gear assembly in place. Install pto drive assembly oil lube tube.

The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disassembly procedure.

BEVEL GEARS All Models

MEASURE RETAINER THICKNESS

Fig. 144^Measure bearing retainer thickness as shown.

Fig. 145—Exploded view of ring gear and bevel drive pinion assembly used on aii modeis. Items 13, 14 and 15 will remain in range housing.

1. Ring gear 6. Snap ring 11. Bearing cone 2. Drive pinion 7. Shim 12. Snap ring 3. Plug 8. Bearing cage 13. Constant mesh gear 4. Bearing cone 9. Bolt (6) 14. Spacer 5. Bearing cup 10. Bearing cup 15. Snap ring

98

172. The main drive bevel pinion (2—Fig. 145) and ring gear (1) are a matched set and must be renewed as such. Tb remove bevel pinion and ring gear, proceed as follows: Tractor must first be split between range transmission housing and rear frame as outlined in paragraph 161. Remove rear frame cover as outlined in paragraph 222 and rear axle housings and planetaries as outlined in paragraph 176. Remove pto shaft, differential bearing carriers and differential with ring gear as outlined in paragraph 171. Remove mounting bolts (9—Fig. 145) from bearing cage (8), then withdraw bevel pinion assembly from rear frame. Remove and measure thickness of shim pack (7). Record thickness.

Tb disassemble bevel pinion, remove snap ring (12), then press bevel pinion shaft and bearing cone (4) from front bearing cone (11) and bearing cage assembly. Press bevel pinion from rear bearing cone (4).

Remove bearing cup (5), snap ring (6) and bearing cup (10) from bearing cage. Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage and renew as necessary. Make certain that hole in plug (3) is open.

Tb reassemble pinion shaft and adjust bearings, proceed as follows: Press rear bearing cup (5) in cage until seated. Install snap ring (6) in groove in cage.

Press front bearing cup (10) in cage until seated against snap ring. Heat rear bearing cone (4) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install in place on bevel pinion shaft.

WARNING: Aiways wear heat protective gloves when handiing heated parts.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 Install bearing cage assembly on shaft and bearing cone, then press front bearing cone in place while rotating bearing cage. Hold cage flange in a vise and using a dial indicator, measure pinion shaft end play which should be at least 0.0005 inch (0.013 mm).

Apply a force of approximately 50-100 lbs. (222-445 N) to one end, then the other when measuring end play. Measure the distance from bearing cone (11) to front of snap ring groove. Select a snap ring with a thickness from 0.002 inch (0.05 mm) less to 0.0025 inch (0.07 mm) more than your measurement. Install snap ring (12) in its groove. Back seat bearing (11) against snap ring with 10000-15000 lbs. (4448066720 N) of force. Using a dial indicator, check pinion shaft end play again. End play must be 0.0005-0.004 inch (0.013-0.102 mm). If end play is incorrect, select a thicker or thinner snap ring as required. Snap rings are available in thicknesses of 0.146, 0.149, 0.152, 0.155 and 0.158 inch (3.70, 3.78, 3.86, 3.94 and 4.02 mm).

173, Tb adjust pinion mounting distance, record the + or - reference number etched in hundredths of a millimeter on the end of pinion shaft (Fig. 146). Add or subtract the reference niimber from the standard nominal dimension of 33.92 mm. The result will be the desired dimension. Install bevel drive pinion and cage assembly into rear frame without shims and secure with mounting bolts. Install pinion depth setting tool CAS-1902-1 as shown in Fig. 147 so that bar is centered on pinion shaft. Hold pinion shaft forward to remove all bearing end play, then measure distance between rear face of pinion shaft and front face of bar in millimeters. This is your measured dimension.

Subtract this measured dimension from the previously calculated desired dimension. The result will be the correct thickness shim pack (7—Fig. 145) to be installed. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.004,0.005 and 0.012 inch (0.076,0.10,0.13 and 0.30

Fig, 146—The plus or minus reference number (1) Is etched in face of bevel pinion in hundredths of a mllll' meter as shown.

Paragraphs 173-175 mm). Remove pinion shaft assembly and install the selected shim pack on bearing cage.

If ring gear (1) or carrier bearings are renewed, adjust bearing preload as in paragraph 171. Install bevel drive pinion assembly with shim pack and tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 87-98 ft.-lbs.

(118-133 N.m). Adjust ring gear to bevel pinion backlash, if necessary, as outlined in paragraph 171.

174. When attaching range transmission to rear frame, install a new gasket over dowel pins on rear frame. As transmission housing is guided to rear frame, install constant mesh gear, spacer and snap ring (13, 14 and 15—Fig. 145) over the bevel drive pinion shaft. When housings are together, install and tighten bolts to a torque of 173-192 ft.-lbs. (235-260 N.m). Move constant mesh gear and spacer fully rearward and install snap ring in its groove. The balance of reassembly is the reverse of disassembly procedure.

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK All Models 175, The differential lock clutch pack and actuating piston are located within the differential case. When operator depresses differential lock switch, an electric solenoid controlled hydraulic valve directs pressurized oil to actuate clutch assembly. The clutch locks one differential side gear to the differential case which prevents differential action and causes both final drive sun gear shafts to rotate at the same speed.

When switch is turned off or foot brake applied (automatic switch activated), actuating piston hydraulic pressure is relieved and clutch pack disengages.

Removal and installation of clutch pack and piston is outlined in paragraph 171 covering differential service. Solenoid control valve is located on right side of tractor rear frame and removal is obvious. Refer to Fig. 148 and remove jam nut (1) and solenoid coil (2).

Fig, 147—Bevel pinion shaft setting tool CAS'1902'1 Installed in differential bearing retainer bores In rear frame.

99

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 176 Unscrew and remove cartridge (3) from body (9).

Remove all "O" rings and back-up rings from cartridge. A seal kit consisting of "O" rings (4, 6 and 8) and back-up rings (5 and 7) are available to reseal the unit. All other parts are available only as a complete valve assembly.

Lubricate "O" rings and back-up rings with petroleum jelly when reassembling. Tighten cartridge in valve body to a torque of 180 in.-lbs. (20 N.m). Tighten jam nut to a torque of 30-40 in.-lbs. (3.4-4.5 N.m).

FINAL DRIVES The final drive assemblies used on all models consist of rear axle, planetary reduction unit and axle housing. The final drive is removed from tractor as a unit.

All Models 176. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Drain oil from rear frame and axle housing. Remove drawbar pivot pin and drawbar. Move rear frame handler under tractor and bolt to drawbar support. Raise tractor and remove rear wheel and tire assembly. Raise hood and lock in raised position. Remove top nut from rear cab mounts. Install rear cab supports and raise rear of cab. LfOosen cab mount center plate and remove cab mount stud and isolators from mounting bracket.

Unbolt and remove mounting bracket from rear axle housing. Remove a bolt from front and rear of axle housing and install guide studs. Attach lift brackets and chain hoist to axle housing. Remove remaining bolts and lift off axle housing and planetary assembly.

Be careful not to drop the sun gear shaft if it is removed with planetary.

Tb reinstall final drive, first use tool 89-581-5 and align brake discs. Install sun gear shaft into brake housing, then remove brake alignment tool.

Install sun gear shaft alignment tool CAS-1902-5 for Models 7110 and 7120 or CAS-1902-3 for Models 7130 and 7140. See Fig. 149. Apply Loctite 515 gasket eliminator on mounting surface, then recouple axle housing to rear frame. When sun gear shaft and planetary gears are engaged, remove alignment tool.

Push axle housing into final position and install bolts.

Tighten bolts to a torque of 173-192 ft.-lbs. (235-260 N.m).

Install cab mounting bracket and tighten bolts to a torque of 247-276 ft.-lbs. (335-375 N.m). Install mounting stud and isolators. Tighten inside nut on lower part of stud to a torque of 35-45 ft.-lbs. (47-61 N.m) and tighten jam nut to inside nut to a torque of 136-153 ft.-lbs. (184-207 N.m). Lower the cab onto the cab mounts and install mounting nuts and washers.

Tighten nuts to a torque of 140-180 ft.-lbs. (190-244 N.m). Install rear wheel and tire and remove rear frame handler. Install drawbar and refill transmission with Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Repeat operation for opposite side if necessary.

NOTE: A iocator pin is used in inner end of right sun gear shaft oniy on Modeis 7130 and 7140. Use petroieum jeiiy to stick iocator pin in piace.

Fig. 146—Exploded view of differential lock solenoid control valve.

1. Jam nut 4. "O"ring 7. Back-up rings 2. Solenoid coil 5. Back-up rings 8. "O"ring 3. Cartridge 6. «O"ring 9. Valve body

100

Fig. 149Speciai tool CAS'1902'5 (Models 7110 and 7120) or CAS 1902-3 (Models 7130 and 7140) instailed to hoid sun gear shaft in alignment^^when Installing final drive.

1. Sim gear shaft 4. Adjusting holt 2. Aligning dowel 5. Alignment tool 3. Locating screws

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 177. OVERHAUL. With final drive removed, proceed as follows: Remove sun gear shaft from brake or planetary and lay aside. Remove planetary ring gear from axle housing as shown in Fig. 150. Remove snap ring (1—Fig. 151), then lift off planetary unit (2).

Remove nylon wear insert (13) from end of axle shaft

Flg. 150—Remove planetary ring gear from axie housing as shown.

Paragraph 177 (14). Remove snap ring (3), thrust ring (4) and shims (5). Using a bridge 89-525-18 and a 30 ton ram CAS10030 as shown in Fig. 152, push axle out of axle housing. Remove oil seal (15—Fig. 151), then press axle (14) from bearing cone (10). Remove "O" ring (11) and press axle from spacer bushing (12). Using a suitable puller, remove bearing cups (7 and 9) from axle housing (8).

Before disassembling the planetary unit, index planet gears (3—Fig. 153) to carrier (9) so gears can be installed in their original positions, if reused.

Drive roll pin (8) into shaft (10), then drive gear shaft from planetary carrier. Remove planet gear (3) and bearings. Remove bearing cones (1 and 7) and bearing cups (2 and 6) noting spacer (5) (Models 7130 and 7140 only) and snap ring (4) between the cups. Repeat operation for other two planet gears.

Tb reassemble planetary unit, assemble bearing cups and cones into planet gears. If planet gears are being reused, match index marks made during disassembly. Align pin holes in carrier and shaft, then press shaft into carrier and planet gear. Install the

1 2

Fig. 152—Using a bridge, 69-525-16, and a 30-ton ram, CAS-10030, to push axle from axie housing.

Fig. 151—Exploded view of typicai final drive unit used on all models.

1. Snap ring 6. Bearing cone 11. "O"ring 2. Planetary unit 7. Bearing cup 12. Spacer bushing 3. Snap ring 8. Axle housing 13. Axle wear insert 4. Thrust ring 9. Bearing cup 14. Axle shaft 5. Shim 10. Bearing cone 15. Oil seal

Fig. 153—Exploded view of typicai final drive planetary reduction unit. Spacer (5) is used oniy on Modeis 7130 and 7140.

6. Bearing cup 1. Bearing cone 2. Bearing cup 7. Bearing cone 8. Roil pin 3. Planet gear (3) 9. Planetary carrier 4. Snap ring 10. Shaft (3) 5. Spacer

101

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 177 (Cont.)

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

roll pin until flush with carrier. Lay unit aside for later installation.

Tb disassemble the sun gear shaft, refer to Fig. 154 and remove snap ring (2). Remove washer (3) and adaptor hub (4). On models so equipped, remove shaft locator pin (1) only if pin is excessively worn or damaged. Inspect sun gear shaft for any damaged splines and renew as necessary. Reassemble sun gear shaft by reversing the disassembly procedure.

Tb reassemble the final drive, heat spacer bushing (12—Fig. 151) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 375-400° F (191-204° C) and install until seated against shoulder on axle shaft. Lubricate new "O" ring (11) with Hy-Tran Plus fluid and install in groove in spacer bushing. Heat bearing cone (10) to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install against spacer bushing.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gioves when handiing heated parts.

Fig, 154—Exploded view of typical sun gear shaft.

Shaft iocator pin (1) is used only on right sun gear shaft on Models 7130 and 7140.

1. Locator pin 2. Snap ring 4. Brake adaptor hub 3. Washer 5. Sun gear shaft

AXLE HOUSING

AXLE SHAFT

RAM

Fig. 155—Use a 30-ton ram, spacer and M20 threaded rod as shown to force Inner bearing cone onto axle shaft.

102

Apply antiseize compound on the outside diameter of bearing cups (7 and 9) and drive cups into axle housing until seated. Install axle shaft assembly in axle housing. Apply a light coat of oil to inside diameter of bearing cone (6) and place bearing on inner end of axle shaft. Use a 30 ton ram, spacer and M20 threaded rod as shown in Fig. 155 to press inner bearing cone on axle shaft. Press bearing until reading on pressure gage is 4000 psi (27580 kPa) for 3.5 inch (88.9 mm) axles or 5000 psi (34474 kPa) for 4.0 inch (101.6 mm) axles. Remove the ram and spacer without rotating the axle shaft. Install thrust ring (4—Fig. 151 and snap ring (3). Measure gap between thrust ring (4) and bearing cone (6). Select a shim pack (5) equal to the measurement. Remove snap ring and thrust ring, then install shim pack, thrust ring and snap ring. Back press inner end of axle shaft imtil snap ring is tight against its groove, then check rolling torque of axle shaft which should be as follows: Rolling torque for 96 and 112 inch axles— New bearings, 3.5 inch axle 100-170 in.-lbs.

(11.3-19.2 N.m) 4.0 inch axle 140-210 in.-lbs.

(15.8-23.7 N.m) Used bearings, 3.5 inch axle 50-85 in.-lbs.

(5.6-9.6 N.m) 4.0 inch axle 70-105 in.-lbs.

(7.9-11.9 N.m) Rolling torque for 120 inch axle— New bearings Used bearings

I

160-210 in.-lbs.

(18.1-23.7 N.m) 80-105 in.-lbs.

(9.0-11.9 N.m)

Rolling torque can be adjusted by adding or removing shims. Changing shim pack thickness by 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) will change rolling torque approximately 20 in.-lbs. (2.3 N.m) for the 3.5 inch axle or 25 in.-lbs. (2.8 N.m) for the 4.0 inch axle. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.004, 0.005, 0.012 and 0.030 inch (0.076, 0.10, 0.13, 0.30 and 0.76 mm).

Fill the two inner grooves of a new oil seal (15—Fig. 151) approximately half full with CASE IH 251H EP grease.

Apply Loctite 515 gasket maker on the outside diameter of the seal, then install seal until flush with axle housing. Install planetary carrier unit (2) and secure with snap ring (1). Install new nylon wear insert (13) in axle shaft. Apply Loctite 515 gasket eliminator on axle housing side of ring gear and install ring gear on axle housing.

Reinstall sun gear shaft and final drive assembly as outlined in paragraph 176.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 178

BRAKES All models use multiple disc, wet-t5rpe brakes located between final drives and rear frame housing.

Brakes are power actuated, self-adjusting and selfequalizing. Brake hydraulic pressure is regulated at 260 psi (1793 kPa). A one-way check valve is used in brake inlet port elbow to close the brake hydraulic circuit when pressure ceases. Brakes then can be operated manually using fluid trapped in the circuit when engine is inoperative.

aligned as shown in Fig. 156. Adjust pedal stop bolts so that bottom of bolts extend V4 inch (6.3 mm) from support. Check to see that top of brake valve contacts the alignment bar. If not, loosen valve mounting bolts, push brake valve upward agednst the alignment bar, then retighten valve bolts. Check to see that pedal lock plate on left pedal will freely engage slot in right pedal. If not, adjust one pedal stop bolt to align the pedals.

WARNING: Service (foot) braices iVIUST NOT be used for parking or any other stationary job that requires tractor to be heid in position. Even a smaii amount of fiuid seepage wouid resuit in brakes ioosening and severe damage to equipment or injury to personnei couid resuit. USE PARK LOCK when parking tractor.

All Models

With brake pedals aligned, measure the distance that valve spool is screwed into yoke. See Fig. 157.

This distance must be at least V2 inch (12.7 mm).

Loosen the yoke clamp bolt and hold the yoke from turning. Using a pin through the hole in spool, rotate spool until holes in yoke and link are aligned. Install pin through yoke and link. Tum spool counterclockwise until pin is tight, then tum spool clockwise V4 turn. Secure pin with flat washer and cotter pin.

Tighten yoke clamp bolt. Repeat adjustment on the opposite spool.

178. The only external adjustments that can be made on brakes are brake pedal alignment, pedal height, differential lock release switch adjustment and control valve linkage adjustment.

To make brake pedal adjustments, disconnect brake pedals from brake valve spools. Make certain that timing marks on pedals and valve levers are

Tb adjust differential lock release switch position, depress one brake pedal. Refer to Fig. 156 and loosen jam nuts on switch. Move the switch as required until the extended tip of plunger on switch is % inch (16 mm) from switch mounting bracket. Tighten jam nuts. Release brake pedal and measure distance fi'om switch mounting bracket to brake pedal. This dis-

ADJUSTMENT

PEDAL LOCK PLATE ALIGN TIMING MARKS

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH

ALIGNMENT BAR MUST CONTACT BRAKE VALVE

3/8 TO 7/16 INCH (9.5 TO 11.1 MM) BOLT MUST EXTEND 1/4 INCH (6.3 MM) FROM SUPPORT

Fig. 156—View showing brake pedal and differential lock release switch adjustment.

103

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 178 (Cont.)

YOKE

Fig. 157—Side and front views of brake vaive iinkage. Refer to text for adjustment.

PISTON O-RING

O-RING

SUN GEAR SHAFT ASSEMBLY

Qs.

/ LOCATING PIN

USE FOUR PER SIDE IN 7130, 7140 TRACTORS'^ USE THREE PER SIDE IN 7110, 7120 TRACTORS

USE FOUR PER SIDE IN 7130. 7140 TRACTORS USE THREE PER SIDE IN 7110. 7120 TRACTORS

ADJUSTER RETURN PUTE

Fig, 156—Exploded view of brake assembiy used on Models 7130 and 7140, Brake used on Models 7110 and 7120 are the same except for number of friction discs and separator discs used.

104

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 tance must be %-Vi6 inch (9.5-11.1 mm). Repeat the adjustment on the other switch.

BRAKE ASSEMBLIES All Models 179. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove brake from either side, first remove rear axle housing and planetary as outlined in paragraph 176. Disconnect brake and lubrication lines and fittings from rear main frame housing, then remove jumper tubes and "O" rings. See Fig. 158. Remove two mounting bolts and install guide studs. Remove remaining bolts and withdraw brake cylinder assembly. Remove adjuster return plate, friction and separator discs from rear frame. Remove the three brake adjusting tubes and five locating pins. Use compressed eiir to remove brake piston from brake cover. Remove the large "O" ring and small "O" ring from brake cover. Inspect separator discs for burning or uneven wear and renew as needed. Inspect friction discs for burning or uneven wear or if all the grooves are worn off, renew the friction discs. Minimum thickness for brake friction discs is 0.136 inch (3.45 mm). If desired, sun gear shaft oil seal in bearing retainer can be renewed at this time.

Lubricate new "O" rings and install in grooves in brake cover. Carefully install piston fully into brake cover. Install the five locating pins. If new friction discs and separator discs are being installed, reset brake adjusters to dimension shown in Fig. 159. Install type 1 adjusters with button end out. Install type 2 adjusters with Belleville washers into bearing carrier. Starting with a separator disc, then a friction disc as shown in Fig. 158, install four separator discs and four frictions discs on Models 7130 and 7140 or three separator discs and three friction discs on Models 7110 and 7120. Install adjuster return plate so that plate tabs contact the adjuster tubes. Fill brake cylinder with clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid through brake

BRAKE ADJUSTER TYPE 1 1.00 INCH (25.4 mm)

Paragraphs 179-180 inlet opening before installing. Install brake cylinder over guide studs and push into position. Install retaining bolts and tighten to a torque of 172-194 ft.-lbs.

(233-263 N.m). Lubricate new "O" rings with petroleum jelly and install on jumper supply tubes. Install jumper supply tubes through rear frame and into brake cylinder. Install fittings and the brake pressure and lubrication lines.

Reinstall final drive as outlined in paragraph 176 and bleed brakes as in paragraph 181.

BRAKE CONTROL VALVE All Models 180. R&R AND OVERHAUL. The brake valve is located on the right side of firewall inside the engine compartment. Tb remove the brake valve, tag hydraulic hoses with their port locations on brake valve for aid in reassembly. Disconnect the hoses and remove pins from brake spool yokes. Remove the two mounting bolts and remove brake control valve.

Tb disassemble the brake valve, remove yokes from spool ends. Remove body cap mounting screws and remove cap (15—Fig. 160) and gasket (14). Withdraw valve spool and piston assemblies from valve body (3).

NOTE: Mark spoois and pistons so they can be reinstaiied in their originai bores.

Use a pin through hole in spool to hold spool stationary and remove locknut (13). Remove small piston (10). Inspect valve body bores and valve spools (8) for scratching or scoring and renew as required. Valve spools and body are a matched set and cannot be serviced separately.

Inspect pistons for scoring or scratches. Renew all gaskets and "O" rings. Be sure inlet orifice (2) is clean and that inlet elbow check valve is operating correctly.

BRAKE ADJUSTER TYPE 2

1.00 INCH(25.4 mm)

BELLEVILLE WASHERS

Fig, 159—Views showing two types of brake adjusters used. If new friction discs and separator discs are installed, set adjusters to the dimension shown.

105

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 181 Reassemble valve by reversing disassembly procedure. Tighten valve spool locknuts (13) to a torque of 12-18 ft.-lbs. (16.2-24.4 N.m). Tighten valve cap bolts to a torque of 9-11 ft.-lbs. (12.2-14.9 N.m). When installing brake valve, push valve upward against the alignment l)ar. Tighten valve mounting bolts to a torque of 35-42 ft.-lbs. (47.5-57.0 N.m).

BLEED BRAKES All Models 181. Tb bleed air from brake system, place shift lever in PARK position. Start engine and operate at low idle speed. Press brake pedals several times to remove air from brake valve. Depress and hold brake pedal down. Loosen brake line nut at inlet fitting on rear main frame. When a solid flow of fluid appears, tighten the nut. Repeat the operation for opposite brake. If brake pedal operation feels spongy rather than having a solid feel, repeat bleeding operation.

After brake valve is reinstalled, adjust linkage as outlined in paragraph 178 and bleed air from brakes as in paragraph 181.

15

11 13

Fig. 160—Exploded view of brake control valve used on all modeis. Vaive spooi assembiies are identical. However, they are matched to valve body bores and are not interchangeable.

2. Orifice plate 3. Valve body

4. Small spring 5. Large spring 6. Large piston

10. Small piston 11. "Oaring 12. Piston retainer

7. "O"ring 8. Valve spool 9. Retaining ring

13. Locknut 14. Gasket 15. Cap

SPRING PtN

PAWL LEVER COVER

LONG STRIP BEARING ILSEAL I WASHER WASHER

i

I

SHORT STRIP BEARING

WASHER

\

CLEVIS P 1 N \

WASHER

|

^ ^

BELLCRANKX

1

PAWL LEVER SHAFT BOLT-

COTTER PIN SPRING PIN< P U a LEVER ROD CLEVIS PIN CLEVIS PIN COTTER PIN

OVER CENTER LOCK UNK WASHER

Fig. 161—Exploded view of the park lock unit used on ail models.

106

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraphs 182-183

PARK LOCK

cover. Remove spring pin from pull lever rod. Remove "C" clamp, then remove hold down spring. Remove the spring pin from pawl lever and remove pawl lever shaft and pawl lever. Remove the three clevis pins, flat washers and cotter pins. Remove over center lock link, bellcrank, pull lever rod and flat washer. Then, pry out oil seal.

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage and renew as required. Hold down spring should have a free length of 3.541 inches (89.95 mm) and should test 100 lbs. (444.8 N) when compressed to a length of 2.34 inches (59.44 mm).

All Models 182. LINKAGE ADeJUSTMENT. Before adjusting park lock linkage, make sure transmission linkage is correctly adjusted as outlined in paragraph 136. Then, adjust park lock linkage as outlined in paragraph 137.

183. R&R AND OVERHAUL PARK LOCK. Tb remove the park lock assembly, first remove remote control valves and steering priority valve as outlined in paragraphs 198 and 225. Then, disconnect linkage and unbolt and remove park lock unit.

NOTE: To remove park lock gear, refer to paragraph 161 and split tractor between range transmission housing and rear main frame.

Tb disassemble the park lock unit, refer to Fig. 161 and using a "C" clamp compress pawl lever against

Install new oil seal and strip bearings and reassemble by reversing the disassembly procedure. Apply Loctite 515 gasket eliminator to mounting flange on range transmission. Install park lock unit and tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 38-45 ft.-lbs.

(52-61 N.m).

Reinstall steering priority valve and remote control valves, then refer to paragraph 182 for linkage adjustment information.

POWER TAKE-OFF All models are equipped with an independent power take-off that is controlled through a cable-operated hydraulic valve to a hydraulically

operated multiple disc clutch. Models 7110 and 7120 are available with a two-speed (540 and 1000 rpm) unit. Models 7120, 7130 and 7140 are

GAP BETWEEN LEVER AND SLOT-1/4 INCH (6 mm)

BULKHEAD NUTS

FLANGE

SPACER

Fig. 162—View showing pto control valve linkage adjustment.

107

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 184-185 available with a single speed (1000 rpm) unit.

Pto speeds are based on 2200 rpm engine speeds.

LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT All Models 184. Adjust pto linkage with engine OFF and transmission shift lever in PARK position. Move pto control lever rearwsird to end of slot in console. Remove the access panel from cab floor. Refer to Fig. 162 and loosen locknut at cable sleeve. Loosen the two flange mounting bolts and turn sleeve counterclockwise until the sleeve no longer contacts spacer. Tum sleeve clockwise until sleeve contacts spacer, then tighten sleeve V4 turn more. Tighten flange mounting bolts.

Install locknut tight against sleeve. Adjust bulkhead nuts until there is V4 inch (6 mm) between lever and rear end of slot, then tighten nuts.

Start engine and check to see that pto shaft is not turning. Push pto lever forward into engaged position and check to see that pto shaft is turning. If the adjustment does not work, disconnect linkage from valve spool and check the disengaged (spool extended) position. The end of the valve spool must be 2Vs inches (56 mm) from valve face. Readjust as required.

CASE/INTERNATIONAL gage to the test port. Stait tractor engine and warm hydraulic oil to a temperature of 150° F (65.5° C) before making adjustments. With engine operating at 1000 rpm, loosen locknut (23—Fig. 164) and tum regulated pressure plug (25) as required to set regulated pressure at 265-275 psi (1827-1896 kPa). Stop engine and tighten the locknut to a torque of 30-40 ft.-lbs. (41-54 N.m). Remove test gage and install plug in test port.

Check the pto detent adjustment as follows: Start the engine and engage the pto. Engage and disengage the transmission several times. The pto must stay engaged during the shifts. Stop the engine. The pto

PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT All Models 185. Before making any pressure adjustments, adjust control linkage as in paragraph 184. Then, place pto control lever in OFF position. Working through access panel opening in cab floor, remove plug from pressure test port in pto control valve as shown in Fig. 163. Connect a 0-400 psi (0-2758 kPa) pressure test

Fig, 163—View showing removal ofpiug from pto control vaive pressure test port.

108

Fig, 164—Exploded view of pto control valve and pressure regulator valve used on all models.

1. Locknut 22. "O"ring 2. Washer 23. Locknut 3. Thread seal 24. "O"ring 4. Detent adjusting screw 25. Regulated pressure 5. Detent spring adjusting plug 6. Guide 26. Regulator spring 7. Detent ball 27. Spring seat 8. Spool 28. Regulator spool 9. Poppet 29. Valve spool 10. Relief spring 30. Spool stop 11. Washer 31. Snap ring 12. Retaining ring 32. Shoulder stop 13. Pressure spring 33. Poppet 14. Minimum pressure 34. Large washer adjusting plug 35. Secondary spring 15. "O''ring 36. Small washer 16. Locknut 37. Primary spring 17. Oil seal 38. Centering spring 18. Plug 39. "O"ring 19. "O"ring 40. End cap 20. Valve body 41. Retaining ring 21. Neutral start switch

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 186

must self-disengage when engine is stopped. Loosen locknut (1) and adjust detent screw (4) as necessary.

Tb check the pto clutch and brake pressure, disconnect the brake and clutch lines at pto unit. Install a 0-300 psi (0-2068 kPa) test gage at the end ofeach line. Start tractor engine. Refer to Fig. 165 and with pto lever in disengaged position, brake pressure gage should read 260-280 psi (1793-1931 kPa) and clutch pressure gage should read 0-5 psi (0-34 kPa). As the control lever is moved forward from disengaged position, brake pressure should drop to 10-30 psi (68-209 kPa) and clutch pressure shoidd remain at 0-5 psi (0-34 kPa). ^^^th control lever in neutral position, both pressure gages should read 0-5 psi (0-34 kPa).

As the control lever is moved further forward (intermediate position) and an increase in lever effort is noticed, brake pressure will remain at 0-5 psi (0-34 kPa) and clutch pressure will increase to 110-150 psi (758-1034 kPa). Then, with control lever in fully engaged position, brake pressure should be 0-5 psi (0-34 kPa) and clutch pressure should be 260-280 psi (1793-1931 kPa).

Any great differences from outlined pressure readings would indicate problems in pto control valve.

Refer to paragraph 186. Remove test gages and reconnect lines.

PTO CONTROL VALVE All Models 186. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the pto control valve, first unbolt and remove access panel from cab floor. Clean exterior of the valve, lines and surrounding area. Remove the inlet hose between park lock cover and pto valve. Disconnect control cable linkage from valve. Remove the steering priority valve supply line. Disconnect wires from neutral start switch (21—Fig. 164). Remove the pilot pressure tube from pto valve and hitch control valve. Disconnect brake supply tube and the pto valve drain tube.

Disconnect pto brake and clutch pressure tubes from

the valve. Remove the by-pass to sump tube. Disconnect the regulated pressure line to transmission control valve from pto valve. Unbolt valve bracket from transmission housing and remove valve assembly.

Cap or plug all lines.

Tb disassemble the pto control valve, first unbolt and remove valve from mounting bracket. Identify and remove all extemal fittings for aid in reassembly.

Remove the neutral start switch (21—Fig. 164). Remove locknut (1), washer (2), thread seal (3), adjusting screw (4), detent spring (5), guide (6) and detent ball (7). Remove locknut (16), minimum pressure adjusting plug (14) with "O" ring (15), pressure spring (13) and relief valve assembly (8 through 12). Remove retaining ring (12), washer (11), reHef spring (10) and poppet (9) from spool (8). Remove locknut (23), regulated pressure adjusting plug (25) with "O" ring (24) and regulator spring (26). Remove plug (18) and push regulator spool (28) and spring seat (27) from valve bocfy. Place valve body in a press with blocks to protect the valve spool (29). Apply pressure against end cap (40) and remove retaining ring (41). Slowly release pressure on end cap to release spring pressure on the cap. Remove valve body from press, then remove end cap and primary spring (37). Remove centering spring (38). Push outer end of valve spool into body and remove the small washer (36), secondary spring (35), large washer (34) and poppet (33). Remove pto spool assembly (29 through 32) from valve b o ^ . Remove oil seal (17).

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Spool (8), spool (29) and valve body (20) are not serviced separate^. Check springs against the following specifications: Secondary spring (35) Free length Test load Test length

0.772 in.

(19.63 mm) 0.50-0.62 lbs.

(2.24-2.74 N) 0.240 in.

(6.10 mm)

PTO BRAKE PRESSURE

PTO CLUTCH PRESSURE

PTO LEVER POSITION

260 to 280 PSI (1 793 to 1 931 kPa)

0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa)

Disengaged

Drop to 10 to 30 PSI (68 to 209 kPa)

0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa)

0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa)

0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa)

0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa)

Rise to 110 to 150 PSI (758 to 1 034 kPa)

Intermediate

0 to 5 PSI (0 to 34 kPa)

260 to 280 PSI (1 793 to 1 931 kPa)

Engaged

•

Neutral

Fig. 165—Chart showing pto brai<e and clutch pressures at various controi iever positions.

109

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 187 Primary spring (37) Free length Test load Test length Centering spring (38) Free length Test load Test length Regulator spring (26) Free length

Test load 1.536 in.

(39.01 mm) 7.38-9.02 lbs.

(32.82-40.12 N) 1.090 in.

(27.69 mm)

74.5-91.1 lbs.

(331.6-405.3 N) 1.310 in.

(33.27 mm)

Test length Relief spring (10) Free length Test load

3.738 in.

(94.95 mm) 16.2-19.8 lbs.

(72.1-88.1 N) 2.210 in.

(56.13 mm)

Test length Pressure spring (13) Free length Test load

2.138 in.

(54.31 mm)

Test length

1.354 in.

(34.39 mm) 28.03-34.25 lbs.

(69.06-84.40 N) 0.80 in.

(20.32 mm) 1.492 in.

(37.90 mm) 16.56-20.24 lbs.

(73.75-90.13 N) 0.85 in.

(21.6 mm)

Detent spring (5) Free length

Fig, 166—Exploded view of pto clutch used on all models.

1. Needle bearing 2. Snap ring 19. Back plate 3. Oil seal 20. Snap ring 4. "O** ring 21. Needle bearing 5. Lube tube 22. Clutch hub & shaft 6. Tubing nut 23. Seal ring 7. Elbow 24. Pto housing 8. Clutch housing 25. Seal rings 9. Oil seal 26. Clutch carrier 10. Snap ring 27. Thrust washer 11. Snap ring 28. Snap ring 12. Thrust washers 29. Piston seal 13. Thrust bearing 30. Piston 14. Snap ring 31. "O" ring 15. Retainer 32. Snap ring 16. Bolt (4) 33. Spring 17. Friction disc (10) 34. Spring seat 18. Steel disc (11) 35. Snap ring

110

1.085 in.

(27.55 mm) Test load 27-33 lbs.

(120.1-146.8 N) Test length 0.76 in.

(19.30 mm) When reassembling, use all new "C* rings, thread seal and oil seal and reverse the disassembly procedure, keeping the following points in mind. Install regulator adjusting plug (25) and locknut (23) so that plug extends two or three threads beyond locknut.

Additional adjustment may be needed after valve installation. Install minimum pressure plug (14) and locknut (16) so that plug extends two or three threads beyond locknut. Tighten locknut to a torque of 25-35 fl.-lbs. (41-54 N.m). No further adjustment should be needed after valve is reinstalled. Install detent adjustment screw (4) and locknut (1) so that adjusting screw extends about Vg inch (22 mm) out of locknut.

Additional adjustment may be required after valve is reinstalled.

Use all new "O" rings and reinstall pto control valve by reversing removal procedure. Adjust control linkage as outlined in paragraph 184 and pressure adjustment as in paragraph 185.

PTO ASSEMBLY All Models 187. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the pto assembly, first drain oilfromtransmission and pto housings. Unbolt and remove pto safety shield, then clean pto exterior and surrounding area. Unpin and remove hitch upper link. Disconnect clutch, brake and lube tubes from pto housing. Remove bolts that

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 hold pto unit to rear frame. Connect a hoist to pto housing and remove pto unit from tractor.

Tb reinstall the pto unit, install two M12 x 150 mm guide studs into rear frame. Install a new gasket over guide studs. Slide pto into position and install retaining bolts. Remove the guide studs and the hoist.

Install new seal washers on the top two retaining bolts. Tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 93-112 ft.-lbs. (125-150 N.m). Reconnect pto clutch, brake and lube tubes. Install safety shield and tighten bolts to a torque of 54-64 ft.-lbs. (73-87 N.m). Fill transmission with Hy-Tran Plus fluid to correct level on dipstick.

188. DISASSEMBLE PTO CLUTCH. With pto unit removed as outlined in paragraph 187, refer to Fig. 166 and remove bolts (16) and retainer (15).

Remove snap ring (14), thrust washers (12) and thmst bearing (13). Remove snap ring (11), then unbolt and remove clutch housing (8). Remove "O" ring (4) and remove lube tube, nut and elbow (5,6 and 7). Remove snap ring (10) and oil seal (9). Using a slide hammer puller, remove needle bearing (1), then remove snap ring (2) and oil seal (3). Remove snap ring (20), back plate (19) and clutch hub and shaft (22) with seal ring (23) and needle bearing (21). Remove needle bearing from clutch hub and shaft. Remove steel discs (18) and friction discs (17) from clutch carrier. Using a bridge CAS-1907 or equivalent, compress clutch spring (33) and remove snap ring (35) from its groove. Carefully loosen nuts on the bridge and release clutch spring pressure. Remove snap ring (35), spring seat (34) and clutch spring (33). Remove snap ring (32) and pull piston (30) from carrier (26).

Remove "O" ring (31) and seal (29) from piston. Remove snap ring (28) and thrust washer (27), then remove clutch carrier (26) with seal rings (25).

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage and renew as required. Clutch spring (33) should have a free length of 4.97-4.99 inches (126.29-126.79 mm) and should test 200 lbs. (890 N) when compressed to a length of 1.80-1.82 inches (45.77-46.27 mm). Refer to paragraph 191 for reassembly procedures.

189. OVERHAUL SINGLE SHAFT UNIT. With the pto clutch removed as outlined in paragraph 188, remove the two cover bolts (1—Fig. 167) and remove cover (3). Remove "O" ring (10) and snap ring (9) from output shaft. Remove snap ring (8) and drive output shaft and bearing out front of pto cover (3). Remove oil seal (2) from cover. Remove snap ring (7), then press output shaft from bearing (6).

Refer to Fig. 168 and remove pto brake cylinders and tubes as an assembly from pto housing. Disconnect and remove pressure tubes (1 and 8). Remove pistons (4) from cylinders (2), then remove "O" rings (3i 5 and 6).

Paragraphs 188-191 Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Renew oil seal, gasket and all "O" rings and reassemble by reversing disassembly procedure.

190. OVERHAUL DUAL SHAFT UNIT. With the pto clutch removed as outlined in paragraph 188, remove the two cover bolts (1) and remove cover (4).

Remove thrust washers (12) and idler gear (14) with needle bearings (13) and idler shaft (15). Using a slide hammer puller, remove needle bearing (24) from pto housing (11). Remove "O" ring (10) from 1000 rpm output shaft (9). Remove snap ring (23), driven gear (22) and spacer (21) from 540 rpm output shaft (18).

Remove snap ring (20), then drive the 540 rpm output shaft with bearing (19) out front of pto cover. Press shaft from bearing. Remove oil seal (17), dust ring (16) and seal ring (3) from cover. Remove snap ring (8) and drive the 1000 rpm output shaft (9) with bearing (7) out front of cover. Remove snap ring (6) and press output shaft from bearing (7). Remove oil seal (2) from cover. Remove needle bearings (13) from idler gear (14).

Refer to Fig. 168 and remove pto brake cylinders and tubes as an assembly from pto housing. Disconnect and remove pressure tubes (1 and 8). Remove pistons (4) from cylinder (2), then remove "O" rings (3, 5 and 6).

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Renew oil seals, seal ring, gasket and all "O" rings and reassemble by reversing the disassembly procedure.

191. REASSEMBLE PTO CLUTCH. With pto rear unit overhauled as in paragraphs 189 or 190, place unit on a bench with output shaft(s) pointing downward. Refer to Fig. 166 and install new seal rings (25) in grooves in carrier (26). Lubricate seal rings with clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid and install clutch

Fig, 167—Exploded view of single shaft (1000 rpm) pto unit.

1. Bolt (2) 2. Oil seal 7. Snap ring 3. Cover 8. Snap ring 4. Gasket 9. Snap ring 5. Output shaft 10. **O"ring 6. Bearing 11. Pto housing

111

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 192 carrier on the output shaft. Install thrust ring (27) and snap ring (28) on the output shaft. Install new piston seal ring (29) and "O" ring (31) in grooves in piston (30). Carefully install piston into clutch carrier.

Install snap ring (32) flat side up, then install clutch spring (33) and spring seat (34). Using bridge CAS1907 or equivalent, compress clutch spring about 2

Fig, 166—Exploded view of pto brakes used on ali models.

1. Brake pressure tube 5. "O"ring 2. Cylinder (3) 6. "O"ring 3. "O"ring 7. Pto housing 4. Brake piston (3) 8. Brake pressure tube

inches (50.8 mm). Install snap ring (35) over end of output shaft, compress spring and install snap ring in its groove. Remove bridge and starting with a steel disc (18), then a friction disc (17) alternate discs until 10 friction discs and 11 steel discs are installed.

Install steel back plate (19). Install new needle bearing (21) into clutch hub and shaft (22) until top of bearing is flush with bottom end of chamfer. Install new seal ring (23) in groove on clutch hub and shaft.

Align friction discs (17) and install clutch hub and shaft, then install snap ring (20). Install oil seal (3) from inside of clutch housing (8) until top of seal is even with bottom of snap ring groove. Install snap ring (2), then press new needle bearing (1) into housing until seated against the snap ring. Install oil seal (9) from outside of clutch housing (8) until top of seal is even with bottom of snap ring groove, then install snap ring (10). Install lube tube, nut and elbow (5, 6 and 7) and install new "O" ring (4) over lube tube. On dual shaft units, align idler shaft slot toward clutch carrier. On all units, install clutch housing (8). Apply Lx)cktite 242 on clutch housing retaining bolts, install bolts and tighten secure^. Install snap ring (11), thrust washers (12) with thrust bearing (13) between the washers and snap ring (14). Install retainer (15) and secure with bolts (16).

Reinstall pto assembly as outlined in paragraph 187.

PTO REDUCTION GEARS All Models

Fig, 169—Exploded view of dual shaft (540 and 1000 rpm) pto unit.

1. Bolt (2) 13. Needle bearings 2. Oil seal 14. Idler gear 3. Seal ring 15. Idler shaft 4. Pto cover 16. Dust shield 5. Gasket 17. Oil seal 6. Snap ring 18. Output shaft (540 rpm) 7. Roller bearing 19. Ballbearing 8. Snap ring 20. Snap ring 9. Output shaft (1000 rpm) 21. Spacer 10. "O" ring 22. Driven gear 11. Pto housing 23. Snap ring 12. Thrust washers 24. Needle bearing

112

,

192. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the pto reduction gears, first remove pto unit as outlined in paragraph 187. Remove clamps and disconnect drain tubes. Unbolt and remove transmission fill tube. Unbolt and remove upper link bracket, then unbolt and remove pto adapter plate. Refer to Fig. 170, remove clips (31) and shield cover (30). Remove bolts (29) and lift out driven gear (28). Working through holes in hub (27), remove the six bolts (23). Remove hub and bearing cage assembly and gear oil shield (34) from rear frame. Remove the four bolts (12) and withdraw drive gear assembly (9 through 18).

Tb disassemble the driven hub assembly, remove snap ring (33) and shim (32) from driven hub. Using a suitable puller, pull bearing cage (22) with bearing cups (21 and 24) and bearing cone (20) from driven hub (27). Use a dish puller and remove bearing cone (25) from driven hub. Remove bearing cups from bearing cage (22). Remove cup plug (26) from driven hub.

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Then, reassemble as follows: Install cup plug (26) in drive hub. Heat bear-

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 ing cone (25) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install on driven hub until seated against flange.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gloves when handling heated parts.

Install new bearing cups (21 and 24) in bearing cage (22). Install bearing cage assembly on driven hub. Press bearing cone (20) on driven hub, but do not press tight. Install a dial indicator and check bearing cage end play. Press bearing on until end play is 0.0004-0.0035 inch (0.01-0.09 mm). Install snap ring (33) on driven hub, then using a feeler gage, measure distance between snap ring and bearing cone. This distance is the correct shim thickness to be installed.

Remove snap ring, install selected shim and reinstall snap ring. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.136, 0.137, 0.139, 0.140, 0.142, 0.143, 0.145 and 0.147 inch (3.442, 3.482, 3.522, 3.562, 3.602, 3.642, 3.682 and 3.722 mm).

Tb disassemble the drive gear assembly, remove snap ring (18—Fig. 170), spacer (17) and shim (16).

Using a suitable puller, pull bearing cage (13) with bearing cups (11 and 14) and bearing cone (15) from drive gear (9). Remove bearing cups (11 and 14) and bearing cone (15) from drive gear (9). Remove bearing cups from bearing cage. Using a dish puller, remove bearing cone (10) from drive gear.

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Heat bearing cone (10) in a bearing oven to a temperature of 250° F (121° C) and install bearing on drive gear.

Paragraph 192 (Cont.) to a torque of 54-64 ft.-lbs. (73-87 N.m). Install driven gear (28) on driven hub (27). Apply Loctite 242 to threads on bolts (29), then install and tighten bolts to a torque of 54-64 ft.-lbs. (73-87 N.m). Install shield cover (30) and secure with clips (31).

Use a new gasket and install pto adapter plate.

Install bolts and tighten securely. Install new gasket and upper link bracket. Tighten bracket bolts to a torque of 350-540 ft.-lbs. (610-730 N.m). Install fill tube with new gasket. Connect drain tubes and clamps.

Reinstall pto assembly as outlined in paragraph 187.

WARNING: Always wear heat protective gioves when handling heated parts.

Install new bearing cups (11 and 14) in bearing cage (13). Install bearing cage assembly on drive gear.

Press bearing cone (15) on drive gear, but do not press tight. Install a dial indicator and check bearing cage end play. Press bearing on until end play is 0.00040.0035 inch (0.01-0.09 mm). Install spacer (17) and snap ring (18) on drive gear, then using a feeler gage, measure distance between spacer (17) and snap ring (18). This distance is the correct thickness shim pack to be installed. Remove snap ring and spacer, install the selected shim pack, then reinstall spacer and snap ring.

Tb reinstall drive gear assembly, align splines on drive gear and coupler (19) and slide assembly into place. Flat side of bearing cage (13) must be up.

Install bolts (12) and tighten to a torque of 54-64 ft.-lbs. (73-87 N.m).

Tb reinstall driven hub assembly, install two MIO X 50 mm guide studs. Slide gear oil shield (34) and driven hub assembly over the guide studs. Remove guide studs and install the six bolts (23). Tighten bolts

Fig. 170—Exploded view of pto reduction gears and relative parts used on all models.

1. Pto drive shaft 18. Snap ring 2. Washer 19. Coupler 3. Seal ring 20. Bearing cone 4. "O"ring 21. Bearing cup 5. Union 22. Bearing cage 6. Lube tube 23. Bolt (6) 7. Elbow 24. Bearing cup 8. «O"ring 25. Bearing cone 9. Drive gear 26. Cup plug 10. Bearing cone 27. Driven hub 11. Bearing cup 28. Driven gear 12. Bolt (4) 29. Bolt (6) 13. Bearing cage 30. Shield cover 14. Bearing cup 31. Clip (4) 15. Bearing cone 32. Shim 16. Shim 33. Snap ring 17. Spacer 34. Gear oil shield

113

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 193-194

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM The hydraulic system provides power for the steering, brakes, pto clutch and brake, power shift clutches and valves, air/oil seat valve and cylinder (if so equipped), front drive axle clutch (if so equipped) and differential lock, as well as hydraulic lift and control of carried and towed implements. Hydraulic pumps and drive unit are located on right side of range transmission housing. Refer to paragraph 13 for service information on hydraulic fluid and filters.

Refer to following paragraphs for hydraulic pumps and system components.

HYDRAULIC PUMPS All Models 193. PRESSURE AND FLOW TESTS. To check the gear (charge) pump rear section pressure and flow, disconnect hose from rear pump outlet. Install inlet hose on flowmeter (CAS-10280 or equivalent).to pump rear outlet and outlet hose from flowmeter to the disconnected hose. Open load valve on flowmeter, start engine and operate until hydraulic oil is warmed. Then, with engine speed at 2200 rpm, adjust load valve until pressure gage on flowmeter reads 250 psi (1724 kPa). At this time, flowmeter should read 43 gpm (163 IVmin) minimum. If pressure or flow specifications cannot be met, renew or overhaul pump. Remove flowmeter and reconnect hose.

Tb check the gear (charge) pump front section pressure and flow, disconnect hoses at oil cooler. Connect the lower (supply) hose of oil cooler to the flowmeter inlet and the upper (return) hose of oil cooler to the flowmeter outlet. Open load valve on flowmeter, start engine and allow hydraulic oil to warm. Then, with engine speed set at 2200 rpm, adjust load valve until pressure gage on flowmeter reads 500 psi (3447 kPa).

At this time, flowmeter gage should read 11.5 gpm (43.5 L/min) minimum. If pressure or flow specifications cannot be met, renew or overhaul pump. Tb check the oil cooler relief valve (on gear pump), operate engine at 2200 rpm and adjust load valve to increase pressure to 1525-1625 psi (10515-11204 kPa). At this time, flow should start to decrease (relief valve opening). If flow does not start to decrease at this pressure, renew pressure relief valve. Remove flowmeter and reconnect oil cooler hoses.

Tb check flow and adjust standby pressure and operating pressure, connect flowmeter inlet line to piston pump outlet end cap. Connect flowmeter outlet line to remote valve end cap. Tbe the signal line from pump compensator to the flowmeter. Open flowmeter load valve, start engine and warm hydraulic oil. With engine speed set at 2200 rpm, adjust load valve on flowmeter until pressure gage reads 2400 psi (16547

114

kPa). At this time, the flow gage should read 27 gpm (102 L/min) minimum. If flow specification cannot be reached, renew or overhaul piston pump. Close signal line valve. Low stand by pressure should be 340-390 psi (2344-2689 kPa). If not, remove left plug from compensator and tum adjusting screw in to increase pressure or out to decrease pressure, then reinstall plug. Remove flowmeter. Install a 5000 psi (34474 kPa) pressure gage in upper port of No. 1 remove coupler at rear of tractor. With tractor operating at 2200 rpm, push No. 1 remote control lever forward and check pressure gage reading. Pressure should be 2600-2700 psi (17927-18617 kPa). If not, turn slotted plug on compensator in to increase pressure or out to decrease operating pressure. Remove test gage.

194. R&R AND OVERHAUL GEAR PUMP. Tb remove the gear (charge) pump, disconnect oil cooler supply tube from front port of pump. Disconnect oil filter hose from rear port of pump. Remove flange clamp on suction tube at bottom of pump. Plug or cap all openings. Unbolt and remove pump from drive housing.

Tb disassemble the pump, refer to Fig. 171 and remove cup (12), orifice (13), washer (11) and snap ring (14) above each through bolt (10). Place a match mark across front flange (9), front housing (23) and rear housing (17) for aid in reassembly. Remove the through bolts (10) and remove rear housing (17).

Remove the two gears (18 and 19) from drive shaft (2). Mark location of each gear on shaft for aid in reassembly. Remove key (1) from drive shaft. Remove gears (20 and 21) from driven shaft (3). Mark location ofeach gear on shaft. Remove "O" ring (22) from front housing (23), then separate front housing from front flange (9). Remove oil cooler relief valve (27) from front housing (23). Remove small "C* ring (24), backup ring (25) and large "O" ring (26) from relief valve.

Remove "O" ring (8) from front flange (9). Remove driven shaft with gear (3), then remove drive shaft with gear (2). Remove wear plate (4), bearing seal (5), rubber back-up seal (6) and back-up gasket (7). Remove shaft oil seal (15) and washer (16) from front flange (9).

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage. Check ID of the shaft bore bushings.

Maximum ID allowed is 0.879 inch (22.33 mm). Inspect wear plate bronze surface for wear or scoring.

Check bearing journal areas on OD of shafts. Minimimi OD allowed is 0.873 inch (22.17 mm). Check width of front gears (on shafts). Minimum gear width allowed is 0.637 inch (16.18 mm). Check the width of narrow gears (18 and 21). Minimum gear width allowed is 0.909 inch (23.09 m). Measure width of wide gears (19 and 20). Minimum gear width allowed is

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 1.317 inches (33.45 mm). Check gear pocket depth in front housing (23). Maximum gear pocket depth allowed is 0.775 inch (19.69 mm). Measure gear pocket depth in rear housing (17). Maximum gear pocket depth allowed is 2.237 inches (56.82 mm). Renew all parts showing excessive swear or other damage. Assemble relief valve (27) to a test pump CAS-10016.

Pump pressure up and observe gage reading where valve relieves the pressure. Valve setting must be 1525-1625 psi (10515-11204 kPa).

When reassembling pump, use all new seals and "C* rings. Install washer (16) in outer portion of shaft counterbore in front flange (9). Install oil seal (15) (metal side out) until seated against the washer.

Install back-up gasket (7) in front flange so that smooth side of gasket is flush with face of flange.

Install rubber back-up seal (6) inside the bearing seal (5). Install the bearing seal in the groove until smooth side of seal is flush with face of the flange. Install wear plate (4) so bronze face will be toward gears.

Carefully install drive shaft (2) taking care not to damage shaft oil seal. Install driven shaft (3) into front flange. Lubricate "O" ring (8) with petroleum jelly and install "O" ring in its groove in front flange.

Align match marks and install front housing (23) on front flange (9). Lubricate "O" ring (22) with petrolexmi jelly and install "O" ring in groove on front housing. Install one narrow gear (21), then one wide gear (20) on the driven shaft (3). Install shaft key (1) into groove in drive shaft (2). Install wide gear (19), then narrow gear (18) on drive shaft. Align match marks and install rear housing (11) on front housing (23). Install through bolts (10) and tighten to a torque of 40-50 ft.-lbs. (55-70 N.m). Install snap ring (14), washer (11), orifice (13) and cup (12) on top ofeach through bolt. Install large "O" ring (26), back-up ring (25) and small "O" ring (24) on relief valve (27).

Back-up ring and small "O" ring go in the same groove. Install relief valve in front housing (23).

Using a new gasket and "O" rings, reinstall gear pump assembly by reversing removal procedure.

195. R&R AND OVERHAUL PISTON PUMP. Tb remove the piston pump, first remove the following hydraulic lines: Hydraulic filter to gear pump hose, hydraulic filter to remote valve hose, suction tube to hydraulic filter and the tube from pump inlet tee to lube manifold. Disconnect the following hydraulic lines from piston pump: Pump to priority valve tube, compensator valve to priority valve tube and pump to hydraulic filter tube. Remove inlet and outlet tees from pimip. Plug or cap all openings. Unbolt and remove piston pump assembly from pump drive housing. Clean exterior of pump.

Tb disassemble the piston pump, refer to Fig. 172 and remove plugs (37 and 40) with "O" rings (38 and 41). Remove the six bolts (32), then separate valve

Paragraph 195 plate (39) from pump housing (8). Remove bearing plate (17) from valve plate. Remove piston (35) from piston rod (36), then unbolt and remove compensator valve from valve plate. Remove "O" ring (43) and retaining ring (42) from piston rod (36), then remove piston rod from valve plate. Remove check valve seat (47), check valve (46) and spring (44). Using a slide hammer and blind hole puller, remove bearing cup (18) from valve plate. Remove bearing cone (19) and spacer (20) from drive shaft (13). Bearing cone is a slip fit on shaft. Remove cylinder head and piston assembly from pump housing. Remove pistons (33) and shoe plate (30) assembly from cylinder block (25), then remove pistons from shoe plate. Remove pivot ring (29), three pins (28) and pin retainer (27) from block (25). Place cylinder block assembly in a press and apply pressure to notched washer (22) to compress spring (23) until snap ring (21) can be removed.

Fig. 171—Exploded view of gear (charge) pump used on all models.

1- Key 15. Oil seal 2. Drive shaft 16. Washer 3. Driven shaft 17. Rear housing 4. Wear plate 18. Narrow gear 5. Bearing seal 19. Wide gear 6. Rubber back-up seal 20. Wide gear 7. Back-up gasket 21. Narrow gear 8. "O"ring 22. "O'^ring 9. Front flange 23. Front housing 10. Bolt 24. "O"ring 11. Washer 25. Back-up ring 12. Cup 26. "O"ring 13. Orifice 27. Relief valve 14. Snap ring 28. Dowel pin (2)

115

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 195 (Cont.)

Release pressure and remove snap ring, notched washer (22), spring (23) and washer (24) from cylinder head. Unbolt and remove bearing cover (2). Tag any shims (3) that are present so they can be returned to original location if pivot bearings (7) are being reused. Remove "O" ring (4), spacer (5), bearing cup (6) and bearing cone (7). Bearing cup and cone are a

CASE/INTERNATIONAL slip fit in housing and on the swashplate. Remove pivot bearing from opposite side of pump housing in the same manner. Remove swashplate (16) from housing. Remove pump drive shaft (13) with bearing cone (12), then press bearing cone from drive shaft.

Remove spring (9) and spring seat (10) from housing.

Using a slide hammer and blind hole puller, remove bearing cup (11).

Clean all parts and inspect for excessive wear or other damage as follows: Check bearings for pitting or roughness and renew as required. Check pistons (33) and bores in cylinder block (25) for deep grooves or scoring. Check for looseness between shoe and piston. Looseness must not be more than 0.005 inch (0.127 mm). Measure thickness of shoe on each piston. Thickness must not vary more than 0.001 inch (0.025 mm) for all nine pistons. Pistons and cylinder block are not available separately and if damaged, renew piston and block assembly. Check the shoe plate (30) and pivot ring (29) for deep grooves and pitting in pivot area. Pins (28) must be straight and of equal length. Inspect bearing plate (17) and face of cylinder block for scratches or scoring. Inspect piston shoe contact area on swashplate for excessive wear or scoring. Check to see that spring pivot seat (14) is not damaged and is secured tight with roll pin (15). Check piston (35) and piston rod (36) for scoring or binding action.

Fig. 172—Exploded view of piston pump used on ali models.

1. Bolt 25. Cyiinder head 2. Bearing cover 26. Dowel pin 3. Shim 27. Pin retainer 4. "O" ring 28. Pin (3) 5. Spacer 29. Pivot ring 6. Bearing cup 30. Shoe plate 7. Bearing cone 31. Washer 8. Pump housing 32. Bolt (6) 9. Spring 33. Hston(9) 10. Spring seat 34. Gasket 11. Bearing cup 35. Piston 12. Bearing cone 36. Piston rod 13. Drive shaft 37. Plug 14. Spring pivot seat 38. "O"ring 15. Roll pin 39. Valve plate 16. Swashplate 40. Plug 17. Bearing plate 41. "O"ring 18. Bearing cup 42. Retaining ring 19. Bearing cone 43. "O"ring 20. Spacer 44. Spring 21. Snap ring 45. Dowel pin 22. Notched washer 46. Check valve plate 23. Spring 47. Check valve seat 24. Washer

116

When reassembling piston pump, use all new gaskets and "O" rings and proceed as follows: Install bearing cup (11) in housing until seated. Press bearing cone (12) on drive shaft (13) until seated against shoulder on shaft. Install drive shaft and bearing into piomp housing. Install spring (9) and spring seat (10) on the raised boss in housing. Install swashplate (16) over pump drive shaft and into bearing bores. Install pivot bearing cones (7), bearing cups (6), spacers (5), "O" rings (4), original shims (3) and bearing covers (2). Secure with bolts (1) tightened to a torque of 170-190 in.-lbs. (19-21 N.m). If pivot bearings or swashplate are being renewed, adjust begiring preload as follows: Assemble new bearing cone (7), bearing cup (6), spacer (5) and "O" ring lubricated with petroleum jelly on one side of pump housing. Install one 0.010 inch (0.254 mm) shim under cover (2).

Install bolts (1) and tighten to a torque of 170-190 in.-lbs. (19-21 N.m). On opposite side, install pivot bearing cone (7), bearing cup (6) and spacer (5). Using a depth gage, measure distance from top of bearing spacer to the face of housing. This measurement less 0.007-0.009 inch (0.178-0.229 mm) will be the correct shim pack thickness needed. If the required shim pack thickness is more than 0.020 inch (0.508 mm), split total shim thickness (both sides) between the pivot bearings. No more than 0.020 inch (0.508 mm) should be used on either side. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.005 and 0.010 inch (0.076,

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 0.127 and 0.254 mm). Install selected shim packs, lubricate "O" rings with petroleum jeUy, install "O" rings and pivot bearing covers. Tighten bolts to a torque of 170-190 in.-lbs. (19-21 N.m).

Install flat washer (24), spring (23) and notched washer (22) into center of cylinder block (25). Apply pressure £^ainst notched washer to compress spring, then install snap ring (21). Install pin retainer (20) into splined end of cylinder block until retainer is V2 inch (12 mm) from end of cylinder block. Install the three pins (28) into large grooves in splined area of cylinder block. Install pivot ring (29) with flat side on pins. Install pistons (33) in shoe plate (30), lubricate pistons with clean Hy-Tran Plus fluid and install in cylinder block.

If drive shaft, shaft bearings, valve plate or pump housing is being renewed, drive shaft bearing preload must be adjusted as follows: A spacer kit, consisting of 11 spacers ranging in thicknesses from 0.139 inch (3.531 mm) to 0.169 inch (4.293 mm) in increments of 0.003 inch (0.076 mm), must be acquired for this adjustment. Install the 0.169 inch (4.293 mm) thick spacer (20) from spacer kit, on the drive shaft so that chamfered side is facing inward. Install bearing cone (19) against spacer. Install bearing cup (18) in valve plate (39). Install valve plate on pump housing without gasket (34). Tighten valve plate mounting bolts (32) eventy, while rotating drive shaft, to a torque of 5 in.-lbs. (0.565 N.m). Using a feeler gage, measure the gap between valve plate and pump housing at four locations. Take an average of the four dimensions.

Subtract the correct dimension 0.022 inch (0.559 mm) from the average measured dimension. Then, subtract the difference from spacer thickness installed, 0.169 inch (4.293 mm). The result will be the spacer size needed. Select the nearest size spacer available in kit. Unbolt and remove valve plate, bearing cone and spacer. Install cylinder block assembly over drive shgdt and into pump housing. Install selected spacer (20) and bearing cone (19). Install spring (44), check valve (46 and seat (47) in valve plate. Install piston rod (36) through valve plate, then install spiral retaining ring (42) in inner groove of piston rod. Lubricate new "O" ring (43) with petroleum jelly and install in outer groove of piston rod. Using a new gasket, install compensator valve and tighten bolts to a torque of 60-70 in.-lbs. (7-8 N.m). Install piston (35) on piston rod (36). Lubricate bearing plate (17) and install on valve plate so that notch in bearing plate is seated over dowel pin in valve plate. Using a new gasket (34), install valve plate and bearing plate assembly on pump housing. Tighten retaining bolts to a torque of 23-26 ft.-lbs. (31-35 N.m). Install plugs (37 and 40) with new "O" rings (38 and 41).

Use a new gasket on pump flange and reinstall piston pump assembly by reversing the removal procedure. Remove upper plug from valve plate and install one pint (0.437 L) of Hy-Tran Plus fluid. Rein-

Paragraph 196 stall plug. Check and adjust pressure, flow and standby pressure as in paragraph 193.

196. R&R AND OVERHAUL COMPENSATOR VALVE. Tb remove the compensator valve, first clean valve and surrounding area, then unbolt and remove valve assembly. Refer to Fig. 173 and remove plug (21) with "O" ring (20), spring (19), seat (18) and compensator spool (17).Remove plug (16) with "O" ring (15).

Remove adjusting screw (14), lower seat (13), spring (12), upper seat (11) and load sensing spool (10).

Remove check plug (3), outer plug (9), orifice (8), plugs (4) and plug (7) with "O" ring (6).

Fig, 173—Exploded view of the compensator valve used on all modeis.

1. Gasket 12. Spring 2. "O"ring 3. Check plug 13. Lower seat 4. Plugs 14. Adjusting screw 5. Valve body 15. "O"ring 6. "O"ring 16. Plug 7. Plug 17. Compensator spool 8. Orifice 18. Seat 9. Plug 19. Spring 10. Load sensing spool 20. "Oaring 11. Upper seat 21. Adjusting plug

117

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 197-198 Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Use all new "O" rings and reassemble by reversing disassembly procedure.

Use new "O" ring (2) and gasket (1) and reinstall compensator valve assembly. Tighten mounting bolts to a torque of 60-70 in.-lbs. (7-8 N.m). Adjust pressure, flow and standby pressure as outlined in paragraph 193.

197. R&R AND OVERHAUL PUMP DRIVE UNIT. Tb remove the hydraulic pump drive unit, first remove the hydraulic pumps as outlined in paragraphs 194 and 195. On models prior to P.I.N. AJB0041175, disconnect the external lube line. On all models, disconnect and remove engine speed sensor (2—Fig. 174). Unbolt and remove the pump drive unit.

NOTE: Pry pto valve and bracket upward to provide room to remove drive unit.

Unbolt and remove bearing cage (10 or lOA), " C ring (11) and shim (12). Remove bearing cup (13) from bearing cage. Remove drive gear assembly (15 or 15A). Remove idler gear shaft bolt, then using a slide hammer, pull out idler gear shaft (3). Remove idler gear assembly (4 through 9). Drive out bearing (4) and remove spacer (5). Drive out bearing (9) and remove snap rings (6 and 8) from idler gear (7). On models prior to P.I.N. AJB0041175, remove seal ring (18)

from drive gear shaft. On all models, remove bearing cones (14 and 16) from drive gear shaft. Remove bearing cup (17) from housing (1).

Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage and renew as necessary. Install bearing cups (11 and 17) in bearing cage and housing. Install snap rings (6 and 8) in idler gear (7). Install bearing (9) against snap ring (8). Install spacer (5), then install bearing (4) against snap ring (6). Install idler gear assembly in housing and install idler shaft (3).

Install idler shaft retaining bolt with flat washer and tighten securely. Press bearing cones (14 and 16) on drive gear shaft (15 or 15A). Install drive gear assembly in housing and install bearing cage (10 or lOA) without shims (12) or "O" ring (11). Install and tighten bearing cage bolts evenly to a torque of 30 in.-lbs.

(3.39 N.m) while turning the shaft. Using a feeler gage, measure the gap between bearing cage and drive housing at each bolt. Take an average of the measurements. Add 0.0027 inch (0.07 mm) to the average dimension. This will be the shim pack thickness needed. Shims are available in thicknesses of 0.003, 0.004, 0.005, 0.012 and 0.030 inch (0.08, 0.10, 0.13, 0.30 and 0.76 mm). Remove bearing cage from drive housing. Lubricate "O" ring (11) with petroleum jelly and install on bearing cage. On models prior to P.I.N. AJB0041175, install new seal ring (18) on drive gear shaft (15). Lubricate seal ring with petroleum jelly, then reinstall drive gear shaft assembly. On all models, install selected shim pack (12) and bearing cage (10 or lOA). Tighten bearing cage retaining bolts to a torque of 40-45 ft.-lbs. (55-60 N.m). Using a dial indicator, check end play of drive gear shaft. End play must be 0.001-0.004 inch (0.025-0.100 mm). Change shim pack (12) thickness, if necessary, to correct the end play. Use new "O" ring and install engine speed sensor (2).

Apply a bead of Loctite 515 to mounting surface of pump drive unit. Install pump drive unit by reversing the removal procedures.

PRIORITY VALVE All Models

Fig. 174—Exploded view of hydrauiic pump drive unit.

Minor differences between early and iate production units are shown. lOA. Bearing cage (late) 1. Housing 11. "O"ring 2. Engine speed sensor 12. Shim 3. Idler shaft 13. Bearing cup 4. Bearing 14. Bearing cone 5. Spacer 15. Drive gear (early) 6. Snap ring 15A. Drive gear (late) 7. Idler gear 16. Bearing cone 8. Snap ring 17. Bearing cup 9. Bearing 18. Seal ring (early) 10. Bearing cage (early)

118

198. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the priority valve, first remove the remote valves as outlined in paragraph 225. Disconnect tubes from priority valve, then remove the valve.

Tb disassemble the priority valve, remove all fittings and "O" rings. Refer to Fig. 175 and remove plug (2) with "O" ring (3), priority spool (4) and spring (5).

Remove the 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) orifice plug from spool. Loosen locknut (27) and remove adjusting screw (26) with "O" ring (25), spring (24), poppet (23) and seat (22). Remove relief valve body (21) with "O** ring (20), back-up ring (19) and "O** ring (18). Remove the 0.018 inch (0.46 mm) orifice plug (7) and the 0.090

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 inch (2.28 mm) orifice plug (17) from valve body.

Remove plug (16) with "O" ring (15), spring (14), ball (13) and check valve body (12) with back-up rings (8 and 11) and "O" rings (9 and 10).

Clean and inspect all parts for pitting, scoring or grooves and renew as necessary. Spool (4) and body are a matched set and are not available separately^.

Check valve spring (14) should have a free length of 0.455 inch (11.56 mm) and should test 0.090-0.108 lbs. (0.40-0.48 N) when compressed to a length of 0.400 inch (10.16 mm). Relief valve spring (24) should have a free length of 1.118 inch (28.40 mm) and should test 12.8-15.74 lbs. (57.0-70.0 N) when compressed to a length of 0.826 inch (20.98 mm). Priority spool spring (5) should have a free length of 2.51 inches (63.63 mm) and should test 40.45-49.46 lbs.

(180-220 N) when compressed to a length of 1.91 inches (48.51 mm).

Reassemble priority valve by reversing the disassembly procedure keeping the following points in mind: Use all new "O" rings and back-up rings when reassembling. Make sure holes in orifice plugs are clean. When installing orifice plug (17) use Loctite 242 on plug threads and tighten to a torque of 12-14 ft.-lbs. (16-19 N.m). Install orifice plug (7) and tighten to a torque of 12-14 ft.-lbs. (16-19 N.m). Install and tighten spool orifice plug (6) to a torque of 45-60 in.-lbs. (5-7 N.m). Tighten relief valve body (21) to a torque of 30-35 ft.-lbs. (41-48 N.m). Tighten plug (2) to a torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m).

Use all new "O" rings and install priority valve by reversing the removal procedure. Check and adjust steering priority valve pressure as outlined in paragraph 15.

Paragraphs 199-200 OPERATION All Models 200. The electronic hitch system consists of the operator's control panel, the control module with automatic reset, two load pin sensors, hitch hydraulic control valve, hitch position feedback sensor and wiring harness.

The electronic hitch system operates in one of two modes: Position Control and Load Control. In Position Control, the hitch position and movement is directly proportional to the position and movement of the control lever. The hitch always raises at maximum speed. In lowering, the hitch moves at the speed selected by the hitch position drop speed control. In

PTO CONTROL VALVE All Models 199. For information on PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT and R&R AND OVERHAUL of the pto control valve, refer to paragraphs 185 and 186.

HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM All models are available with a 3-point Category III hydraulic operated hitch. The electronic hitch control system gives load control and position control of soil engaging implements. Tractors are equipped with one internal hitch cylinder and either one (Models 7110 and 7120) or two (Models 7130 and 7140) external hitch cylinders.

-15 Fig. 175—Expioded view of the steering priority valve used on all models, 1. Valve body 2. Plug 3. "O" ring 4. Vialve spool 5. Spring 6. Orifice plug 7. Orifice plug 8. Back-up ring 9. "O"ring 10. "O" ring 11. Back-up ring 12. Check valve body 13. Ball 14. Spring

; |v •

15. "O"ring 16. Plug 17. Orifice plug 18. "Oaring 19. Back-up ring 20. "O"ring 21. Relief valve body 22. Seat 23. Poppet 24. Spring 25. «O"ring 26. Adjusting screw 27. Locknut

119

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 200 (Cont.)

Load Control, the electronic hitch system adjusts the hitch position to maintain a constant implement load on the tractor in changing soil conditions and varying terrain. With a load increase, the electronic hitch system will lower the hitch. The amount of hitch movement to a particular load change is determined by the hitch travel control and the speed that the hitch raises or lowers is determined by the hitch response speed control.

TTie amber enable or reset indicator light is located as shown in Fig. 176. After tractor is started, the indicator light will be ON continuously for one to two seconds for a bulb check. If the position control lever and the actual hitch position match, the hitch system is enabled. If not, the amber light flashes ON and OFF. Tb enable the hitch, move position control lever to match the actual hitch position. When the indicator light stops flashing, hitch system is enabled and hitch will follow the control lever movement.

The position control lever is used to raise and lower implements and to select the working position of the implements. To lift the implement, pull position control lever to the rear. The hitch is fully up when control lever is in transport lockout position. Tb lower the implement, push control lever forward. The mechanical stop on the console provides an adjustable lever stop which allows control lever to be returned to the same set position.

The transport lockout is built into the control lever slot in console. Pull control lever rearward and into the offset to lock hitch in the raised position to prevent the lowering of an implement during transport.

The up/down rocker switch is a convenience for field work. When the switch is in down position, hitch will lower to the position set by the position control lever at the speed set by the hitch position drop speed control. When the switch is in up position, hitch will raise at maximum speed to the fully raised position.

The hitch position drop speed control varies the lowering speed of the hitch as the control lever is

pushed forward to the lower position or the up/down rocker switch is pushed to down position. The position drop speed control is only effective in the position control mode. Rotate control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease lowering speed of hitch. The position drop speed control knob is located under a cover at rear of control console. See Fig. 177.

The load control knob (Fig. 176) sets the depth of the implement to control the load on the tractor.

Turning the load control knob clockwise will increase the tractor load and the implement depth. Turning the knob counterclockwise will decrease tractor load and implement depth. At lighter load settings (No. 1 to No. 4), some implements will not lower in load control operation. The tractor must be moving in order for load control to be functional.

The travel control knob varies the range of hitch height corrections in response to load variations. A higher (clockwise) travel control setting results in a closer control of load and a better following of soil contours but larger amounts of hitch movement. Settings in the upper range should be used for fully mounted equipment, especially when operating in terrain that varies significantly (such as crossing terraces). A lower (counterclockwise) travel setting reduces the hitch movement and increases load variations, but limits the amount of hitch movement.

Settings in the lower range should be used with semi-mounted implements or flat terrain where the amount of hitch movement can be restricted without affecting performance.

The hitch response control knob (Fig. 177) varies the speed that the hitch raises and lowers in the load control mode onfy. Turning the knob clockwise, raises or lowers the hitch faster. Turning the knob counterclockwise, raises or lowers the hitch slower. The slower action reduces the sharpness of hitch action.

Tbo slow a speed will limit ability to follow varying terrain.

MECHANICAL AOJUSTASLE MECHANICAL TRANSPORT LOCKOUT

AMBER FLASHING ENABLE (RESET) INDICATOR LAMP

TRAVEL CONTROt KNOB UP/DOWN SELECTOR SWITCH

LOAD

Fig. 176~~View showing location of some of the electronic hitch controls on console. Refer also to Fig. 177.

120

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraphs 201-203

201. OPERATING IN POSITION CONTROL. The tractor and implement must be operated in the field to select the correct position of the hitch. Set the position control lever in the transport lockout position. Place all control knobs in maximum setting of 11. Set up/down rocker switch in down position. If the enable or reset indicator light flashes, move position control lever to match the actual hitch position. When lowering the hitch with the control lever, decrease the hitch position drop speed until implement drops at a desirable rate. (Aii empty hitch may not lower at a setting of 1). Operate tractor and implement in the field. Set the desired implement depth with position control lever. Move the mechanical stop against fi-ont side of control lever. Move the rocker switch to up position to temporarily raise the implement without changing any of the hitch position adjustments. Press the down switch to return the implement to its original working position. Adjust load control operation as outlined in paragraph 202.

NOTE: Always place position control lever in hitch lockout position for implement road transport.

202. OPERATING IN LOAD CONTROL. Tum the load control knob counterclockAvise to decrease load setting until hitch begins to raise. Move position control lever fully forward. Tum travel control knob counterclockwise to reduce the changes in the working depth with changing loads. Atypical operation for a fully mounted implement is a setting of 7 to 10 and a setting of 3 to 5 for a semi-mounted implement. Use the hitch response speed control to adjust the speed at which the electronic hitch will respond to changing soil and load conditions. Slowly tum the control knob counterclockwise to^slow the hitch response. If hitch response speed is adjusted too quickly, it will cause

rapid changes in implement operating depth and rapidly changing loads on the tractor. If adjusted too slowly, implement may not follow the terrain properly.

ELECTRONIC HITCH DIAGNOSTIC CODES Ail Models 203. The electronic hitch diagnostic monitor (Fig. 177) shows the condition of electronic load control system by a diagnostic code. When key switch is tumed to ON position, all seven segments of the LED (light emitting diode) display (Fig. 178) are continuously on for 1 to 2 seconds for a display check.

The "O" code indicates the system is normal. System normal means that electrical and electronic parts of the hitch system are functioning correctly. However, this display does not tell if controls are not adjusted correctly or if there is a hydraulic problem.

If the "O" code is displayed and there is poor lever to hitch movement or the hitch stops abruptly or over shoots in relation to the control lever, the hitch position potentiometer (14—Fig. 179) is out of adjustment.

If the "O" code is displayed and the hitch does not raise, lower or enable, the control lever potentiometer (9) and/or hitch position potentiometer (14) are out of adjustment.

If the "O" code is displayed and the hitch will not lower, the load control potentiometer (3) or the drop speed potentiometer (6) is in the fully counterclockwise position.

If the "O" code is displayed and hitch will not raise or lower, or the hitch has erratic movement, control valve spool is sticking or binding

HITCH FOSlTiON DBOP SPEED CONTROI KNOB

SEVEN SEGMENT DiSPLAY

Fig. 177—View showing location of some of the electronic hitch controls on console. Refer also to Fig. 176.

121

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 203 (Cont.)

If the "A" code is displayed, it indicates low battery voltage (less than 9.8 volts) or a ground in the 8 volt circuits to the left or right hitch pin sensors (15 or 16), or the control lever potentiometer (9), or the hitch position potentiometer (14).

lYS—View of the seven segment LED dispiay on the electronic hitch diagnostic monitor.

12

13

CASE/INTERNATIONAL The "E" code indicates too high battery voltage. If battery voltage exceeds 19 volts, electronic hitch controls will shut down.

The "2" code indicates a failure in the lower portion of the control valve solenoid. Hitch will not lower but will raise.

The **H" code indicates hitch position circuit failure.

Circuit open or grounded or hitch position potentiometer is out of adjustment.

The "P'* code indicates a failure in the control lever circuit. Circuit has an open or ground or the control lever potentiometer is out of adjustment.

The "9" code indicates a travel control circuit failure. Circuit has an open or ground. Electronic hitch system will function in position control only^.

The "L" code indicates a failure in the load control circuit. Circuit is open or has a ground. Electronic hitch system will function in position control only.

If the "S" code is displayed, it indicates a failure in the circuit for the hitch pin sensors (15 and 16).

Electronic hitch system will function in position control only.

The "1" code indicates an up/down switch failure.

Up/down switch is inoperative.

The "6" code indicates a drop speed circuit failure.

Drop speed operates in maximum speed only.

The "7" code indicates a hitch response speed control circuit failure. Response speed operates in maximum speed only.

The "4" code indicates an enable or reset indicator light circuit failure. All other hitch functions are operative.

The "C" code indicates a valve compensation failure (failure of potentiometer or module to synchronize the control lever to hitch).

If a decimal point only is shown as a code, it indicates that tractor ground speed is less than 0.5 mph (0.8 km/h) or ground speed signal is not present.

Hitch system will not operate in load control.

If no code is shown, wire or wires are open, segments are not functioning, monitor is disconnected, monitor is defective, fuse is blown or module is defective.

NOTE: If any of the following codes exist, there wiil be no hitch controi. An "F" code fiashes aiternateiy with an error code.

_ ijg^\^iew showing hitch wiring and location of electronic control units.

1. Reset indicator light 8. Hitch module 2. Up/down rocker switch 9. Control lever potenti2A. Diode ometer 3. Load control potentiometer 10. Console hitch wiring 4. Travel control potenti11. Rear hitch wiring ometer 12. Control valve 13. Wiring protector tubes 5. Hitch response potenti14. Hitch position potentiometer ometer 6. Hitch drop speed potentiometer 15. Left hitch pin sensor 7. Diagnostic monitor 16. Right hitch pin sensor

122

The T , 3" code flashing alternately, indicates a failure in the valve raise solenoid circuit.

The T , A** code flashing alternately, indicates a failure of both the supply voltage and the up/down switch circuits.

The *F, E" code flashing alternately, indicates a too high battery voltage and a failure of the up/down switch circuit.

The *F, H" code flashing alternately, indicates a failure of both the hitch position and the up/down switch circuits.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 The T, P" code flashing alternately, indicates a failure of both the hitch position lever control and the lup/down switch circuits.

ELECTRONIC HITCH CONTROL CIRCUIT TESTS All Models Batteries must be fully charged and all connections must be clean and tight before testing. Use a multimeter for all tests. Wire numbers are stamped continuously on wires.

204. HITCH MODULE VOLTAGE TEST. Disconnect the 37 pin connector. Tests will be made at the terminals of the connector. Key switch must be in ON position.

Check the voltage between terminal 5 for red wire #526 and ground. If test shows less than 12 volts, check for bad 7.5 amp fuse, bad relay, bad circuit between module and relay or bad relay solenoid.

Check for continuity between terminal 1 for black/white wire #500 and ground. If test shows no continuity, check for bad wire between terminal 1 and ground junction block.

There is no way to test the hitch module. If all other components and circuits test good and hitch will not operate, renew the module.

205. UP/DOWN SWITCH DIODE. Disconnect the connector at the up/down switch side of diode.

Tbuch positive probe of ohmmeter to the diode and negative probe to ground. There should be no continuity. If there is continuity, diode is bad.

Tbuch negative probe of ohmmeter to the diode and positive probe to the ground. There should be continuity. If there is no continuity, diode is bad.

206. HITCH UP/DOWN SWITCH. Disconnect connector at up/down switch. Place switch in UP position.

Check for continuity between terminal 7 and terminal 5 on the switch. If there is no continuity, switch is bad.

Place switch in DOWN position. Check for continuity between terminal 2 and terminal 6 on switch. If there is no continuity, switch is bad.

Check for continuity between terminal 1 and terminal 5 on switch. If there is no continuity, switch is bad.

If the above readings are good, disconnect connector on hitch control module and check the circuits between module connector and up/down switch.

Check for continuity between terminal 9 for light blue wire #512 and terminal 2 on up/down switch. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Paragraphs 204-208 Check for continuity between terminal 11 for light blue wire #590 and terminal 1 on up/down switch. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 18 for light blue wire #510 and terminal 7 on up/down switch. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

207. HITCH CONTROL VALVE SOLENOID. Disconnect connector at control valve solenoid.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C on solenoid. Reading should be 3.8-4.2 ohms. If not, solenoid is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal B and terminal C on solenoid. Reading should be 3.8-4.2 ohms. If not, solenoid is bad.

If all readings are good, disconnect connector at control module and test circuits between module connector and the solenoid. Up/down switch must be in DOWN position.

Check for continuity between terminal 15 for light blue wire #513 and terminal A of solenoid connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 9 for light blue wire #512 and terminal B of solenoid connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire, bad connection or bad up/down switch.

Check for continuity between terminal 2 for black wire #511 and terminal C of solenoid connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

208. RH HITCH PIN SENSOR. Disconnect connector at hitch pin sensor. Tfests will be made on sensor.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal B. Reading should be 175K-195K ohms. If not, hitch pin sensor is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C. Reading should be 270-330 ohms. If not, hitch pin sensor is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal B and terminal C. Reading should be 175K-195K ohms. If not, hitch pin sensor is bad.

If all readings are good, disconnect connector at control module and test circuits between module connector and RH hitch pin sensor.

Check for continuity between terminal 13 for black wire #514 and terminal A of hitch pin sensor connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 28 for light blue wire #514 and terminal B of sensor connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

123

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 209-213 Check for continuity between terminal 32 for red wire #514 and terminal C of sensor connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

209. LH HITCH PIN SENSOR. Disconnect connector at hitch pin sensor. Tfests will be made on sensor.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal B. Reading should be 175K-195K ohms. If not, hitch pin sensor is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C. Reading should be 270-330 ohms. If not, hitch pin sensor is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal B and terminal C. Reading should be 175K-195K ohms. If not, hitch pin sensor is bad.

If all readings are good, disconnect connector at control module and test circuits between module connector and LH hitch pin sensor.

Check for continuity between terminal 14 for black wire #515 and terminal A of hitch pin sensor connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 20 for light blue wire #515 and terminal B of sensor connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 33 for red wire #515 and terminal C of sensor connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

210. HITCH POSITION DROP SPEED POTENTIOMETER. Disconnect connector at drop speed potentiometer. Tfests will be made on potentiometer.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be 9000-11000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 900011000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from minimum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.

If all readings are good, disconnect connector at hitch control module and test circuits between module connector and drop speed potentiometer.

Check for continuity between terminal 3 for black wire #502 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 29 for light blue wire #502 and terminal B of potentiometer connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 34 for red wire #502 and terminal C of potentiometer connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

124

CASE/INTERNATIONAL 211. HITCH RESPONSE POTENTIOMETER. Disconnect connector at response potentiometer.

Tfests will be made on potentiometer.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be 9000-11000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 900011000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from minimum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.

If all readings are good, disconnect connector at hitch control module and test circuits between module connector and hitch response potentiometer.

Check for continuity between terminal 4 for black wire #503 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 17 for light blue wire #50S and terminal B of potentiometer connector. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 37 for red wire #503 and terminal C of potentiometer connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

212. TRAVEL CONTROL POTENTIOMETER. Disconnect connector at travel control potentiometer.

Tfests will be made on potentiometer.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be 9000-11000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 900011000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from minimum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.

If all readings are good, disconnect connector at hitch control module and test circuits between module connector and travel control potentiometer.

Check for continuity between terminal 25 for red wire #506 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 26 for light blue wire #506 and terminal B. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 19 for black wire #506 and terminal C. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

213. LOAD CONTROL POTENTIOMETER. Disconnect connector at load control potentiometer.

Tfests will be made on potentiometer.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be 9000-11000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal B. Reading should vary fi:'om 0 to 9000-

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 11000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from minimum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.

If all readings are good disconnect connector at hitch control module and test circuits between module connector and load control potentiometer.

Check for continuity between terminal 35 for red wire #505 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 22 for light blue wire #505 and terminal B. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continvuty between terminal 7 for black wire #505 and terminal C. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

214. CONTROL LEVER POTENTIOMETER. Disconnect connector at control lever potentiometer.

Tfests will be made on potentiometer.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be 4000-6000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 4000-6000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from minimum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.

If all readings are good, disconnect connector at hitch control module and test circuits between mod'ule connector and control lever potentiometer.

Check for continuity between terminal 30 for red wire #504 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 21 for light blue wire #504 and terminal B. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 6 for black wire #504 and terminal C. If there is no continmty, check for bad wire or bad connection.

215. HITCH POSITION POTENTIOMETER. Disconnect connector at the hitch position potentiometer. Tfests will be made on potentiometer.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal C on potentiometer. Reading should be 4000-6000 ohms. If not, potentiometer is bad.

Connect an ohmmeter between terminal A and terminal B. Reading should vary from 0 to 4000-6000 ohms as potentiometer is moved from minimum to maximum. If not, potentiometer is bad.

If all readings are good, disconnect connector at hitch control module and test circuits between module connector and hitch position potentiometer. ^ Check for continuity between terminal 12 for black wire #507 and terminal A of potentiometer connector.

If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Paragraphs 214-218 Check for continuity between terminal 27 for light blue wire #507 and terminal B. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

Check for continuity between terminal 31 for red wire #507 and terminal C. If there is no continuity, check for bad wire or bad connection.

ELECTRONIC HITCH ADJUSTMENTS All Models Be sure batteries are fully charged and all connections are clean and tight before starting adjustment procedures. If necessary, move left rear wheel and tire out for access to hitch valve. Unbolt and remove right console side cover. Using adapter harness CAS-1897, connect hitch tester and digital voltmeter CAS-1638A to the test connector on hitch control module. Set hitch load control and travel control knobs in fully clockwise position. Place up/down switch in DOWN position. Plug black wire into common terminal and red wire into volt terminal. Put test box slide switch in ON position. Put push/pull switch in OFF position.

Put digital voltmeter selector switch to DC volts.

216. CONTROL LEVER POTENTIOMETER CALIBRATION. Tum keyswitch to ON position, but do not start engine. Tum test box position switch to number 1. Move hitch position control lever to full raise position. Voltmeter reading should be 1.71-1.75 volts. If not, adjust control lever potentiometer as follows: With position control lever in full raise position, loosen set screw in bottom of lever on potentiometer. Rotate the potentiometer shaft until reading is 1.71-1.75 volts, then tighten set screw. Move hitch position control lever to the full lower position. Reading on voltmeter should be plus 0.01 to minus 0.01 volts. If not, adjust control lever stop on mounting plate to obtain correct reading.

217. HITCH POSITION POTENTIOMETER CALIBRATION. Tum keyswitch and start engine.

Move hitch position control lever in full lower position. Check to see that hitch is completely down. If not, loosen the link arm clamp bolt and tum the hitch position (rockshaft) potentiometer shaft clockwise until hitch is fully down. Stop tractor engine. Tum keyswitch to ON position, but do not start engine.

Tum test box position switch to number 2. Make sure the link rod is in the bottom of the slot on the lever bracket on end of rockshaft. At this time, reading on voltmeter must be 0.0 to minus 0.02 volts. If necessary, rotate potentiometer shaft to correct reading.

Tighten link arm clamp bolt. Check to be sure the potentiometer voltage is still at 0.0 volts.

218. CENTERING HITCH VALVE. Make sure hitch is fully lowered before starting adjustment.

Disconnect the 37 pin connector from the hitch control

125

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 219 module, then connect the 37 pin connector on the CAS 2028 test box cable. Connect the remaining 37 pin connector to the test box. Connect the 9 pin connector to the test box. Connect the 16 pin connector to the digital readout box. Tum keyswitch and start engine.

Check to see if hitch raises on its own when engine is started. If there is no hitch movement, turn adjustment screw on control valve solenoid core counterclockwise until hitch begins to raise. Make a mark on the solenoid core for the screw slot position. Turn adjustment screw clockwise until hitch begins to lower. Make a mark on solenoid core for screw slot position. Then, move adjustment screw slot to the center position between the two marks on solenoid core.

Depress and release the rocker switch momentary position on the digital readout box (Fig. 180) and observe the display. A decimal point will flash in the lower right corner while hitch is going through a test cycle. When cycle is complete, the readout will display DECIMAL

BAR

BAR

NUMBER

Fig. 160—Various views of hitch vaive centering tooi, CAS'2026, showing decimai point, bars and number in dispiay boxes.

126

a flashing bar on either the top or bottom of the display which will alternate with a flashing number between 1 and 9. A flashing bar on the top indicates the hitch valve is out of adjustment in the raise direction. A flashing bar on the bottom indicates the hitch valve is out of adjustment in the lower direction.

The flashing number indicates the amount of hitch valve adjustment necessary to reach zero. One being a small amount of adjustment and nine, a large amount of adjustment.

NOTE: Do not make any hitch valve adjustment when just the decimai point is flashing on the dispiay.

Adjust the valve solenoid core as required by the readout box display until the flashing zero without a flashing bar is displayed. Tighten locknut on adjusting screw. Disconnect test box cable from the tractor wiring harness and connect tractor harness to the hitch control module.

219. VALVE COMPENSATION ADJUSTMENT. First adjust the hitch position (rockshaft) potentiometer calibration as outlined in paragraph 217, then install 500-1000 lbs. (227-454 kg) of weight on hitch arms Cycle hitch several times to remove any air from cylinders and lines. Place position control lever in middle of its travel slot. Measuring from the lever knob, move control lever 0.016-0.024 inch (4.06.0 mm) in one direction. There must be hitch movement. Move control lever 0.35-0.43 inch (9.0-11.0 mm) in opposite direction. Again, there must be hitch movement. If hitch response does not fall within these specifications, adjust the valve compensation potentiometer on the control module. Adjusting potentiometer screw (Fig. 181) clockwise will increase control lever to hitch response. Adjusting the screw counterclockwise will decrease hdtch response or movement if hitch is overactive or unstable. Remove weight from hitch.

Fig. 161—View showing location of control module potentiometer adjusting screw used in adjusting valve compensation

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 220. HITCH FREE TRAVEL ADJUSTMENT. Tum keyswitch and start engine. Slowly move hitch control lever to the full raise position. Hitch cylinders must not be fully extended against the intemal stop.

Hitch valve solenoid must not be energized when hitch isftiUyraised. Manually lift outer ends of hitch lower lift arms. There must be approximately 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) of free travel as measured from the lift arm ball to the ground. If there is more than 1.0 inch (25.4 mm) of free travel, move link rod ball joint upward in rockshaft lever bracket slot. See Fig. 182. Tighten ball joint retaining nut when adjustment is completed.

HITCH CONTROL VALVE

Paragraphs 220-221 (24) and "O" rings (22 and 26) from body. Remove lockout spool (27) from valve body (15). Unscrew and remove solenoid switch assembly (6) with "O" ring (7).

Remove locknut (1), adjusting screw (2) with "O" ring (3), spring (4) and washer (5) from solenoid. Remove pilot spool (8) and spring (9) from solenoid mounting body (11). Unbolt and remove solenoid mounting body from valve body. Remove plug (18) with "O" ring (19) and pivot plug (16) with "O" ring (17). Remove pivot lever (13) and spring (20). Remove end cap (40) with "O" ring (39), then withdraw control spool assembly (33 through 38). Using vise grip pliers, hold control spool (33) on the nonmachined surface and remove spring bolt (38), spring seats (34 and 37), spacer (36) and spring (35).

All Models 221. R&R AND OVERHAUL. If necessary, move left rear wheel and tire out for access to hitch valve.

Refer to Fig. 183 and disconnect the following lines from the hitch valve: Tube to lube manifold, tube to pto valve, tube to priority valve, tube to rear frame cover and tube to compensator valve. Disconnect valve solenoid wiring connector. Unbolt and remove valve assembly. Plug or cap line openings. Remove tube fittings from valve. Refer to Fig. 184 and remove sensing check body (29), then remove plug (32), sensing spring (31) and check ball (30) from sensing check body. Remove lockout plug and body assembly (21 through 26). Separate plug (21), spring (23), poppet

Fig, 162—To reduce amount of hitch free travel, move link rod ball joint upward in rockshaft iever bracket

Blot

LUBE MANiFOLD

HITCH VALVE

PTO VALVE

TO REAR FRAME PRIORITY VALVE-

COMPENSATOR VALVE

Fig. 163—View showing hydraulic lines to be disconnected from hitch control valve.

127

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraph 222 Clean and inspect all parts for excessive wear or other damage. Inspect all spools and bores for nicks, burrs or scoring. Minor nicks and burrs can be removed with fine emery cloth.

When reassembling, renew all "O" rings and lubricate "O" rings with petroleum jelly. Reassemble by reversing disassembly procedure. When installing spring bolt (38), apply Loctite 242 to the threads and tighten spring bolt to a torque of 60-95 in.-lbs. (7-11 N.m). Tighten solenoid mounting body bolts (10) to a torque of 50-70 in.-lbs. (5-8 N.m). Tighten sensing check body (29) to a torque of 95-120 in.-lbs. (11-14 N.m). Using all new "O" rings, reinstall tube fittings in valve body.

Using a new "O" ring, install control valve on range transmissions housing. The balance of installation is the reverse of removal procedure.

NOTE: The hitch control valve must be centered as outlined in paragraph 218 after valve overhaul.

HYDRAULIC LIFT HOUSING All Models 222. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Tb remove the lift housing, first drain and remove main fuel tank as follows: Unholt and remove tail light panel from hack of cah. Disconnect wiring, fuel supply and breather hoses from fuel level sensor. Remove fuel inlet hose, then loosen screws and remove fiiel inlet tuhe from tank. Unbolt and remove rear handle from cab. Shut off fuel valve and disconnect engine fuel supply hose

'V ,*.' > I

Fig. 184—Exploded view of typical electronic hitch control valve.

1. Locknut 2. Adjusting screw 3. "O"ring 4. Spring 5. Washer 6. Solenoid 7. "O'ring 8. Pilot spool 9. Spring

128

10. Bolt (2) 11. Solenoid mounting body 12. "Oaring 13. Pivot lever 14. "O" rings 15. Valve body 16. Pivot plug

17. "O'ring 18. Plug 19. "O"ring 20. Spring 21. Plug 22. "O"ring 23. Spring 24. Poppet

25. Lockout body 26. "Oaring 27. Lockout spool 28. "O"ring 29. Sensing check body 30. Check ball 31. Sensing spring 32. Plug

33. Control spool 34. Spring seat 35. Spring 36. Spacer 37. Spring seat 38. Springbok 39. "O"ring 40. End cap

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 222 (Cont.)

from valve. Unholt tank support, then using a sling and hoist, remove tank assembly.

Remove the LH remote lines, hitch control cylinder lines, hitch lift cylinder lines and transmission dipstick. Disconnect the differential lock return line, hitch control cylinder lube line, hitch lift cylinder drain lines, pto lines and seat drain line, if so equipped.

Refer to Fig. 185, then unbolt and remove bracket (9), cover (10), potentiometer shaft (11) and link arm (12). Remove bolt (15), lever bracket (14) with link rod (13) and washer (16). Disconnect lift links from lift arms (20) and lower lift links to floor. Unpin and remove external lift cylinders). Remove the lift arms (20). Install a lift eye in hitch control cylinder port in top of housing (5). Remove the 16 bolts (8). Attach a hoist with lift chain and sling, then lift off hydraulic lift housing assembly.

NOTE: Housing is mounted on two dowel pins and must be lifted straight up to prevent binding on dowefs. ;. !

For ease of handling, it is recommended that housing be mounted on an engine stand. Remove cylinder lube tube (21). Drive out roll pin (22) and remove piston rod (25). Loosen lockscrew (23) and remove rockshaft (32) out right side of housing. Remove oil seals (2 and 31) and bushings (3 and 30) if necessary Remove bolts (4 and 6) and remove control cylinder assembly. Remove piston (26) with back-up ring (27) and "O" ring (28). Remove cushion relief valve (35).

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Install relief valve on the ram and pump CAS 10132 and check pressure setting. Pressure setting must be 2750-2850 psi (18960-19650 kPa). If not, renew cushion relief valve.

Renew all "O" rings, back-up ring, gasket and oil seals and reassemble by reversing disassembly procedure keeping the following points in mind. Install new rockshaft bushings (3 and 30) into housing (5) until flush with counterbore and with split of bushing to the top. Tighten cushion relief valve (35) to a torque of 25 ft.-lbs. (35 N.m). Use new seal (33) with chamfer toward housing (5) and install cylinder assembly.

Make certain cylinder is tight against machined pad on housing, then tighten bolts (4 and 6) securely^.

Lubricate rockshaft oil seals (2 and 31) with petroleum jelly and install over rockshaft ends. Carefully install seals until flush with the cover bores. Install lift arms so that timing arrows (Fig. 186) are aligned as shown. Arrow on arms must align with arrow on rockshaft next to the **XX" on the shaft.

Reinstall lift housing assembly by reversing the removal procedure. Adjust hitch position potentiometer, if necessary, as outlined in paragraph 217.

Fig. 185—Expioded view of hitch lift housing and relative parts. Lift arms are timed to rockshaft. Refer to Fig. 186.

1. Gasket 2. Oil seal, left 20. Lift arm, right 3. Bushing, left 21. Cylinder lube tube 4. Bolt (2) 22. Roll pin 5. Housing 23. Lockscrew 6. Bolt (2) 24. Bellcrank 7. Lube tube 25. Connecting rod 8. Bolt (16) 26. Piston 9. Bracket 27. Back-up ring 10. Potentiometer cover 28. "O'ring 11. Potentiometer shaft 29. Cylinder housing 12. Link arm 30. Bushing, right 13. Link rod 31. Oil seal, right 14. Lever bracket 32. Rockshaft 15. Bolt 33. Seal ring 16. Washer 34. "O" ring 17. Roll pin 35. Relief valve 18. Lift cylinder pin 36. "O"ring 37. Plug 19. Pin

Fig. 186—View showing lift arm to rockshaft timing marks. Refer to text.

129

www.maskinisten.net

CASE/INTERNATIONAL

Paragraphs 223-225 HITCH LIFT CYLINDERS (EXTERNAL) AIIIModels 223. R&R AND OVERHAUL. With hitch fully lowered, disconnect hydraulic pressure line and leak offline. Remove upper and lower cylinder pivot pins £ind remove cylinder.

To disassemble cylinder, remove elbow fitting from cyhnder tube. Extend cylinder rod (10—Fig. 187) until retaining ring (5) on end of cylinder rod is visible through hydraulic fitting port in cylinder tube. Working through the port, use a small screwdriver or similar tool to unseat retaining ring (5)fi:'omshallow groove into deep groove in cylinder rod (10). Withdraw cylinder rod from cylinder, then remove seals fi-om cylinder tube.

Bushings (2 and 4) in cylinder rod and cylinder tube are renewable. Install back-up ring (6), seal ring (7) and "O" ring (8) in that order in groove in cylinder tube. Install rod seal (9) and wiper seal (11) in top of cylinder tube. See Fig. 188. Lubricate seals with

petroleum jelly, then install cylinder rod with retaining ring in deepest groove in rod. Work retaining ring into shallow groove using a screwdriver through hydraulic fitting port in cylinder tube.

Install cylinder by reversing removal procedure.

Lube fittings (3) must be toward the rear. Repeat operation for opposite lift assist cylinder as necessary, if so equipped.

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES All Models 224. OPERATION. All tractors may be equipped with 1, 2, 3 or 4 remote valves. Remote valves are located on right side of tractor and are mounted on outside of steering priority valve. First remote valve has priority of fiuid fiow. Flow will then be supplied to the 2nd 3rd and 4th remote circuits and to hitch control valve. Remote valves are controlled by levers on console. Each remote valve has a variable fiow control. Flow control levers are located directly behind remote control levers. Each remote valve is equipped with a single load check valve. Load check valve will hold implement in hydraulically locked position with no leakdown. To operate remote circuit in float control, move fioat lockout from fi-ont of lever slot in console. This will allow control lever to be moved fully forward in slot for fioat position. Each remote valve is connected to a remote coupler at rear of tractor.

225. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Loosen set screws and disconnect fiow control cables. Loosen jam nut on remote control cable, then unbolt fiange from valve.

Turn the sleeve on cable until connecting pin can be

Fig. 187—Exploded view of hitch lift assist (external) cylinder. Models 7110 and 7120 are equipped with one lift assist cylinder and Models 7130 and 7140 are equipped with two lift assist cylinders.

1. Cylinder tube 5. Retaining ring 2. Bushing (2) 6. Back-up ring 9. Rod seal 3. Lube fittings 7. Seal ring 10. Cylinder rod 4. Bushing(2) 8. "Oaring 11. Wiper seal

130

Fig. 188—View showing correct instailation of seals in lift assist cylinder. Refer to Fig. 187 for legend.

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140

Paragraph 225 (Cont.) removed. Disconnect hydraulic hoses and tubes. Unbolt and remove end cover, then remove remote valves.

Disassembly procedure is the same for all remote valves. Refer to Fig. 189 or 190 and proceed as follows: Remove flow control gland nut and adjusting rod assembly (65 through 73). Pull adjusting rod (72) from gland nut (66). Remove seal ring (65) and "O" ring (67) from nut and remove back-up ring (68), "O" ring (69), thrust races (70) and thrust bearing (71) from adjusting rod (72). Roll pin (73) can be removed if damaged. Remove flow control sleeve (78) from valve body. Remove flow control spool (77) from sleeve.

NOTE: Sleeve (78) for first remote valve has two rows of holes for oil control. On 2nd, 3rd and 4th remote valves, sleeve has one row of holes. Fiow control spool (77) for first remote valve has a center land. Spool for 2nd, 3rd and 4th remote valves does not have the center land.

Remove snap ring (74) and plug (75) with "O" ring (76) from sleeve. Removeflowcontrol spring (79) from valve body. Loosen locknut (48) and remove adjusting screw (47). Remove locknut and "O" ring (46) from adjusting screw. Remove poppet assembly from deFig. 189—Exploded view of typical first remote valve used on all models.

1. Control spool 41. Washer 2. Dust seal 42. Poppet spring 3. "O"ring 43. Washer 4. Remote valve body 44. "Oaring 5. "O"ring 45. Back-up ring 6. Plug 46. "O"ring 7. Load check piston 47. Adjusting screw 8. Washer 48. Locknut 9. Retaining ring 49. "O"ring 10. "O"ring 50. Retainer 11. Back-up rings 51. Upper cup 12. "Oaring 52. Detent centering spring 13. "O"ring 53. Lower cup 14. Check valve body 54. "O" ring 15. "O"ring 55. Detent stud 16. Load check spool 56. Back-up ring 17. Poppet 57. "0^'ring 18. Load check spool spring 58. Body 19. Retainer plug 59. "Oaring 21. Load check spring 60. Back-up ring 22. "O'ring 61. Check ball 23. Plug 62. Check valve spring 24. Washer (top) 63. "O"ring 25. Detent ball (8) 64. Plug 26. Washer (bottom) 65. Seal ring 27. Back-up ring 66. Gland nut 28. "O"ring 67. "O"ring 29. Piston 68. Back-up ring 30. "O"ring 69. "O"ring 31. Back-up ring 70. Thrust races 32. Detent spring 71. Thrust bearing 33. Retainer 72. Adjusting rod 34. Plug 73. Roll pin 35. Snap ring 74. Snap ring . "O"ring 75. Plug 37. Orifice washer 76. "O" ring 38. "Oaring 77. Flow control spool 39. Detent housing 78. Sleeve 40. Poppet 79. Flow control spring

Flg. 190—Exploded view of typicai second, third or fourth remote vaive used on all models so equipped.

Remote valve is identical to first remote valve shown in Fig. 189 except for Items 77 and 78.

131

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraphs 226-227 tent housing (39). Separate back-up ring (45), "O" ring (44), washer (43), spring (42) and washer (41) from poppet (40). Remove load check plug (23) with "O" ring (22), load check spring (21) and load check spool assembly. Unscrew retainer plug (19) and remove load check spool spring (18) and poppet (17) from load check spool (16). Remove load check valve body (14) with piston assembly. Remove "O" rings (10, 12 and 13) and back-up rings (11) from check valve body and retaining ring (9) and washer (8) from piston (7).

Place valve body (4) in a press and push detent retainer (33) down, remove snap ring (35) and release pressure. Remove retainer (33) and detent spring (32). Unbolt and remove detent housing (39), then remove "O" rings (36 and 38) and orifice washer (37) from detent housing. Remove detent piston (29), washers (24 and 26) and eight balls (25). Remove "O" rings (28 and 30) and back-up rings (27 and 31) from piston. Remove detent stud (55), "O" ring (54), spring cups (51 and 53), detent centering spring (52), retainer (50) and "O" ring (49). Remove control spool (1), dust seal (2) and "O" ring (3) from valve bocfy.

Remove check valve plug (64) v^th "O" ring (63), check valve spring (62) and check ball (61), then unscrew and remove check valve body (58). Remove "O" rings (57 and 59) and back-up rings (56 and 60) from check valve bo<fy. Remove plug (6) and "O" ring (5) from remote valve body.

Clean and inspect all parts and renew any showing excessive wear or other damage. Check remote valve springs against the following specifications: Check valve spring (62) should have a free length of 0.455 inch (11.56 mm) and should test 0.09-0.11 lbs. (0.400.48 N) when compressed to a length of 0.4 inch (10.16 mm). Detent centering spring (52) should have a free length of 2.36 inches (60.05 mm) and should test 20.68-25.40 lbs. (92-113 N) when compressed to a length of 1.25 inches (31.75 mm). Detent spring (32) should have a free length of 1.27 inches (32.16 mm) and should test 71.94-88.13 lbs. (320-392 N) when compressed to a length of 0.826 inch (20.98 mm).

Check valve spool spring (18) should have a free length of 1.23 inches (31.22 mm) and should test 9.0-11.0 lbs. (40-49 N) when compressed to a length of 0.93 inch (23.52 mm). Load check spring(21) should have a free length of 3.27 inches (83 mm) and should test 3.15-3.82 lbs. (14-17 N) when compressed to a length of 1.21 inches (30.78 mm). Poppet spring (42) should have a free length of 1.14 inches (28.93 mm) and should test 17.1-20.9 lbs. (76-93 N) when compressed to a length of 0.79 inch (20.18 mm). Flow control spring (79) should have a free length of 2.48 inches (63.09 mm) and should test 26.98-33.05 lbs.

(120-147 N) when compressed to a length of 2.02 inches (51.23 mm). Renew any spring which fails to meet the specifications.

132

CASE/INTERNATIONAL Using all new "O" rings, back-up rings and seals, reassemble remote valve by reversing disassembly procedure, keeping the following points in mind.

Tighten plug (6—Fig. 189 or 190) to a torque of 5-6 ft.-lbs. (6-8 N.m). Tighten plug (64) to a torque of 12-14 ft.-lbs. (16-19 N.m). When installing spring cups (51 and 53), shallow cup (51) goes on the top and deep cup (53) goes on the bottom. Tighten detent stud (55) to a torque of 9-12 ft.-lbs. (12-16 N.m). Install orifice washer (37) with small end to the top. Tighten detent housing bolts to a torque of 45-60 in.-lbs. (5-7 N.m). Apply Loctite 242 to threads of retainer plug (19) and tighten to a torque of 3-4 ft.-lbs. (4-5 N.m).

Tighten load check body (14) to a torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m). Tighten load check plug (23) to a torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. (34-41 N.m). When installing thrust races (70), install the thickest race first.

Tighten gland nut (66) to a torque of 30-35 ft.-lbs.

(41-47 N.m).

Using all new "O" rings, reinstall remote valves by reversing the removal procedure. Tighten end cover nuts to a torque of 93-112 ft.-lbs. (125-150 N.m).

Adjust valve linkage as outlined in paragraph 226 and detent release pressure as in paragraph 227.

226. VALVE LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT, To adjust the remote valve linkage, move control levers to neutral position. Install lock pin through slots in levers. See Fig. 191. Loosen locknut at top of control cable sleeve. Loosen mounting bolts for sleeve fiange until sleeve is free to turn. Turn sleeve counterclockwise until it no longer contacts the valve surface. Turn sleeve clockwise until sleeve just contacts valve surface, then turn sleeve V4 turn more. Tighten fiange mounting bolts. Tighten locknut against the sleeve.

Remove neutral lock pin and check all four detented valve spool positions. If adjustment is not correct, disconnect linkage from valve spool and check neutral position of valve spool. Top of spool must be IV4 inch (32) mm) above valve face. If spool height is not correct, remove and disassemble valve and check for improper assembly. If spool height is correct, repeat linkage adjustment.

To adjust the flow control linkage, loosen the locknut on lower end of flow control cable. Push flow control lever fully to the right side position. Make sure the set screw is tight against the flat side of flow adjusting rod. Turn flow adjusting rod fully counterclockwise. Hold bottom end of cable from turning and tighten locknut against the cable.

227. VALVE DETENT RELEASE PRESSURE. To check and adjust detent release pressure, connect flowmeter inlet and outlet hoses to the No. 1 remote coupler. Move flow control to the maximum position.

Start tractor and operate at 2200 rpm. Move No. 1 remote lever to the lower position. Turn load valve on flowmeter until there is a reading of 2250-2300 psi

www.maskinisten.net

MODELS 7110-7120-7130-7140 (15513-15858 kPa). The remote valve lever must Mckout to neutral position at this pressure. If not, oosen locknut (48—Figs. 189 or 190) and turn detent [justing screw (47) clockwise to increase pressure or counterclockwise to decrease pressure. When detent release pressure is correct, tighten locknut. Repeat operation for other remote valves.

CAB All models are equipped with a Silent Gardian II cab, heater and air conditioning.

Paragraph 228 Disconnect cab to chassis ground cable. Disconnect hitch wiring harness, transmission harness and engine harness from cab platform. Identify and disconnect brake tubes at brake valve. Remove nut and washer from left and right front cab mount bolts. Prop up hood and remove left hood cylinder. Loosen air conditioner compressor and remove drive belt. Unbolt condenser and compressor and carefully lay them in the cab. Remove cab roof cap bolts, disconnect light wiring and remove roof cap. Install a chain down inside of all four corner channels and hook to bottom of channels. Connect chains to cab removal lift-

All Models

3/4 Inch (19 mm) Holes

228. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Tb remove the cab assembly, first place transmission shift lever in PARK position and block tractor wheels secure^.

Remove battery covers and disconnect battery cables.

Unbolt and remove steps. Disconnect forward-reverse linkage and the inching pedal spool linkage, then remove adjusting sleeves from cables. Raise hood and remove side panels. Shut off valves and disconnect heater hoses. Disconnect throttle cable from injection pump. Disconnect cable from cab power relay on firewall. Identify and disconnect steering lines from hand pump. Disconnect transmission control linkage. Remove main fuel tank. Disconnect remote valve linkage and pto valve linkage. Disconnect park lock linkage. Remove lower cab covers.

1/4x2 Inch Angle Iron 1/4x2 Inch Angle Iron

50 Inch (1270 mm)

8-1/2 Inch (216 mm)

2 Inch (51 mm)

Fig. 192—View showing cab removai bracket, which can be fabricated using dimensions shown.

CONTROL LEVER

LOCK PIN

LOCK NUT

SLEEVE

FLANGE

Fig. 191—View showing remote control valve linkage adjustment. Refer to text.

133

www.maskinisten.net

Paragraph 228 (Cont.)

CASE/INTERNATIONAL bracket. See Fig. 192. Attach a hoist to lift bracket.

Remove nuts and washers from left and right rear cab mounts. Slowly raise cab and check to see that wiring, tubes and cables have been disconnected. Lift' off cab assembly as shown in Fig. 193.

Reinstall cab by reversing removal procedures. Install cab mount washers and nuts and tighten nuts to a torque of 140-180 ft.-lbs. (190-244 N.m). Remove lift bracket and install roof cap.

F/g. i93--Cab being removed, using lifting bracicetand tioist

134